diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/administrivia/administrivia.xml | 100 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/appendix/gpl.xml | 236 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/appendix/preseed.xml | 1513 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/appendix/random-bits.xml | 1559 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/bookinfo.xml | 69 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml | 3542 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/boot-new/boot-new.xml | 451 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/hardware/hardware.xml | 2534 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/howto/installation-howto.xml | 218 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/install-methods/install-methods.xml | 1753 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/partitioning/partitioning.xml | 898 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/post-install/post-install.xml | 623 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/preface.xml | 14 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/preparing/preparing.xml | 1737 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml | 2700 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | nb/welcome/welcome.xml | 361 |
16 files changed, 18308 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/nb/administrivia/administrivia.xml b/nb/administrivia/administrivia.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bab41a188 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/administrivia/administrivia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<!-- Start of file administrivia/administrivia.xml --> +<!-- $Id: administrivia.xml 43043 2006-11-30 12:08:35Z fjp $ --> + +<appendix id="administrivia"> + <title +>Administrivia</title> + + + <sect1 id="about"> + <title +>About This Document</title> + +<para +>This manual was created for Sarge's debian-installer, based on the Woody installation manual for boot-floppies, which was based on earlier Debian installation manuals, and on the Progeny distribution manual which was released under GPL in 2003. </para +><para +>This document is written in DocBook XML. Output formats are generated by various programs using information from the <classname +>docbook-xml</classname +> and <classname +>docbook-xsl</classname +> packages. </para +><para +>In order to increase the maintainability of this document, we use a number of XML features, such as entities and profiling attributes. These play a role akin to variables and conditionals in programming languages. The XML source to this document contains information for each different architecture — profiling attributes are used to isolate certain bits of text as architecture-specific. </para +><para condition="about-langteam" +>Translators can use this paragraph to acknowledge the people responsible for the translation of the manual. Translation teams are advised to just mention the coordinator and maybe major contributors and thank everybody else in a phrase like "all translators and reviewers from the translation team for {your language} at {your l10n mailinglist}". See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph. Its condition is "about-langteam". </para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="contributing"> + <title +>Contributing to This Document</title> + +<para +>If you have problems or suggestions regarding this document, you should probably submit them as a bug report against the package <classname +>installation-guide</classname +>. See the <classname +>reportbug</classname +> package or read the online documentation of the <ulink url="&url-bts;" +>Debian Bug Tracking System</ulink +>. It would be nice if you could check the <ulink url="&url-bts;installation-guide" +>open bugs against installation-guide</ulink +> to see whether your problem has already been reported. If so, you can supply additional corroboration or helpful information to <email +><replaceable +>XXXX</replaceable +>@bugs.debian.org</email +>, where <replaceable +>XXXX</replaceable +> is the number for the already-reported bug. </para +><para +>Better yet, get a copy of the DocBook source for this document, and produce patches against it. The DocBook source can be found at the <ulink url="&url-d-i-websvn;" +>debian-installer WebSVN</ulink +>. If you're not familiar with DocBook, don't worry: there is a simple cheatsheet in the manuals directory that will get you started. It's like html, but oriented towards the meaning of the text rather than the presentation. Patches submitted to the debian-boot mailing list (see below) are welcomed. For instructions on how to check out the sources via SVN, see <ulink url="&url-d-i-readme;" +>README</ulink +> from the source root directory. </para +><para +>Please do <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> contact the authors of this document directly. There is also a discussion list for &d-i;, which includes discussions of this manual. The mailing list is <email +>debian-boot@lists.debian.org</email +>. Instructions for subscribing to this list can be found at the <ulink url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;" +>Debian Mailing List Subscription</ulink +> page; or you can browse the <ulink url="&url-debian-list-archives;" +>Debian Mailing List Archives</ulink +> online. </para> + + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="contributors"> + <title +>Major Contributions</title> + +<para +>This document was originally written by Bruce Perens, Sven Rudolph, Igor Grobman, James Treacy, and Adam Di Carlo. Sebastian Ley wrote the Installation Howto. Many, many Debian users and developers contributed to this document. Particular note must be made of Michael Schmitz (m68k support), Frank Neumann (original author of the <ulink url="&url-m68k-old-amiga-install;" +>Amiga install manual</ulink +>), Arto Astala, Eric Delaunay/Ben Collins (SPARC information), Tapio Lehtonen, and Stéphane Bortzmeyer for numerous edits and text. We have to thank Pascal Le Bail for useful information about booting from USB memory sticks. Miroslav Kuře has documented a lot of the new functionality in Sarge's debian-installer. </para +><para +>Extremely helpful text and information was found in Jim Mintha's HOWTO for network booting (no URL available), the <ulink url="&url-debian-faq;" +>Debian FAQ</ulink +>, the <ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +>Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink +>, the <ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;" +>Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink +>, the <ulink url="&url-alpha-faq;" +>Linux/Alpha FAQ</ulink +>, amongst others. The maintainers of these freely available and rich sources of information must be recognized. </para +><para +>The section on chrooted installations in this manual (<xref linkend="linux-upgrade"/>) was derived in part from documents copyright Karsten M. Self. </para +><para arch="x86" +>The section on installations over plip in this manual (<xref linkend="plip"/>) was based on the <ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;" +>PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink +> by Gilles Lamiral. </para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="trademarks"> + <title +>Trademark Acknowledgement</title> +<para +>All trademarks are property of their respective trademark owners. </para> + </sect1> +</appendix> + +<!-- End of file administrivia/administrivia.xml --> diff --git a/nb/appendix/gpl.xml b/nb/appendix/gpl.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc75264a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/appendix/gpl.xml @@ -0,0 +1,236 @@ +<!-- Start of file appendix/gpl.xml --> +<!-- $Id: gpl.xml 38979 2006-07-13 13:33:24Z fjp $ --> + +<appendix id="appendix-gpl" +><title +>GNU General Public License</title> + +<note condition="gpl-unofficial" +><para +>[[This note, consisting of two paragraphs, should only be included in your translation if you translate the GPL in this appendix. See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph and for additional information. Its condition is "gpl-unofficial".]] [[LEAVE THIS PARAGRAPH IN ENGLISH! Only replace {language} with the English name of your language. Do not change the link to the GPL!]] This is an unofficial translation of the GNU General Public License into {language}. It was not published by the Free Software Foundation, and does not legally state the distribution terms for software that uses the GNU GPL — only the original <ulink url="&url-gnu-copyleft;" +>English text</ulink +> of the GNU GPL does that. However, we hope that this translation will help {language} speakers to better understand the GNU GPL. </para +><para +>[[See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph and for additional information. Its condition is "gpl-unofficial".]] [[THIS PARAGRAPH SHOULD BE TRANSLATED. Replace {language} with the English name of your language before translating. Do not change the link to the GPL!]] This is an unofficial translation of the GNU General Public License into {language}. It was not published by the Free Software Foundation, and does not legally state the distribution terms for software that uses the GNU GPL — only the original <ulink url="&url-gnu-copyleft;" +>English text</ulink +> of the GNU GPL does that. However, we hope that this translation will help {language} speakers to better understand the GNU GPL. </para +></note> +<para +>Version 2, June 1991 <informalexample +><screen +>Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + + <simplesect +><title +>Preamble</title> +<para +>The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the gnu General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the gnu Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. </para +><para +>When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. </para +><para +>To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. </para +><para +>For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. </para +><para +>We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. </para +><para +>Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. </para +><para +>Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. </para +><para +>The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. </para> + </simplesect> + + <simplesect +><title +>GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE</title> +<para> + +<emphasis role="bold" +>TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION</emphasis> + +</para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>0.</emphasis +> This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". </para +><para +>Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>1.</emphasis +> You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. </para +><para +>You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>2.</emphasis +> You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: </para> +<orderedlist numeration='loweralpha' +><listitem +><para +>You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) </para +></listitem +></orderedlist> +<para +>These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. </para +><para +>Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. </para +><para +>In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>3.</emphasis +> You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: </para> +<orderedlist numeration='loweralpha' +><listitem +><para +>Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) </para +></listitem +></orderedlist> +<para +>The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. </para +><para +>If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>4.</emphasis +> You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>5.</emphasis +> You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>6.</emphasis +> Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>7.</emphasis +> If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. </para +><para +>If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. </para +><para +>It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. </para +><para +>This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>8.</emphasis +> If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>9.</emphasis +> The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>10.</emphasis +> If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. </para +><para> + +<emphasis role="bold" +>NO WARRANTY</emphasis> + +</para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>11.</emphasis +> BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. </para +><para +><emphasis role="bold" +>12.</emphasis +> IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL AND COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. </para +><para> + +<emphasis role="bold" +>END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS</emphasis> + +</para> + </simplesect> + + <simplesect +><title +>How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs</title> +<para +>If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. </para +><para +>To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <informalexample +><screen +><replaceable>one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.</replaceable> +Copyright (C) <replaceable>year name of author</replaceable> + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. </para +><para +>If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: <informalexample +><screen +>Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) <replaceable>year name of author</replaceable> +Gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details +type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome +to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' +for details. +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items — whatever suits your program. </para +><para +>You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: <informalexample +><screen +>Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the +program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written +by James Hacker. + +<replaceable>signature of Ty Coon</replaceable>, 1 April 1989 +Ty Coon, President of Vice +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. </para> + </simplesect> +</appendix> +<!-- End of file appendix/gpl.xml --> diff --git a/nb/appendix/preseed.xml b/nb/appendix/preseed.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dac11333d --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/appendix/preseed.xml @@ -0,0 +1,1513 @@ +<!-- Start of file appendix/preseed.xml --> +<!-- $Id: preseed.xml 57721 2009-02-28 16:38:01Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- +Be careful with the format of this file as it is parsed to generate +the example preconfiguration file. +In that file all text between <informalexample +> tags that have the +attribute 'role="example"' set is included, except if a 'condition' +attribute is in force that does not match the specified release or if an +'arch' attribute is in force that does not match the specified architecture. + +Currently only a single variant of the example file is generated (for i386). +--> + +<appendix id="appendix-preseed"> +<title +>Automating the installation using preseeding</title> + +<para +>This appendix explains how to preseed answers to questions in &d-i; to automate your installation. </para +><para +>The configuration fragments used in this appendix are also available as an example preconfiguration file from &urlset-example-preseed;. </para> + + <sect1 id="preseed-intro"> + <title +>Introduction</title> +<para +>Preseeding provides a way to set answers to questions asked during the installation process, without having to manually enter the answers while the installation is running. This makes it possible to fully automate most types of installation and even offers some features not available during normal installations. </para +><para +>Preseeding is not required. If you use an empty preseed file, the installer will behave just the same way as in a normal manual installation. Each question you preseed will (if you got it right!) modify the installation in some way from that baseline. </para> + + <sect2 id="preseed-methods"> + <title +>Preseeding methods</title> +<para +>There are three methods that can be used for preseeding: <firstterm +>initrd</firstterm +>, <firstterm +>file</firstterm +> and <firstterm +>network</firstterm +>. Initrd preseeding will work with any installation method and supports preseeding of more things, but it requires the most preparation. File and network preseeding each can be used with different installation methods. </para +><para +>The following table shows which preseeding methods can be used with which installation methods. <informaltable +> <tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Installation method</entry +><entry +>initrd</entry> + <entry +>file</entry +><entry +>network</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>CD/DVD</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes<footnote id='apx-ps-net' +> <para +>but only if you have network access, and set <literal +>preseed/url</literal +> appropriately </para> + + </footnote +></entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>netboot</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>no</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>hd-media <phrase condition="bootable-usb" +>(including usb-stick)</phrase +></entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes<footnoteref linkend='apx-ps-net'/></entry> +</row +><row condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <entry +>floppy based (cd-drivers)</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>yes<footnoteref linkend='apx-ps-net'/></entry> +</row +><row condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <entry +>floppy based (net-drivers)</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>no</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> +</row +><row arch="s390"> + <entry +>generic/tape</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>no</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> +</row> +</tbody> + +</tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para +><para +>An important difference between the preseeding methods is the point at which the preconfiguration file is loaded and processed. For initrd preseeding this is right at the start of the installation, before the first question is even asked. For file preseeding this is after the CD or CD image has been loaded. For network preseeding it is only after the network has been configured. </para +><para +>Obviously, any questions that have been processed before the preconfiguration file is loaded cannot be preseeded (this will include questions that are only displayed at medium or low priority, like the first hardware detection run). <xref linkend="preseed-bootparms"/> offers a way to avoid these questions being asked. </para +><para +>In order to avoid the questions that would normally appear before the preseeding occurs, you can start the installer in <quote +>auto</quote +> mode. This delays questions that would normally be asked too early for preseeding (i.e. language, country and keyboard selection) until after the network comes up, thus allowing them to be preseeded. It also runs the installation at critical priority, which avoids many unimportant questions. See <xref linkend="preseed-auto"/> for details. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-limitations"> + <title +>Limitations</title> +<para +>Although most questions used by &d-i; can be preseeded using this method, there are some notable exceptions. You must (re)partition an entire disk or use available free space on a disk; it is not possible to use existing partitions. </para> + </sect2> + +<!-- Joeyh feels this is too technical, so leave it out for now + <sect2 id="preseed-debconf"> + <title +>Debconf basics</title> +<para> + +Preseeding makes use of the <classname +>debconf</classname +> framework. This +framework is the preferred mechanism used in Debian to interact with the user +when configuring packages and also forms the heart of &d-i;. +In the <classname +>debconf</classname +> framework questions or dialogs are +based on <firstterm +>templates</firstterm +>. There are different types of +templates for different types of questions. The actual questions are +<quote +>generated</quote +> from templates at runtime; multiple questions can +use the same template. + +</para +><para> + +The following types of templates are relevant for preseeding. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist spacing="compact"> +<listitem +><para> + string: allows the user to type any value +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + password: similar to string but the value typed is not displayed +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + boolean: for yes/no or true/false type of questions +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + select: allows the user to select one option from a list +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + multiselect: allows the user to select zero, one or more options from a list +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + note: used to display a message +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +In &d-i; templates are stored in a readable file +<filename +>/var/cache/debconf/templates.dat</filename +>. This file contains all fixed +text and all translations. It can also contain a default value for the +template. The fixed text can include variables that will be replaced at +runtime. + +</para +><para> + +Another readable file <filename +>/var/cache/debconf/questions.dat</filename> +is used to store the values for variables and the answers given to questions. +A question always refers to the template used to ask it. For obvious +security reasons the values for questions of type <quote +>password</quote> +are stored in a separate, non-readable file in the same directory. + +</para> + </sect2> +--> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="preseed-using"> + <title +>Using preseeding</title> +<para +>You will first need to create a preconfiguration file and place it in the location from where you want to use it. Creating the preconfiguration file is covered later in this appendix. Putting it in the correct location is fairly straightforward for network preseeding or if you want to read the file off a floppy or usb-stick. If you want to include the file on a CD or DVD, you will have to remaster the ISO image. How to get the preconfiguration file included in the initrd is outside the scope of this document; please consult the developers' documentation for &d-i;. </para +><para +>An example preconfiguration file that you can use as basis for your own preconfiguration file is available from &urlset-example-preseed;. This file is based on the configuration fragments included in this appendix. </para> + + <sect2 id="preseed-loading"> + <title +>Loading the preconfiguration file</title> +<para +>If you are using initrd preseeding, you only have to make sure a file named <filename +>preseed.cfg</filename +> is included in the root directory of the initrd. The installer will automatically check if this file is present and load it. </para +><para +>For the other preseeding methods you need to tell the installer what file to use when you boot it. This is normally done by passing the kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot time or by editing the bootloader configuration file (e.g. <filename +>syslinux.cfg</filename +>) and adding the parameter to the end of the append line(s) for the kernel. </para +><para +>If you do specify the preconfiguration file in the bootloader configuration, you might change the configuration so you don't need to hit enter to boot the installer. For syslinux this means setting the timeout to <literal +>1</literal +> in <filename +>syslinux.cfg</filename +>. </para +><para +>To make sure the installer gets the right preconfiguration file, you can optionally specify a checksum for the file. Currently this needs to be a md5sum, and if specified it must match the preconfiguration file or the installer will refuse to use it. </para> + +<informalexample +><screen +>Boot parameters to specify: +- if you're netbooting: + preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed.cfg + preseed/url/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d + +- if you're booting a remastered CD: + preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed.cfg + preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d + +- if you're installing from USB media (put the preconfiguration file in the + toplevel directory of the USB stick): + preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed.cfg + preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>Note that <filename +>preseed/url</filename +> can be shortened to just <filename +>url</filename +> and <filename +>preseed/file</filename +> to just <filename +>file</filename +> when they are passed as boot parameters. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-bootparms"> + <title +>Using boot parameters to preseed questions</title> +<para +>If a preconfiguration file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values on the command line when booting the installer. </para +><para +>Boot parameters can also be used if you do not really want to use preseeding, but just want to provide an answer for a specific question. Some examples where this can be useful are documented elsewhere in this manual. </para +><para +>To set a value to be used inside &d-i;, just pass <userinput +><replaceable +>path/to/variable</replaceable +>=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +> for any of the preseed variables listed in the examples in this appendix. If a value is to be used to configure packages for the target system, you will need to prepend the <firstterm +>owner</firstterm +><footnote +> <para +> The owner of a debconf variable (or template) is normally the name of the package that contains the corresponding debconf template. For variables used in the installer itself the owner is <quote +>d-i</quote +>. Templates and variables can have more than one owner which helps to determine whether they can be removed from the debconf database if the package is purged. </para +> </footnote +> of the variable as in <userinput +><replaceable +>owner</replaceable +>:<replaceable +>path/to/variable</replaceable +>=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +>. If you don't specify the owner, the value for the variable will not be copied to the debconf database in the target system and thus remain unused during the configuration of the relevant package. </para +><para +>Normally, preseeding a question in this way will mean that the question will not be asked. To set a specific default value for a question, but still have the question asked, use <quote +>?=</quote +> instead of <quote +>=</quote +> as operator. See also <xref linkend="preseed-seenflag"/>. </para +><para +>Note that some variables that are frequently set at the boot prompt have a shorter alias. If an alias is available, it is used in the examples in this appendix instead of the full variable. The <literal +>preseed/url</literal +> variable for example has been aliased as <literal +>url</literal +>. Another example is the <literal +>tasks</literal +> alias, which translates to <literal +>tasksel:tasksel/first</literal +>. </para +><para +>A <quote +>--</quote +> in the boot options has special meaning. Kernel parameters that appear after the last <quote +>--</quote +> may be copied into the bootloader configuration for the installed system (if supported by the installer for the bootloader). The installer will automatically filter out any options (like preconfiguration options) that it recognizes. </para> +<note +><para +>Current linux kernels (2.6.9 and later) accept a maximum of 32 command line options and 32 environment options, including any options added by default for the installer. If these numbers are exceeded, the kernel will panic (crash). (For earlier kernels, these numbers were lower.) </para +></note> +<para +>For most installations some of the default options in your bootloader configuration file, like <literal +>vga=normal</literal +>, may be safely removed which may allow you to add more options for preseeding. </para> +<note +><para +>It may not always be possible to specify values with spaces for boot parameters, even if you delimit them with quotes. </para +></note> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-auto"> + <title +>Auto mode</title> +<para +>There are several features of Debian Installer that combine to allow fairly simple command lines at the boot prompt to result in arbitrarily complex customized automatic installs. To illustrate this, here are some examples that can be used at the boot prompt: <informalexample +><screen +> +auto url=autoserver +</screen +></informalexample +> This relies on there being a DHCP server that will get the machine to the point where <literal +>autoserver</literal +> can be resolved by DNS, perhaps after adding the local domain if that was provided by DHCP. If this was done at a site where the domain is <literal +>example.com</literal +>, and they have a reasonably sane DHCP setup, it would result in the preseed file being retrieved from <literal +>http://autoserver.example.com/d-i/&releasename;/./preseed.cfg</literal +>. </para +><para +>The last part of that url (<literal +>d-i/&releasename;/./preseed.cfg</literal +>) is taken from <literal +>auto-install/defaultroot</literal +>. By default this includes the directory <literal +>&releasename;</literal +> to allow future versions to specify their own codename and let people migrate forwards in a controlled manner. The <literal +>/./</literal +> bit is used to indicate a root, relative to which subsequent paths can be anchored (for use in preseed/include and preseed/run). This allows files to be specified either as full URLs, paths starting with / that are thus anchored, or even paths relative to the location where the last preseed file was found. This can be used to construct more portable scripts where an entire hierarchy of scripts can be moved to a new location without breaking it, for example copying the files onto a USB stick when they started out on a web server. In this example, if the preseed file sets <literal +>preseed/run</literal +> to <literal +>/scripts/late_command.sh</literal +> then the file will be fetched from <literal +>http://autoserver.example.com/d-i/&releasename;/./scripts/late_command.sh</literal +>. </para +><para +>If there is no local DHCP or DNS infrastructure, or if you do not want to use the default path to <filename +>preseed.cfg</filename +>, you can still use an explicit url, and if you don't use the <literal +>/./</literal +> element it will be anchored to the start of the path (i.e. the third <literal +>/</literal +> in the URL). Here is an example that requires minimal support from the local network infrastructure: <informalexample +><screen +> +auto url=<replaceable>http://192.168.1.2/path/to/mypreseed.file</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> The way this works is that: <itemizedlist spacing="compact"> +<listitem +><para +>if the URL is missing a protocol, http is assumed, </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>if the hostname section contains no periods, it has the domain derived from DHCP appended to it, and </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>if there's no <literal +>/</literal +>'s after the hostname, then the default path is added. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>In addition to specifying the url, you can also specify settings that do not directly affect the behavior of &d-i; itself, but can be passed through to scripts specified using <literal +>preseed/run</literal +> in the loaded preseed file. At present, the only example of this is <literal +>auto-install/classes</literal +>, which has an alias <literal +>classes</literal +>. This can be used thus: <informalexample +><screen +> +auto url=<replaceable>example.com</replaceable> classes=<replaceable>class_A;class_B</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> The classes could for example denote the type of system to be installed, or the localization to be used. </para +><para +>It is of course possible to extend this concept, and if you do, it is reasonable to use the auto-install namespace for this. So one might have something like <literal +>auto-install/style</literal +> which is then used in your scripts. If you feel the need to do this, please mention it on the <email +>debian-boot@lists.debian.org</email +> mailing list so that we can avoid namespace conflicts, and perhaps add an alias for the parameter for you. </para +><para +>The <literal +>auto</literal +> boot label is not yet defined everywhere. The same effect may be achieved by simply adding the two parameters <literal +>auto=true priority=critical</literal +> to the kernel command line. The <literal +>auto</literal +> parameter is an alias for <literal +>auto-install/enable</literal +> and setting it to <literal +>true</literal +> delays the locale and keyboard questions until after there has been a chance to preseed them, while <literal +>priority</literal +> is an alias for <literal +>debconf/priority</literal +> and setting it to <literal +>critical</literal +> stops any questions with a lower priority from being asked. </para +><para +>Additional options that may be of interest while attempting to automate an install while using DHCP are: <literal +>interface=auto netcfg/dhcp_timeout=60</literal +> which makes the machine choose the first viable NIC and be more patient about getting a reply to its DHCP query. </para> +<tip +><para +>An extensive example of how to use this framework, including example scripts and classes, can be found on the <ulink url="http://hands.com/d-i/" +>website of its developer</ulink +>. The examples available there also show many other nice effects that can be achieved by creative use of preconfiguration. </para +></tip> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-aliases"> + <title +>Aliases useful with preseeding</title> +<para +>The following aliases can be useful when using (auto mode) preseeding. Note that these are simply short aliases for question names, and you always need to specify a value as well: for example, <literal +>auto=true</literal +> or <literal +>interface=eth0</literal +>. </para> + +<!-- Setting column width does not seem to work; use non-breaking spaces + to separate columns a bit --> +<informaltable frame="none"> +<tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row +><entry +>auto</entry +><entry +>auto-install/enable</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>classes</entry +><entry +>auto-install/classes</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>fb</entry +><entry +>debian-installer/framebuffer</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>locale</entry +><entry +>debian-installer/locale</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>priority</entry +><entry +>debconf/priority</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>file</entry +><entry +>preseed/file</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>url</entry +><entry +>preseed/url</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>interface</entry +><entry +>netcfg/choose_interface</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>hostname </entry +><entry +>netcfg/get_hostname</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>domain</entry +><entry +>netcfg/get_domain</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>protocol</entry +><entry +>mirror/protocol</entry +></row> +<row +><entry +>suite</entry +><entry +>mirror/suite</entry +></row> +</tbody +></tgroup> +</informaltable> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-dhcp"> + <title +>Using a DHCP server to specify preconfiguration files</title> +<para +>It's also possible to use DHCP to specify a preconfiguration file to download from the network. DHCP allows specifying a filename. Normally this is a file to netboot, but if it appears to be an URL then installation media that support network preseeding will download the file from the URL and use it as a preconfiguration file. Here is an example of how to set it up in the dhcpd.conf for version 3 of the ISC DHCP server (the dhcp3-server Debian package). </para> + +<informalexample +><screen +>if substring (option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 3) = "d-i" { + filename "http://host/preseed.cfg"; +} +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>Note that the above example limits this filename to DHCP clients that identify themselves as "d-i", so it will not affect regular DHCP clients, but only the installer. You can also put the text in a stanza for only one particular host to avoid preseeding all installs on your network. </para +><para +>A good way to use the DHCP preseeding is to only preseed values specific to your network, such as the Debian mirror to use. This way installs on your network will automatically get a good mirror selected, but the rest of the installation can be performed interactively. Using DHCP preseeding to fully automate Debian installs should only be done with care. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="preseed-creating"> + <title +>Creating a preconfiguration file</title> +<para +>The preconfiguration file is in the format used by the <command +>debconf-set-selections</command +> command. The general format of a line in a preconfiguration file is: <informalexample +><screen +><owner> <question name> <question type> <value> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>There are a few rules to keep in mind when writing a preconfiguration file. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Put only a single space or tab between type and value: any additional whitespace will be interpreted as belonging to the value. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>A line can be split into multiple lines by appending a backslash (<quote +><literal +>\</literal +></quote +>) as the line continuation character. A good place to split a line is after the question name; a bad place is between type and value. Split lines will be joined into a single line with all leading/trailing whitespace condensed to a single space. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>For debconf variables (templates) used in the installer itself, the owner should be set to <quote +>d-i</quote +>; to preseed variables used in the installed system, the name of the package that contains the corresponding debconf template should be used. Only variables that have their owner set to something other than <quote +>d-i</quote +> will be propagated to the debconf database for the installed system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Most questions need to be preseeded using the values valid in English and not the translated values. However, there are some questions (for example in <classname +>partman</classname +>) where the translated values need to be used. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Some questions take a code as value instead of the English text that is shown during installation. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>The easiest way to create a preconfiguration file is to use the example file linked in <xref linkend="preseed-contents"/> as basis and work from there. </para +><para +>An alternative method is to do a manual installation and then, after rebooting, use the <command +>debconf-get-selections</command +> from the <classname +>debconf-utils</classname +> package to dump both the debconf database and the installer's cdebconf database to a single file: <informalexample +><screen +>$ debconf-get-selections --installer > <replaceable>file</replaceable> +$ debconf-get-selections >> <replaceable>file</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>However, a file generated in this manner will have some items that should not be preseeded, and the example file is a better starting place for most users. </para> + +<note +><para +>This method relies on the fact that, at the end of the installation, the installer's cdebconf database is saved to the installed system in <filename +>/var/log/installer/cdebconf</filename +>. However, because the database may contain sensitive information, by default the files are only readable by root. </para +><para +>The directory <filename +>/var/log/installer</filename +> and all files in it will be deleted from your system if you purge the package <classname +>installation-report</classname +>. </para +></note> + +<para +>To check possible values for questions, you can use <command +>nano</command +> to examine the files in <filename +>/var/lib/cdebconf</filename +> while an installation is in progress. View <filename +>templates.dat</filename +> for the raw templates and <filename +>questions.dat</filename +> for the current values and for the values assigned to variables. </para +><para +>To check if the format of your preconfiguration file is valid before performing an install, you can use the command <command +>debconf-set-selections -c <replaceable +>preseed.cfg</replaceable +></command +>. </para> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="preseed-contents"> + <title +>Contents of the preconfiguration file (for &releasename;)</title> +<para +>The configuration fragments used in this appendix are also available as an example preconfiguration file from &urlset-example-preseed;. </para +><para +>Note that this example is based on an installation for the Intel x86 architecture. If you are installing a different architecture, some of the examples (like keyboard selection and bootloader installation) may not be relevant and will need to be replaced by debconf settings appropriate for your architecture. </para> + + <sect2 id="preseed-l10n"> + <title +>Localization</title> +<para +>Setting localization values will only work if you are using initrd preseeding. With all other methods the preconfiguration file will only be loaded after these questions have been asked. </para +><para +>The locale can be used to specify both language and country and can be any combination of a language supported by &d-i; and a recognized country. If the combination does not form a valid locale, the installer will automatically select a locale that is valid for the selected language. To specify the locale as a boot parameter, use <userinput +>locale=<replaceable +>en_US</replaceable +></userinput +>. <informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Locale sets language and country. +d-i debian-installer/locale string en_US +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>Keyboard configuration consists of selecting a keyboard architecture and a keymap. In most cases the correct keyboard architecture is selected by default, so there's normally no need to preseed it. The keymap must be known to the &d-i; for the selected keyboard architecture. <informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Keyboard selection. +#d-i console-tools/archs select at +d-i console-keymaps-at/keymap select us +# Example for a different keyboard architecture +#d-i console-keymaps-usb/keymap select mac-usb-us +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>To skip keyboard configuration, preseed <classname +>console-tools/archs</classname +> with <userinput +>skip-config</userinput +>. This will result in the kernel keymap remaining active. </para> + +<note +><para +>The changes in the input layer for 2.6 kernels have made the keyboard architecture virtually obsolete. For 2.6 kernels normally a <quote +>PC</quote +> (<userinput +>at</userinput +>) keymap should be selected. </para +></note> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-network"> + <title +>Network configuration</title> +<para +>Of course, preseeding the network configuration won't work if you're loading your preconfiguration file from the network. But it's great when you're booting from CD or USB stick. If you are loading preconfiguration files from the network, you can pass network config parameters by using kernel boot parameters. </para +><para +>If you need to pick a particular interface when netbooting before loading a preconfiguration file from the network, use a boot parameter such as <userinput +>interface=<replaceable +>eth1</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +><para +>Although preseeding the network configuration is normally not possible when using network preseeding (using <quote +>preseed/url</quote +>), you can use the following hack to work around that, for example if you'd like to set a static address for the network interface. The hack is to force the network configuration to run again after the preconfiguration file has been loaded by creating a <quote +>preseed/run</quote +> script containing the following commands: <informalexample +><screen +>killall.sh; netcfg +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>The following debconf variables are relevant for network configuration. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it +# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. +d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto + +# To pick a particular interface instead: +#d-i netcfg/choose_interface select eth1 + +# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for +# it, this might be useful. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 + +# If you prefer to configure the network manually, uncomment this line and +# the static network configuration below. +#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true + +# If you want the preconfiguration file to work on systems both with and +# without a dhcp server, uncomment these lines and the static network +# configuration below. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_failed note +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_options select Configure network manually + +# Static network configuration. +#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 +#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 +#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true + +# Any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take precedence over +# values set here. However, setting the values still prevents the questions +# from being shown, even if values come from dhcp. +d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname +d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain + +# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. +d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string +# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish + +# If non-free firmware is needed for the network or other hardware, you can +# configure the installer to always try to load it, without prompting. Or +# change to false to disable asking. +#d-i hw-detect/load_firmware boolean true +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>Please note that <command +>netcfg</command +> will automatically determine the netmask if <classname +>netcfg/get_netmask</classname +> is not preseeded. In this case, the variable has to be marked as <literal +>seen</literal +> for automatic installations. Similarly, <command +>netcfg</command +> will choose an appropriate address if <classname +>netcfg/get_gateway</classname +> is not set. As a special case, you can set <classname +>netcfg/get_gateway</classname +> to <quote +>none</quote +> to specify that no gateway should be used. </para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-network-console"> + <title +>Network console</title> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Use the following settings if you wish to make use of the network-console +# component for remote installation over SSH. This only makes sense if you +# intend to perform the remainder of the installation manually. +#d-i anna/choose_modules string network-console +#d-i network-console/password password r00tme +#d-i network-console/password-again password r00tme +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-mirror"> + <title +>Mirror settings</title> +<para +>Depending on the installation method you use, a mirror may be used to download additional components of the installer, to install the base system, and to set up the <filename +>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename +> for the installed system. </para +><para +>The parameter <classname +>mirror/suite</classname +> determines the suite for the installed system. </para +><para +>The parameter <classname +>mirror/udeb/suite</classname +> determines the suite for additional components for the installer. It is only useful to set this if components are actually downloaded over the network and should match the suite that was used to build the initrd for the installation method used for the installation. By default the value for <classname +>mirror/udeb/suite</classname +> is the same as <classname +>mirror/suite</classname +>. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># If you select ftp, the mirror/country string does not need to be set. +#d-i mirror/protocol string ftp +d-i mirror/country string manual +d-i mirror/http/hostname string &archive-mirror; +d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian +d-i mirror/http/proxy string + +# Suite to install. +#d-i mirror/suite string testing +# Suite to use for loading installer components (optional). +#d-i mirror/udeb/suite string testing +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-time"> + <title +>Clock and time zone setup</title> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. +d-i clock-setup/utc boolean true + +# You may set this to any valid setting for $TZ; see the contents of +# /usr/share/zoneinfo/ for valid values. +d-i time/zone string US/Eastern + +# Controls whether to use NTP to set the clock during the install +d-i clock-setup/ntp boolean true +# NTP server to use. The default is almost always fine here. +#d-i clock-setup/ntp-server string ntp.example.com +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-partman"> + <title +>Partitioning</title> +<para +>Using preseeding to partition the harddisk is very much limited to what is supported by <classname +>partman-auto</classname +>. You can choose to partition either existing free space on a disk or a whole disk. The layout of the disk can be determined by using a predefined recipe, a custom recipe from a recipe file or a recipe included in the preconfiguration file. It is currently not possible to partition multiple disks using preseeding. </para> + +<warning +><para +>The identification of disks is dependent on the order in which their drivers are loaded. If there are multiple disks in the system, make very sure the correct one will be selected before using preseeding. </para +></warning> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. +#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition select biggest_free + +# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name must +# be given in traditional non-devfs format. +# Note: A disk must be specified, unless the system has only one disk. +# For example, to use the first SCSI/SATA hard disk: +#d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/sda +# In addition, you'll need to specify the method to use. +# The presently available methods are: "regular", "lvm" and "crypto" +d-i partman-auto/method string lvm + +# If one of the disks that are going to be automatically partitioned +# contains an old LVM configuration, the user will normally receive a +# warning. This can be preseeded away... +d-i partman-lvm/device_remove_lvm boolean true +# The same applies to pre-existing software RAID array: +d-i partman-md/device_remove_md boolean true +# And the same goes for the confirmation to write the lvm partitions. +d-i partman-lvm/confirm boolean true + +# You can choose one of the three predefined partitioning recipes: +# - atomic: all files in one partition +# - home: separate /home partition +# - multi: separate /home, /usr, /var, and /tmp partitions +d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select atomic + +# Or provide a recipe of your own... +# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. +# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can +# just point at it. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe + +# If not, you can put an entire recipe into the preconfiguration file in one +# (logical) line. This example creates a small /boot partition, suitable +# swap, and uses the rest of the space for the root partition: +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \ +# boot-root :: \ +# 40 50 100 ext3 \ +# $primary{ } $bootable{ } \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ /boot } \ +# . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ / } \ +# . \ +# 64 512 300% linux-swap \ +# method{ swap } format{ } \ +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation, provided +# that you told it what to do using one of the methods above. +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition select finish +d-i partman/confirm boolean true +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-partman-raid"> + <title +>Partitioning using RAID</title> +<para +>You can also use preseeding to set up partitions on software RAID arrays. Supported are RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10, creating degraded arrays and specifying spare devices. If you are using RAID 1, you can preseed grub to install to all devices used in the array; see <xref linkend="preseed-bootloader"/>. </para> + +<warning +><para +>This type of automated partitioning is easy to get wrong. It is also functionality that receives relatively little testing from the developers of &d-i;. The responsibility to get the various recipes right (so they make sense and don't conflict) lies with the user. Check <filename +>/var/log/syslog</filename +> if you run into problems. </para +></warning> + +<informalexample +><screen +># NOTE: this option is of beta release quality and should be used carefully + +# The method should be set to "raid". +#d-i partman-auto/method string raid +# Specify the disks to be partitioned. They will all get the same layout, +# so this will only work if the disks are the same size. +#d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/sda /dev/sdb + +# Next you need to specify the physical partitions that will be used. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \ +# multiraid :: \ +# 1000 5000 4000 raid \ +# $primary{ } method{ raid } \ +# . \ +# 64 512 300% raid \ +# method{ raid } \ +# . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 raid \ +# method{ raid } \ +# . + +# Last you need to specify how the previously defined partitions will be +# used in the RAID setup. Remember to use the correct partition numbers +# for logical partitions. +# Parameters are: +# <raidtype> <devcount> <sparecount> <fstype> <mountpoint> \ +# <devices> <sparedevices> +# RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10 are supported; devices are separated using "#" +#d-i partman-auto-raid/recipe string \ +# 1 2 0 ext3 / \ +# /dev/sda1#/dev/sdb1 \ +# . \ +# 1 2 0 swap - \ +# /dev/sda5#/dev/sdb5 \ +# . \ +# 0 2 0 ext3 /home \ +# /dev/sda6#/dev/sdb6 \ +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. +d-i partman-md/confirm boolean true +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition select finish +d-i partman/confirm boolean true +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-base-installer"> + <title +>Base system installation</title> +<para +>There is actually not very much that can be preseeded for this stage of the installation. The only questions asked concern the installation of the kernel. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Select the initramfs generator used to generate the initrd for 2.6 kernels. +#d-i base-installer/kernel/linux/initramfs-generators string yaird + +# The kernel image (meta) package to be installed; "none" can be used if no +# kernel is to be installed. +#d-i base-installer/kernel/image string linux-image-2.6-486 +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-account"> + <title +>Account setup</title> +<para +>The password for the root account and name and password for a first regular user's account can be preseeded. For the passwords you can use either clear text values or MD5 <emphasis +>hashes</emphasis +>. </para> +<warning +><para +>Be aware that preseeding passwords is not completely secure as everyone with access to the preconfiguration file will have the knowledge of these passwords. Using MD5 hashes is considered slightly better in terms of security but it might also give a false sense of security as access to a MD5 hash allows for brute force attacks. </para +></warning> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Skip creation of a root account (normal user account will be able to +# use sudo). +#d-i passwd/root-login boolean false +# Alternatively, to skip creation of a normal user account. +#d-i passwd/make-user boolean false + +# Root password, either in clear text +#d-i passwd/root-password password r00tme +#d-i passwd/root-password-again password r00tme +# or encrypted using an MD5 hash. +#d-i passwd/root-password-crypted password [MD5 hash] + +# To create a normal user account. +#d-i passwd/user-fullname string Debian User +#d-i passwd/username string debian +# Normal user's password, either in clear text +#d-i passwd/user-password password insecure +#d-i passwd/user-password-again password insecure +# or encrypted using an MD5 hash. +#d-i passwd/user-password-crypted password [MD5 hash] +# Create the first user with the specified UID instead of the default. +#d-i passwd/user-uid string 1010 + +# The user account will be added to some standard initial groups. To +# override that, use this. +#d-i passwd/user-default-groups string audio cdrom video +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>The <classname +>passwd/root-password-crypted</classname +> and <classname +>passwd/user-password-crypted</classname +> variables can also be preseeded with <quote +>!</quote +> as their value. In that case, the corresponding account is disabled. This may be convenient for the root account, provided of course that an alternative method is set up to allow administrative activities or root login (for instance by using SSH key authentication or <command +>sudo</command +>). </para +><para +>The following command can be used to generate an MD5 hash for a password: <informalexample +><screen +>$ echo "r00tme" | mkpasswd -s -m md5 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-apt"> + <title +>Apt setup</title> +<para +>Setup of the <filename +>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename +> and basic configuration options is fully automated based on your installation method and answers to earlier questions. You can optionally add other (local) repositories. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. +#d-i apt-setup/non-free boolean true +#d-i apt-setup/contrib boolean true +# Uncomment this if you don't want to use a network mirror. +#d-i apt-setup/use_mirror boolean false +# Select which update services to use; define the mirrors to be used. +# Values shown below are the normal defaults. +#d-i apt-setup/services-select multiselect security, volatile +#d-i apt-setup/security_host string security.debian.org +#d-i apt-setup/volatile_host string volatile.debian.org + +# Additional repositories, local[0-9] available +#d-i apt-setup/local0/repository string \ +# http://local.server/debian stable main +#d-i apt-setup/local0/comment string local server +# Enable deb-src lines +#d-i apt-setup/local0/source boolean true +# URL to the public key of the local repository; you must provide a key or +# apt will complain about the unauthenticated repository and so the +# sources.list line will be left commented out +#d-i apt-setup/local0/key string http://local.server/key + +# By default the installer requires that repositories be authenticated +# using a known gpg key. This setting can be used to disable that +# authentication. Warning: Insecure, not recommended. +#d-i debian-installer/allow_unauthenticated string true +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-pkgsel"> + <title +>Package selection</title> +<para +>You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. Available tasks as of this writing include: </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>standard</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>desktop</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>gnome-desktop</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>kde-desktop</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>web-server</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>print-server</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>dns-server</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>file-server</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>mail-server</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>sql-database</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + <userinput +>laptop</userinput> +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>You can also choose to install no tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other way. We recommend always including the <userinput +>standard</userinput +> task. </para +><para +>If you want to install some individual packages in addition to packages installed by tasks, you can use the parameter <classname +>pkgsel/include</classname +>. The value of this parameter can be a list of packages separated by either commas or spaces, which allows it to be used easily on the kernel command line as well. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +>#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect standard, web-server +# If the desktop task is selected, install the kde and xfce desktops +# instead of the default gnome desktop. +#tasksel tasksel/desktop multiselect kde, xfce + +# Individual additional packages to install +#d-i pkgsel/include string openssh-server build-essential +# Whether to upgrade packages after debootstrap. +# Allowed values: none, safe-upgrade, full-upgrade +#d-i pkgsel/upgrade select none + +# Some versions of the installer can report back on what software you have +# installed, and what software you use. The default is not to report back, +# but sending reports helps the project determine what software is most +# popular and include it on CDs. +#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-bootloader"> + <title +>Boot loader installation</title> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed +# instead, uncomment this: +#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true +# To also skip installing lilo, and install no bootloader, uncomment this +# too: +#d-i lilo-installer/skip boolean true + +# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR +# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. +d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true + +# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if it also finds some other +# OS, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. +d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true + +# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, +# uncomment and edit these lines: +#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) +# To install grub to multiple disks: +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) (hd1,0) (hd2,0) + +# Optional password for grub, either in clear text +#d-i grub-installer/password password r00tme +#d-i grub-installer/password-again password r00tme +# or encrypted using an MD5 hash, see grub-md5-crypt(8). +#d-i grub-installer/password-crypted password [MD5 hash] +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>An MD5 hash for a password for <classname +>grub</classname +> can be generated using <command +>grub-md5-crypt</command +>, or using the command from the example in <xref linkend="preseed-account"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-finish"> + <title +>Finishing up the installation</title> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># During installations from serial console, the regular virtual consoles +# (VT1-VT6) are normally disabled in /etc/inittab. Uncomment the next +# line to prevent this. +#d-i finish-install/keep-consoles boolean true + +# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. +d-i finish-install/reboot_in_progress note + +# This will prevent the installer from ejecting the CD during the reboot, +# which is useful in some situations. +#d-i cdrom-detect/eject boolean false + +# This is how to make the installer shutdown when finished, but not +# reboot into the installed system. +#d-i debian-installer/exit/halt boolean true +# This will power off the machine instead of just halting it. +#d-i debian-installer/exit/poweroff boolean true +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-other"> + <title +>Preseeding other packages</title> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong +# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may +# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every +# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an +# installation, and then run these commands: +# debconf-get-selections --installer > file +# debconf-get-selections >> file +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="preseed-advanced"> + <title +>Advanced options</title> + + <sect2 id="preseed-hooks"> + <title +>Running custom commands during the installation</title> +<para +>A very powerful and flexible option offered by the preconfiguration tools is the ability to run commands or scripts at certain points in the installation. </para> + +<informalexample role="example" +><screen +># d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks +# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a +# preconfiguration file like this one. Only use preconfiguration files from +# trusted locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, +# here's a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, +# automatically. + +# This first command is run as early as possible, just after +# preseeding is read. +#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb +<phrase condition="squeeze"> +# This command is run immediately before the partitioner starts. It may be +# useful to apply dynamic partitioner preseeding that depends on the state +# of the disks (which may not be visible when preseed/early_command runs). +#d-i partman/early_command \ +# string debconf-set partman-auto/disk "$(list-devices disk | head -n1)" +</phrase> +# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is +# still a usable /target directory. You can chroot to /target and use it +# directly, or use the apt-install and in-target commands to easily install +# packages and run commands in the target system. +#d-i preseed/late_command string apt-install zsh; in-target chsh -s /bin/zsh +</screen +></informalexample> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-seenflag"> + <title +>Using preseeding to change default values</title> +<para +>It is possible to use preseeding to change the default answer for a question, but still have the question asked. To do this the <firstterm +>seen</firstterm +> flag must be reset to <quote +>false</quote +> after setting the value for a question. <informalexample +><screen +> +d-i foo/bar string value +d-i foo/bar seen false +</screen +></informalexample +> The same effect can be achieved for <emphasis +>all</emphasis +> questions by setting the parameter <classname +>preseed/interactive=true</classname +> at the boot prompt. This can also be useful for testing or debugging your preconfiguration file. </para +><para +>Note that the <quote +>d-i</quote +> owner should only be used for variables used in the installer itself. For variables belonging to packages installed on the target system, you should use the name of that package instead. See the footnote to <xref linkend="preseed-bootparms"/>. </para +><para +>If you are preseeding using boot parameters, you can make the installer ask the corresponding question by using the <quote +>?=</quote +> operator, i.e. <userinput +><replaceable +>foo</replaceable +>/<replaceable +>bar</replaceable +>?=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +> (or <userinput +><replaceable +>owner</replaceable +>:<replaceable +>foo/bar</replaceable +>?=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +>). This will of course only have effect for parameters that correspond to questions that are actually displayed during an installation and not for <quote +>internal</quote +> parameters. </para +> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="preseed-chainload"> + <title +>Chainloading preconfiguration files</title> +<para +>It is possible to include other preconfiguration files from a preconfiguration file. Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from files loaded earlier. This makes it possible to put, for example, general networking settings for your location in one file and more specific settings for certain configurations in other files. </para> + +<informalexample +><screen +># More than one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be +# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their +# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from +# the same directory as the preconfiguration file that includes them. +#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg + +# The installer can optionally verify checksums of preconfiguration files +# before using them. Currently only md5sums are supported, list the md5sums +# in the same order as the list of files to include. +#d-i preseed/include/checksum string 5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d + +# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of +# preconfiguration files, includes those files. +#d-i preseed/include_command \ +# string if [ "`hostname`" = bob ]; then echo bob.cfg; fi + +# Most flexibly of all, this downloads a program and runs it. The program +# can use commands such as debconf-set to manipulate the debconf database. +# More than one script can be listed, separated by spaces. +# Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from the same +# directory as the preconfiguration file that runs them. +#d-i preseed/run string foo.sh +</screen +></informalexample> + +<para +>It is also possible to chainload from the initrd or file preseeding phase, into network preseeding by setting preseed/url in the earlier files. This will cause network preseeding to be performed when the network comes up. You need to be careful when doing this, since there will be two distinct runs at preseeding, meaning for example that you get another chance to run the preseed/early command, the second one happening after the network comes up. </para> + + </sect2> + </sect1> +</appendix> +<!-- End of file appendix/preseed.xml --> diff --git a/nb/appendix/random-bits.xml b/nb/appendix/random-bits.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2b18a75f --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/appendix/random-bits.xml @@ -0,0 +1,1559 @@ +<!-- Start of file appendix/random-bits.xml --> +<!-- $Id: random-bits.xml 45239 2007-02-18 19:38:12Z fjp $ --> + +<appendix id="random-bits" +><title +>Random Bits</title> + + +<!-- Start of file appendix/files.xml --> +<!-- $Id: files.xml 51571 2008-02-25 11:35:07Z cjwatson $ --> + + + <sect1 id="linuxdevices" +><title +>Linux Devices</title> +<para +>In Linux various special files can be found under the directory <filename +>/dev</filename +>. These files are called device files and behave unlike ordinary files. The most common types of device files are for block devices and character devices. These files are an interface to the actual driver (part of the Linux kernel) which in turn accesses the hardware. Another, less common, type of device file is the named <firstterm +>pipe</firstterm +>. The most important device files are listed in the tables below. </para +><para> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>fd0</filename +></entry> + <entry +>First Floppy Drive</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>fd1</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Second Floppy Drive</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>hda</filename +></entry> + <entry +>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Master)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>hdb</filename +></entry> + <entry +>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Slave)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>hdc</filename +></entry> + <entry +>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Master)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>hdd</filename +></entry> + <entry +>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Slave)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>hda1</filename +></entry> + <entry +>First partition of the first IDE hard disk</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>hdd15</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Fifteenth partition of the fourth IDE hard disk</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>sda</filename +></entry> + <entry +>SCSI Hard disk with lowest SCSI ID (e.g. 0)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sdb</filename +></entry> + <entry +>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 1)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sdc</filename +></entry> + <entry +>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 2)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sda1</filename +></entry> + <entry +>First partition of the first SCSI hard disk</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sdd10</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Tenth partition of the fourth SCSI hard disk</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>sr0</filename +></entry> + <entry +>SCSI CD-ROM with the lowest SCSI ID</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sr1</filename +></entry> + <entry +>SCSI CD-ROM with the next higher SCSI ID</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>ttyS0</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Serial port 0, COM1 under MS-DOS</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>ttyS1</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Serial port 1, COM2 under MS-DOS</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>psaux</filename +></entry> + <entry +>PS/2 mouse device</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>gpmdata</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Pseudo device, repeater data from GPM (mouse) daemon</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>cdrom</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Symbolic link to the CD-ROM drive</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>mouse</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Symbolic link to the mouse device file</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>null</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Anything written to this device will disappear</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>zero</filename +></entry> + <entry +>One can endlessly read zeros out of this device</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para> + + <sect2 arch="not-s390" id="device-mouse"> + <title +>Setting Up Your Mouse</title> +<para +>The mouse can be used in both the Linux console (with gpm) and the X window environment. Normally, this is a simple matter of installing <filename +>gpm</filename +> and the X server itself. Both should be configured to use <filename +>/dev/input/mice</filename +> as the mouse device. The correct mouse protocol is named <userinput +>exps2</userinput +> in gpm, and <userinput +>ExplorerPS/2</userinput +> in X. The respective configuration files are <filename +>/etc/gpm.conf</filename +> and <filename +>/etc/X11/xorg.conf</filename +>. </para +><para +>Certain kernel modules must be loaded in order for your mouse to work. In most cases the correct modules are autodetected, but not always for old-style serial and bus mice<footnote +> <para +> Serial mice usually have a 9-hole D-shaped connector; bus mice have an 8-pin round connector, not to be confused with the 6-pin round connector of a PS/2 mouse or the 4-pin round connector of an ADB mouse. </para +> </footnote +>, which are quite rare except on very old computers. Summary of Linux kernel modules needed for different mouse types: <informaltable +><tgroup cols="2" +><thead +> <row +> <entry +>Module</entry +> <entry +>Description</entry +> </row +> </thead +><tbody +> <row +> <entry +>psmouse</entry +> <entry +>PS/2 mice (should be autodetected)</entry +> </row +> <row +> <entry +>usbhid</entry +> <entry +>USB mice (should be autodetected)</entry +> </row +> <row +> <entry +>sermouse</entry +> <entry +>Most serial mice</entry +> </row +> <row +> <entry +>logibm</entry +> <entry +>Bus mouse connected to Logitech adapter card</entry +> </row +> <row +> <entry +>inport</entry +> <entry +>Bus mouse connected to ATI or Microsoft InPort card</entry +> </row +> </tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable +> To load a mouse driver module, you can use the <command +>modconf</command +> command (from the package with the same name) and look in the category <userinput +>kernel/drivers/input/mouse</userinput +>. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Modern kernels give you the capability to emulate a three-button mouse when your mouse only has one button. Just add the following lines to <filename +>/etc/sysctl.conf</filename +> file. <informalexample +><screen +># 3-button mouse emulation +# turn on emulation +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button_emulation = 1 +# Send middle mouse button signal with the F11 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button2_keycode = 87 +# Send right mouse button signal with the F12 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button3_keycode = 88 +# For different keys, use showkey to tell you what the code is. +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="tasksel-size-list"> + <title +>Disk Space Needed for Tasks</title> +<para +>A standard installation for the i386 architecture, including all standard packages and using the default 2.6 kernel, takes up &std-system-size;MB of disk space. A minimal base installation, without the <quote +>Standard system</quote +> task selected, will take &base-system-size;MB. </para> +<important +><para +>In both cases this is the actual disk space used <emphasis +>after</emphasis +> the installation is finished and any temporary files deleted. It also does not take into account overhead used by the file system, for example for journal files. This means that significantly more disk space is needed both <emphasis +>during</emphasis +> the installation and for normal system use. </para +></important> +<para +>The following table lists sizes reported by aptitude for the tasks listed in tasksel. Note that some tasks have overlapping constituents, so the total installed size for two tasks together may be less than the total obtained by adding up the numbers. </para +><para +>Note that you will need to add the sizes listed in the table to the size of the standard installation when determining the size of partitions. Most of the size listed as <quote +>Installed size</quote +> will end up in <filename +>/usr</filename +> and in <filename +>/lib</filename +>; the size listed as <quote +>Download size</quote +> is (temporarily) required in <filename +>/var</filename +>. </para +><para> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Task</entry> + <entry +>Installed size (MB)</entry> + <entry +>Download size (MB)</entry> + <entry +>Space needed to install (MB)</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>Desktop environment</entry> + <entry +>&task-desktop-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-desktop-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-desktop-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Laptop<footnote +> <para +>There is some overlap of the Laptop task with the Desktop environment task. If you install both, the Laptop task will only require a few MB additional disk space. </para> + + </footnote +></entry> + <entry +>&task-laptop-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-laptop-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-laptop-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Web server</entry> + <entry +>&task-web-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-web-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-web-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Print server</entry> + <entry +>&task-print-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-print-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-print-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>DNS server</entry> + <entry +>&task-dns-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-dns-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-dns-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>File server</entry> + <entry +>&task-file-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-file-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-file-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Mail server</entry> + <entry +>&task-mail-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-mail-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-mail-tot;</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>SQL database</entry> + <entry +>&task-sql-inst;</entry> + <entry +>&task-sql-dl;</entry> + <entry +>&task-sql-tot;</entry> +</row> + +</tbody> +</tgroup +></informaltable> + +<note +><para +>The <emphasis +>Desktop</emphasis +> task will install the GNOME desktop environment. </para +></note> + +</para +><para +>If you install in a language other than English, <command +>tasksel</command +> may automatically install a <firstterm +>localization task</firstterm +>, if one is available for your language. Space requirements differ per language; you should allow up to 350MB in total for download and installation. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file appendix/files.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file appendix/chroot-install.xml --> +<!-- $Id: chroot-install.xml 55631 2008-09-06 15:06:58Z tbm $ --> + + <sect1 id="linux-upgrade"> + <title +>Installing &debian; from a Unix/Linux System</title> + +<para +>This section explains how to install &debian; from an existing Unix or Linux system, without using the menu-driven installer as explained in the rest of the manual. This <quote +>cross-install</quote +> HOWTO has been requested by users switching to &debian; from Red Hat, Mandrake, and SUSE. In this section some familiarity with entering *nix commands and navigating the file system is assumed. In this section, <prompt +>$</prompt +> symbolizes a command to be entered in the user's current system, while <prompt +>#</prompt +> refers to a command entered in the Debian chroot. </para +><para +>Once you've got the new Debian system configured to your preference, you can migrate your existing user data (if any) to it, and keep on rolling. This is therefore a <quote +>zero downtime</quote +> &debian; install. It's also a clever way for dealing with hardware that otherwise doesn't play friendly with various boot or installation media. </para> + +<note +><para +>As this is a mostly manual procedure, you should bear in mind that you will need to do a lot of basic configuration of the system yourself, which will also require more knowledge of Debian and of Linux in general than performing a regular installation. You cannot expect this procedure to result in a system that is identical to a system from a regular installation. You should also keep in mind that this procedure only gives the basic steps to set up a system. Additional installation and/or configuration steps may be needed. </para +></note> + + <sect2> + <title +>Getting Started</title> +<para +>With your current *nix partitioning tools, repartition the hard drive as needed, creating at least one filesystem plus swap. You need around 350MB of space available for a console only install, or about 1GB if you plan to install X (more if you intend to install desktop environments like GNOME or KDE). </para +><para +>Next, create file systems on the partitions. For example, to create an ext3 file system on partition <filename +>/dev/hda6</filename +> (that's our example root partition): <informalexample +><screen +> +# mke2fs -j /dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> To create an ext2 file system instead, omit <userinput +>-j</userinput +>. </para +><para +>Initialize and activate swap (substitute the partition number for your intended Debian swap partition): <informalexample +><screen +> +# mkswap /dev/<replaceable>hda5</replaceable> +# sync; sync; sync +# swapon /dev/<replaceable>hda5</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Mount one partition as <filename +>/mnt/debinst</filename +> (the installation point, to be the root (<filename +>/</filename +>) filesystem on your new system). The mount point name is strictly arbitrary, it is referenced later below. <informalexample +><screen +># mkdir /mnt/debinst +# mount /dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable> /mnt/debinst +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> +<note +><para +>If you want to have parts of the filesystem (e.g. /usr) mounted on separate partitions, you will need to create and mount these directories manually before proceding with the next stage. </para +></note> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Install <command +>debootstrap</command +></title> +<para +>The utility used by the Debian installer, and recognized as the official way to install a Debian base system, is <command +>debootstrap</command +>. It uses <command +>wget</command +> and <command +>ar</command +>, but otherwise depends only on <classname +>/bin/sh</classname +> and basic Unix/Linux tools<footnote +> <para +> These include the GNU core utilities and commands like <command +>sed</command +>, <command +>grep</command +>, <command +>tar</command +> and <command +>gzip</command +>. </para +> </footnote +>. Install <command +>wget</command +> and <command +>ar</command +> if they aren't already on your current system, then download and install <command +>debootstrap</command +>. </para> + +<!-- The files linked to here are from 2004 and thus currently not usable +<para> + +If you have an rpm-based system, you can use alien to convert the +.deb into .rpm, or download an rpm-ized version at +<ulink url="http://people.debian.org/~blade/install/debootstrap" +></ulink> + +</para> +--> + +<para +>Or, you can use the following procedure to install it manually. Make a work folder for extracting the .deb into: <informalexample +><screen +> +# mkdir work +# cd work +</screen +></informalexample +> The <command +>debootstrap</command +> binary is located in the Debian archive (be sure to select the proper file for your architecture). Download the <command +>debootstrap</command +> .deb from the <ulink url="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/d/debootstrap/" +> pool</ulink +>, copy the package to the work folder, and extract the files from it. You will need to have root privileges to install the files. <informalexample +><screen +># ar -x debootstrap_0.X.X_all.deb +# cd / +# zcat /full-path-to-work/work/data.tar.gz | tar xv +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Run <command +>debootstrap</command +></title> +<para +><command +>debootstrap</command +> can download the needed files directly from the archive when you run it. You can substitute any Debian archive mirror for <userinput +>&archive-mirror;/debian</userinput +> in the command example below, preferably a mirror close to you network-wise. Mirrors are listed at <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/misc/README.mirrors" +></ulink +>. </para +><para +>If you have a &releasename; &debian; CD mounted at <filename +>/cdrom</filename +>, you could substitute a file URL instead of the http URL: <userinput +>file:/cdrom/debian/</userinput +> </para +><para +>Substitute one of the following for <replaceable +>ARCH</replaceable +> in the <command +>debootstrap</command +> command: <userinput +>alpha</userinput +>, <userinput +>amd64</userinput +>, <userinput +>arm</userinput +>, <userinput +>armel</userinput +>, <userinput +>hppa</userinput +>, <userinput +>i386</userinput +>, <userinput +>ia64</userinput +>, <userinput +>m68k</userinput +>, <userinput +>mips</userinput +>, <userinput +>mipsel</userinput +>, <userinput +>powerpc</userinput +>, <userinput +>s390</userinput +>, or <userinput +>sparc</userinput +>. <informalexample +><screen +># /usr/sbin/debootstrap --arch ARCH &releasename; \ + /mnt/debinst http://ftp.us.debian.org/debian +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Configure The Base System</title> +<para +>Now you've got a real Debian system, though rather lean, on disk. <command +>chroot</command +> into it: <informalexample +><screen +> +# LANG=C chroot /mnt/debinst /bin/bash +</screen +></informalexample +> After chrooting you may need to set the terminal definition to be compatible with the Debian base system, for example: <informalexample +><screen +># export TERM=<replaceable>xterm-color</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + + <sect3> + <title +>Create device files</title> +<para +>At this point <filename +>/dev/</filename +> only contains very basic device files. For the next steps of the installation additional device files may be needed. There are different ways to go about this and which method you should use depends on the host system you are using for the installation, on whether you intend to use a modular kernel or not, and on whether you intend to use dynamic (e.g. using <classname +>udev</classname +>) or static device files for the new system. </para +><para +>A few of the available options are: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>create a default set of static device files using <informalexample +><screen +># cd /dev +# MAKEDEV generic +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>manually create only specific device files using <command +>MAKEDEV</command +> </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>bind mount /dev from your host system on top of /dev in the target system; note that the postinst scripts of some packages may try to create device files, so this option should only be used with care </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Mount Partitions</title> +<para +>You need to create <filename +>/etc/fstab</filename +>. <informalexample +><screen +> +# editor /etc/fstab +</screen +></informalexample +> Here is a sample you can modify to suit: <informalexample +><screen +> +# /etc/fstab: static file system information. +# +# file system mount point type options dump pass +/dev/XXX / ext3 defaults 0 1 +/dev/XXX /boot ext3 ro,nosuid,nodev 0 2 + +/dev/XXX none swap sw 0 0 +proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 + +/dev/fd0 /media/floppy auto noauto,rw,sync,user,exec 0 0 +/dev/cdrom /media/cdrom iso9660 noauto,ro,user,exec 0 0 + +/dev/XXX /tmp ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /var ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /usr ext3 rw,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /home ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +</screen +></informalexample +> Use <userinput +>mount -a</userinput +> to mount all the file systems you have specified in your <filename +>/etc/fstab</filename +>, or, to mount file systems individually, use: <informalexample +><screen +> +# mount /path # e.g.: mount /usr +</screen +></informalexample +> Current Debian systems have mountpoints for removable media under <filename +>/media</filename +>, but keep compatibility symlinks in <filename +>/</filename +>. Create these as as needed, for example: <informalexample +><screen +> +# cd /media +# mkdir cdrom0 +# ln -s cdrom0 cdrom +# cd / +# ln -s media/cdrom +</screen +></informalexample +> You can mount the proc file system multiple times and to arbitrary locations, though <filename +>/proc</filename +> is customary. If you didn't use <userinput +>mount -a</userinput +>, be sure to mount proc before continuing: <informalexample +><screen +># mount -t proc proc /proc +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>The command <userinput +>ls /proc</userinput +> should now show a non-empty directory. Should this fail, you may be able to mount proc from outside the chroot: <informalexample +><screen +># mount -t proc proc /mnt/debinst/proc +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Setting Timezone</title> +<para +>An option in the file <filename +>/etc/default/rcS</filename +> determines whether the system will interpret the hardware clock as being set to UTC or local time. The following command allow you to set that and choose your timezone. <informalexample +><screen +># editor /etc/default/rcS +# tzconfig +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Configure Networking</title> +<para +>To configure networking, edit <filename +>/etc/network/interfaces</filename +>, <filename +>/etc/resolv.conf</filename +>, <filename +>/etc/hostname</filename +> and <filename +>/etc/hosts</filename +>. <informalexample +><screen +> +# editor /etc/network/interfaces +</screen +></informalexample +> Here are some simple examples from <filename +>/usr/share/doc/ifupdown/examples</filename +>: <informalexample +><screen +> +###################################################################### +# /etc/network/interfaces -- configuration file for ifup(8), ifdown(8) +# See the interfaces(5) manpage for information on what options are +# available. +###################################################################### + +# We always want the loopback interface. +# +auto lo +iface lo inet loopback + +# To use dhcp: +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet dhcp + +# An example static IP setup: (broadcast and gateway are optional) +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet static +# address 192.168.0.42 +# network 192.168.0.0 +# netmask 255.255.255.0 +# broadcast 192.168.0.255 +# gateway 192.168.0.1 +</screen +></informalexample +> Enter your nameserver(s) and search directives in <filename +>/etc/resolv.conf</filename +>: <informalexample +><screen +> +# editor /etc/resolv.conf +</screen +></informalexample +> A simple example <filename +>/etc/resolv.conf</filename +>: <informalexample +><screen +> +search hqdom.local +nameserver 10.1.1.36 +nameserver 192.168.9.100 +</screen +></informalexample +> Enter your system's host name (2 to 63 characters): <informalexample +><screen +> +# echo DebianHostName > /etc/hostname +</screen +></informalexample +> And a basic <filename +>/etc/hosts</filename +> with IPv6 support: <informalexample +><screen +> +127.0.0.1 localhost DebianHostName + +# The following lines are desirable for IPv6 capable hosts +::1 ip6-localhost ip6-loopback +fe00::0 ip6-localnet +ff00::0 ip6-mcastprefix +ff02::1 ip6-allnodes +ff02::2 ip6-allrouters +ff02::3 ip6-allhosts +</screen +></informalexample +> If you have multiple network cards, you should arrange the names of driver modules in the <filename +>/etc/modules</filename +> file into the desired order. Then during boot, each card will be associated with the interface name (eth0, eth1, etc.) that you expect. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Configure Apt</title> +<para +>Debootstrap will have created a very basic <filename +>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename +> that will allow installing additional packages. However, you may want to add some additional sources, for example for source packages and security updates: <informalexample +><screen +> +deb-src http://ftp.us.debian.org/debian &releasename; main + +deb http://security.debian.org/ &releasename;/updates main +deb-src http://security.debian.org/ &releasename;/updates main +</screen +></informalexample +> Make sure to run <userinput +>aptitude update</userinput +> after you have made changes to the sources list. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Configure Locales and Keyboard</title> +<para +>To configure your locale settings to use a language other than English, install the <classname +>locales</classname +> support package and configure it. Currently the use of UTF-8 locales is recommended. <informalexample +><screen +> +# aptitude install locales +# dpkg-reconfigure locales +</screen +></informalexample +> To configure your keyboard (if needed): <informalexample +><screen +># aptitude install console-data +# dpkg-reconfigure console-data +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>Note that the keyboard cannot be set while in the chroot, but will be configured for the next reboot. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Install a Kernel</title> +<para +>If you intend to boot this system, you probably want a Linux kernel and a boot loader. Identify available pre-packaged kernels with: <informalexample +><screen +># apt-cache search linux-image +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>If you intend to use a pre-packaged kernel, you may want to create the configuration file <filename +>/etc/kernel-img.conf</filename +> before you do so. Here's an example file: <informalexample +><screen +># Kernel image management overrides +# See kernel-img.conf(5) for details +do_symlinks = yes +relative_links = yes +do_bootloader = yes +do_bootfloppy = no +do_initrd = yes +link_in_boot = no +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>For detailed information about this file and the various options, consult its man page which will be available after installing the <classname +>kernel-package</classname +> package. We recommend that you check that the values are appropriate for your system. </para +><para +>Then install the kernel package of your choice using its package name. <informalexample +><screen +> +# aptitude install linux-image-<replaceable>&kernelversion;-arch-etc</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> If you did not create a <filename +>/etc/kernel-img.conf</filename +> before installing a pre-packaged kernel, you may be asked some questions during its installation that refer to it. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> +<title +>Set up the Boot Loader</title> +<para +>To make your &debian; system bootable, set up your boot loader to load the installed kernel with your new root partition. Note that <command +>debootstrap</command +> does not install a boot loader, though you can use <command +>aptitude</command +> inside your Debian chroot to do so. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Check <userinput +>info grub</userinput +> or <userinput +>man lilo.conf</userinput +> for instructions on setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install Debian, just add an entry for the Debian install to your existing grub <filename +>menu.lst</filename +> or <filename +>lilo.conf</filename +>. For <filename +>lilo.conf</filename +>, you could also copy it to the new system and edit it there. After you are done editing, call <command +>lilo</command +> (remember it will use <filename +>lilo.conf</filename +> relative to the system you call it from). </para +><para arch="x86" +>Installing and setting up <classname +>grub</classname +> is as easy as: <informalexample +><screen +> +# aptitude install grub +# grub-install /dev/<replaceable>hda</replaceable> +# update-grub +</screen +></informalexample +> The second command will install <command +>grub</command +> (in this case in the MBR of <literal +>hda</literal +>). The last command will create a sane and working <filename +>/boot/grub/menu.lst</filename +>. </para +><para +>Note that this assumes that a <filename +>/dev/hda</filename +> device file has been created. There are alternative methods to install <command +>grub</command +>, but those are outside the scope of this appendix. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Here is a basic <filename +>/etc/lilo.conf</filename +> as an example: <informalexample +><screen +>boot=/dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable> +root=/dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable> +install=menu +delay=20 +lba32 +image=/vmlinuz +initrd=/initrd.img +label=Debian +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para arch="x86" +>Depending on which bootloader you selected, you can now make some additional changes in <filename +>/etc/kernel-img.conf</filename +>. </para +><para arch="x86" +>For the <classname +>grub</classname +> bootloader, you should set the <literal +>do_bootloader</literal +> option to <quote +>no</quote +>. And to automatically update your <filename +>/boot/grub/menu.lst</filename +> on installation or removal of Debian kernels, add the following lines: <informalexample +><screen +> +postinst_hook = update-grub +postrm_hook = update-grub +</screen +></informalexample +> For the <classname +>lilo</classname +> bootloader, the value of <literal +>do_bootloader</literal +> needs to remain <quote +>yes</quote +>. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Check <userinput +>man yaboot.conf</userinput +> for instructions on setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install Debian, just add an entry for the Debian install to your existing <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +>. You could also copy it to the new system and edit it there. After you are done editing, call ybin (remember it will use <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> relative to the system you call it from). </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Here is a basic <filename +>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename +> as an example: <informalexample +><screen +> +boot=/dev/hda2 +device=hd: +partition=6 +root=/dev/hda6 +magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot +timeout=50 +image=/vmlinux +label=Debian +</screen +></informalexample +> On some machines, you may need to use <userinput +>ide0:</userinput +> instead of <userinput +>hd:</userinput +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> +<title +>Finishing touches</title> +<para +>As mentioned earlier, the installed system will be very basic. If you would like to make the system a bit more mature, there is an easy method to install all packages with <quote +>standard</quote +> priority: <informalexample +><screen +> +# tasksel install standard +</screen +></informalexample +> Of course, you can also just use <command +>aptitude</command +> to install packages individually. </para +><para +>After the installation there will be a lot of downloaded packages in <filename +>/var/cache/apt/archives/</filename +>. You can free up some diskspace by running: <informalexample +><screen +># aptitude clean +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file appendix/chroot-install.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file appendix/plip.xml --> +<!-- $Id: plip.xml 39644 2006-08-08 22:08:57Z jfs $ --> + + <sect1 id="plip" arch="x86"> + <title +>Installing &debian; over Parallel Line IP (PLIP)</title> + +<para +>This section explains how to install &debian; on a computer without an Ethernet card, but with just a remote gateway computer attached via a Null-Modem cable (also called Null-Printer cable). The gateway computer should be connected to a network that has a Debian mirror on it (e.g. to the Internet). </para +><para +>In the example in this appendix we will set up a PLIP connection using a gateway connected to the Internet over a dial-up connection (ppp0). We will use IP addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 for the PLIP interfaces on the target system and the source system respectively (these addresses should be unused within your network address space). </para +><para +>The PLIP connection set up during the installation will also be available after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend="boot-new"/>). </para +><para +>Before you start, you will need to check the BIOS configuration (IO base address and IRQ) for the parallel ports of both the source and target systems. The most common values are <literal +>io=0x378</literal +>, <literal +>irq=7</literal +>. </para> + + <sect2> + <title +>Requirements</title> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>A target computer, called <emphasis +>target</emphasis +>, where Debian will be installed. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>System installation media; see <xref linkend="installation-media"/>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Another computer connected to the Internet, called <emphasis +>source</emphasis +>, that will function as the gateway. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>A DB-25 Null-Modem cable. See the <ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;" +>PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink +> for more information on this cable and instructions how to make your own. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Setting up source</title> +<para +>The following shell script is a simple example of how to configure the source computer as a gateway to the Internet using ppp0. <informalexample +><screen +>#!/bin/sh + +# We remove running modules from kernel to avoid conflicts and to +# reconfigure them manually. +modprobe -r lp parport_pc +modprobe parport_pc io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable> +modprobe plip + +# Configure the plip interface (plip0 for me, see dmesg | grep plip) +ifconfig <replaceable>plip0 192.168.0.2</replaceable> pointopoint <replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable> netmask 255.255.255.255 up + +# Configure gateway +modprobe iptable_nat +iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o <replaceable>ppp0</replaceable> -j MASQUERADE +echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Installing target</title> +<para +>Boot the installation media. The installation needs to be run in expert mode; enter <userinput +>expert</userinput +> at the boot prompt. If you need to set parameters for kernel modules, you also need to do this at the boot prompt. For example, to boot the installer and set values for the <quote +>io</quote +> and <quote +>irq</quote +> options for the parport_pc module, enter the following at the boot prompt: <informalexample +><screen +> +expert parport_pc.io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> parport_pc.irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Below are the answers that should be given during various stages of the installation. </para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<guimenuitem +>Load installer components from CD</guimenuitem> + +</para +><para +>Select the <userinput +>plip-modules</userinput +> option from the list; this will make the PLIP drivers available to the installation system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<guimenuitem +>Detect network hardware</guimenuitem> + +</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>If target <emphasis +>does</emphasis +> have a network card, a list of driver modules for detected cards will be shown. If you want to force &d-i; to use plip instead, you have to deselect all listed driver modules. Obviously, if target doesn't have a network card, the installer will not show this list. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Because no network card was detected/selected earlier, the installer will ask you to select a network driver module from a list. Select the <userinput +>plip</userinput +> module. </para +></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<guimenuitem +>Configure the network</guimenuitem> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>Auto-configure network with DHCP: No </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>IP address: <userinput +><replaceable +>192.168.0.1</replaceable +></userinput +> </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Point-to-point address: <userinput +><replaceable +>192.168.0.2</replaceable +></userinput +> </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Name server addresses: you can enter the same addresses used on source (see <filename +>/etc/resolv.conf</filename +>) </para +></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file appendix/plip.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file appendix/pppoe.xml --> +<!-- $Id: pppoe.xml 57313 2009-01-16 17:16:38Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="pppoe" arch="not-s390"> + <title +>Installing &debian; using PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</title> + +<para +>In some countries PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a common protocol for broadband (ADSL or cable) connections to an Internet Service Provider. Setting up a network connection using PPPoE is not supported by default in the installer, but can be made to work very simply. This section explains how. </para +><para +>The PPPoE connection set up during the installation will also be available after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend="boot-new"/>). </para +><para +>To have the option of setting up and using PPPoE during the installation, you will need to install using one of the CD-ROM/DVD images that are available. It is not supported for other installation methods (e.g. netboot<phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot" +> or floppy</phrase +>). </para +><para +>Installing over PPPoE is mostly the same as any other installation. The following steps explain the differences. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Boot the installer with the boot parameter <userinput +>modules=ppp-udeb</userinput +><footnote arch="x86" +> <para +> See <xref linkend="boot-screen"/> for information on how to add a boot parameter. </para +> </footnote +>. This will ensure the component responsible for the setup of PPPoE (<classname +>ppp-udeb</classname +>) will be loaded and run automatically. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Follow the regular initial steps of the installation (language, country and keyboard selection; the loading of additional installer components<footnote +> <para +> The <classname +>ppp-udeb</classname +> component is loaded as one of the additional components in this step. If you want to install at medium or low priority (expert mode), you can also manually select the <classname +>ppp-udeb</classname +> instead of entering the <quote +>modules</quote +> parameter at the boot prompt. </para +> </footnote +>). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The next step is the detection of network hardware, in order to identify any Ethernet cards present in the system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>After this the actual setup of PPPoE is started. The installer will probe all the detected Ethernet interfaces in an attempt to find a PPPoE concentrator (a type of server which handles PPPoE connections). </para +><para +>It is possible that the concentrator will not to be found at the first attempt. This can happen occasionally on slow or loaded networks or with faulty servers. In most cases a second attempt to detect the concentrator will be successful; to retry, select <guimenuitem +>Configure and start a PPPoE connection</guimenuitem +> from the main menu of the installer. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>After a concentrator is found, the user will be prompted to type the login information (the PPPoE username and password). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>At this point the installer will use the provided information to establish the PPPoE connection. If the correct information was provided, the PPPoE connection should be configured and the installer should be able to use it to connect to the Internet and retrieve packages over it (if needed). If the login information is not correct or some error appears, the installer will stop, but the configuration can be attempted again by selecting the menu entry <guimenuitem +>Configure and start a PPPoE connection</guimenuitem +>. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file appendix/pppoe.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file appendix/graphical.xml --> +<!-- $Id: graphical.xml 56145 2008-09-26 10:47:02Z lunar $ --> + + <sect1 condition="gtk" id="graphical"> + <title +>The Graphical Installer</title> +<para +>The graphical version of the installer is only available for a limited number of architectures, including &arch-title;. The functionality of the graphical installer is essentially the same as that of the regular installer as it basically uses the same programs, but with a different frontend. </para +><para +>Although the functionality is identical, the graphical installer still has a few significant advantages. The main advantage is that it supports more languages, namely those that use a character set that cannot be displayed with the regular <quote +>newt</quote +> frontend. It also has a few usability advantages such as the option to use a mouse, and in some cases several questions can be displayed on a single screen. </para +><para arch="x86" +>The graphical installer is available with all CD images and with the hd-media installation method. To boot the graphical installer simply select the relevant option from the boot menu. Expert and rescue mode for the graphical installer can be selected from the <quote +>Advanced options</quote +> menu. The previously used boot methods <userinput +>installgui</userinput +>, <userinput +>expertgui</userinput +> and <userinput +>rescuegui</userinput +> can still be used from the boot prompt which is shown after selecting the <quote +>Help</quote +> option in the boot menu. </para +><para arch="x86" +>There is also a graphical installer image that can be netbooted. And there is a special <quote +>mini</quote +> ISO image<footnote id="gtk-miniiso" +> <para +> The mini ISO image can be downloaded from a Debian mirror as described in <xref linkend="downloading-files"/>. Look for <filename +>netboot/gtk/mini.iso</filename +>. </para +> </footnote +>, which is mainly useful for testing. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>For &arch-title;, currently only an experimental <quote +>mini</quote +> ISO image is available<footnote id="gtk-miniiso" +> <para +> The mini ISO image can be downloaded from a Debian mirror as described in <xref linkend="downloading-files"/>. Look for <filename +>netboot/gtk/mini.iso</filename +>. </para +> </footnote +>. It should work on almost all PowerPC systems that have an ATI graphical card, but is unlikely to work on other systems. </para +><para +>Just as with the regular installer it is possible to add boot parameters when starting the graphical installer. One of those parameters allows to configure the mouse for left-handed use. Others allow to select the mouse device (e.g. for a serial mouse) and the mouse protocol. See <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> for valid parameters<phrase arch="x86" +> and <xref linkend="boot-screen"/> for information on how to pass them</phrase +>. </para> +<note +><para +>The graphical installer requires significantly more memory to run than the regular installer: &minimum-memory-gtk;. If insufficient memory is available, it will automatically fall back to the regular <quote +>newt</quote +> frontend. </para +><para +>If the amount of memory in your system is below &minimum-memory;, the graphical installer may fail to boot at all while booting the regular installer would still work. Using the regular installer is recommended for systems with little available memory. </para +></note> + + <sect2 id="gtk-using"> + <title +>Using the graphical installer</title> +<para +>As already mentioned, the graphical installer basically works the same as the regular installer and thus the rest of this manual can be used to guide you through the installation process. </para +><para +>If you prefer using the keyboard over the mouse, there are two things you need to know. To expand a collapsed list (used for example for the selection of countries within continents), you can use the <keycap +>+</keycap +> and <keycap +>-</keycap +> keys. For questions where more than one item can be selected (e.g. task selection), you first need to tab to the &BTN-CONT; button after making your selections; hitting enter will toggle a selection, not activate &BTN-CONT;. </para +><para +>To switch to another console, you will also need to use the <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +> key, just as with the X Window System. For example, to switch to VT2 (the first debug shell) you would use: <keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +> <keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>F2</keycap +> </keycombo +>. The graphical installer itself runs on VT5, so you can use <keycombo +> <keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>F5</keycap +> </keycombo +> to switch back. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="gtk-issues"> + <title +>Known issues</title> +<para +>The graphical frontend to the installer is relatively new and because of that there are some known issues. We continue to work on resolving these. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Information on some screens is not yet nicely formatted into columns as it should be. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Support for touchpads is not yet optimal. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file appendix/graphical.xml --> + +</appendix> +<!-- End of file appendix/random-bits.xml --> diff --git a/nb/bookinfo.xml b/nb/bookinfo.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf2996df8 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/bookinfo.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<!-- Start of file bookinfo.xml --> +<!-- $Id: bookinfo.xml 53521 2008-05-29 20:13:29Z fjp $ --> + +<bookinfo id="debian_installation_guide"> +<title +>Installasjonshåndboken for &debian;</title> + +<abstract> +<para +>Dette dokumentet inneholder installasjonsinstruksjoner for &debian; &release; system (kodenavn <quote +>&releasename;</quote +>), for prosessorvarianten &arch-title; (<quote +>&architecture;</quote +>). Den inneholder også referanser til ytterligere dokumentasjon og informasjon om hvordan du får mest mulig ut av ditt nye Debian system. </para> + +<para> +<note arch="m68k" +><para +>Because the &arch-title; port is not a release architecture for &releasename;, there is no official version of this manual for &arch-title; for &releasename;. However, because the port is still active and there is hope that &arch-title; may be included again in future official releases, this development version of the Installation Guide is still available. </para +><para +>Because &arch-title; is not an official architecture, some of the information, and especially some links, in this manual may be incorrect. For additional information, please check the <ulink url="&url-ports;" +>webpages</ulink +> of the port or contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +>debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink +>. </para +></note> + +<warning condition="not-checked" +><para +>This installation guide is based on an earlier manual written for the old Debian installation system (the <quote +>boot-floppies</quote +>), and has been updated to document the new Debian installer. However, for &architecture;, the manual has not been fully updated and fact checked for the new installer. There may remain parts of the manual that are incomplete or outdated or that still document the boot-floppies installer. A newer version of this manual, possibly better documenting this architecture, may be found on the Internet at the <ulink url="&url-d-i;" +>&d-i; home page</ulink +>. You may also be able to find additional translations there. </para +></warning> + +<note condition="checked" +><para +>Although this installation guide for &architecture; is mostly up-to-date, we plan to make some changes and reorganize parts of the manual after the official release of &releasename;. A newer version of this manual may be found on the Internet at the <ulink url="&url-d-i;" +>&d-i; home page</ulink +>. You may also be able to find additional translations there. </para +></note> +</para> + +<para condition="translation-status" +>Translators can use this paragraph to provide some information about the status of the translation, for example if the translation is still being worked on or if review is wanted (don't forget to mention where comments should be sent!). See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph. Its condition is "translation-status". </para> +</abstract> + +<copyright> + <year +>2004</year> + <year +>2005</year> + <year +>2006</year> + <year +>2007</year> + <year +>2008</year> + <holder +>Debian Installer-laget</holder> +</copyright> + +<legalnotice> +<para +>This manual is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License. Please refer to the license in <xref linkend="appendix-gpl"/>. </para> +</legalnotice> +</bookinfo> +<!-- End of file bookinfo.xml --> diff --git a/nb/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml b/nb/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8dd3fba95 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,3542 @@ +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/boot-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: boot-installer.xml 49985 2007-11-01 18:23:53Z fjp $ --> + +<chapter id="boot-installer" +><title +>Booting the Installation System</title> + +<!-- Include only archs that are documented to avoid build-errors --> +<!-- The arch="..." condition can be deleted when al archs are present --> + <sect1 arch="alpha;arm;x86;ia64;m68k;mips;mipsel;s390;powerpc;sparc"> + <title +>Booting the Installer on &arch-title;</title> + +<!-- This info is so architecture dependent, that I have turned the --> +<!-- structure inside out for this chapter. Each arch has a document. --> +<!-- Note: arch hppa is currently missing --> + +<warning arch="x86;powerpc" +><para +>If you have any other operating systems on your system that you wish to keep (dual boot setup), you should make sure that they have been properly shut down <emphasis +>before</emphasis +> you boot the installer. Installing an operating system while another operating system is in hibernation (has been suspended to disk) could result in loss of, or damage to the state of the suspended operating system which could cause problems when it is rebooted. </para +></warning> +<note condition="gtk" +><para +>For information on how to boot the graphical installer, see <xref linkend="graphical"/>. </para +></note> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/alpha.xml --> +<!-- $Id: alpha.xml 43789 2007-01-03 09:27:39Z vorlon $ --> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-firmware"> + <title +>Alpha Console Firmware</title> +<para +>Console firmware is stored in a flash ROM and started when an Alpha system is powered up or reset. There are two different console specifications used on Alpha systems, and hence two classes of console firmware available: </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +><emphasis +>SRM console</emphasis +>, based on the Alpha Console Subsystem specification, which provides an operating environment for OpenVMS, Tru64 UNIX, and Linux operating systems. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><emphasis +>ARC, AlphaBIOS, or ARCSBIOS console</emphasis +>, based on the Advanced RISC Computing (ARC) specification, which provides an operating environment for Windows NT. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>From the user's perspective, the most important difference between SRM and ARC is that the choice of console constrains the possible disk-partitioning scheme for the hard disk which you wish to boot off of. </para +><para +>ARC requires that you use an MS-DOS partition table (as created by <command +>cfdisk</command +>) for the boot disk. Therefore MS-DOS partition tables are the <quote +>native</quote +> partition format when booting from ARC. In fact, since AlphaBIOS contains a disk partitioning utility, you may prefer to partition your disks from the firmware menus before installing Linux. </para +><para +>Conversely, SRM is <emphasis +>incompatible</emphasis +><footnote +> <para +> Specifically, the bootsector format required by the Console Subsystem Specification conflicts with the placement of the DOS partition table. </para +> </footnote +> with MS-DOS partition tables. Since Tru64 Unix uses the BSD disklabel format, this is the <quote +>native</quote +> partition format for SRM installations. </para +><para +>GNU/Linux is the only operating system on Alpha that can be booted from both console types, but &debian; &release; only supports booting on SRM-based systems. If you have an Alpha for which no version of SRM is available, if you will be dual-booting the system with Windows NT, or if your boot device requires ARC console support for BIOS initialization, you will not be able to use the &debian; &release; installer. You can still run &debian; &release; on such systems by using other install media; for instance, you can install Debian woody with MILO and upgrade. </para +><para +>Because <command +>MILO</command +> is not available for any of the Alpha systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM when possible. </para +><para +>The following table summarizes available and supported system type/console combinations (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> for the system type names). The word <quote +>ARC</quote +> below denotes any of the ARC-compliant consoles. </para +><para> + +<informaltable +><tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>System Type</entry> + <entry +>Console Type Supported</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>alcor</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>avanti</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>book1</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>cabriolet</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>dp264</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>eb164</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>eb64p</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>eb66</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>eb66p</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>jensen</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>lx164</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>miata</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>mikasa</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>mikasa-p</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>nautilus</entry> + <entry +>ARC (see motherboard manual) or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>noname</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>noritake</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>noritake-p</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>pc164</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>rawhide</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ARC only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>sable</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>sable-g</entry> + <entry +>SRM only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>sx164</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>takara</entry> + <entry +>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>xl</entry> + <entry +>ARC only</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>xlt</entry> + <entry +>ARC only</entry> +</row> + +</tbody> +</tgroup> +</informaltable> + +</para +><para +>Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. For the SRM console, <command +>aboot</command +>, a small, platform-independent bootloader, is used. See the (unfortunately outdated) <ulink url="&url-srm-howto;" +>SRM HOWTO</ulink +> for more information on <command +>aboot</command +>. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>The following paragraphs are from the woody install manual, and are included here for reference; they may be useful to someone at a later date when Debian supports MILO-based installs again. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. There are two mainstream Linux loaders: <command +>MILO</command +> and <command +>aboot</command +>. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +><command +>MILO</command +> is itself a console, which replaces ARC or SRM in memory. <command +>MILO</command +> can be booted from both ARC and SRM and is the only way to bootstrap Linux from the ARC console. <command +>MILO</command +> is platform-specific (a different <command +>MILO</command +> is needed for each system type) and exist only for those systems, for which ARC support is shown in the table above. See also the (unfortunately outdated) <ulink url="&url-milo-howto;" +>MILO HOWTO</ulink +>. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +><command +>aboot</command +> is a small, platform-independent bootloader, which runs from SRM only. See the (also unfortunately outdated) <ulink url="&url-srm-howto;" +>SRM HOWTO</ulink +> for more information on <command +>aboot</command +>. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>Thus, three scenarios are generally possible, depending on the system's console firmware and whether or not <command +>MILO</command +> is available: <informalexample +><screen +> +SRM -> aboot +SRM -> MILO +ARC -> MILO +</screen +></informalexample +> Because <command +>MILO</command +> is not available for any of the Alpha systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM and <command +>aboot</command +> on new installations of GNU/Linux, unless you wish to dual-boot with Windows NT. </para +><para +>The majority of AlphaServers and all current server and workstation products contain both SRM and AlphaBIOS in their firmware. For <quote +>half-flash</quote +> machines such as the various evaluation boards, it is possible to switch from one version to another by reflashing the firmware. Also, once SRM is installed, it is possible to run ARC/AlphaBIOS from a floppy disk (using the <command +>arc</command +> command). For the reasons mentioned above, we recommend switching to SRM before installing &debian;. </para +><para +>As on other architectures, you should install the newest available revision of the firmware<footnote +> <para +> Except on Jensen, where Linux is not supported on firmware versions newer than 1.7 — see <ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;" +></ulink +> for more information. </para +> </footnote +> before installing &debian;. For Alpha, firmware updates can be obtained from <ulink url="&url-alpha-firmware;" +>Alpha Firmware Updates</ulink +>. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> +<para +>In SRM, Ethernet interfaces are named with the <userinput +>ewa</userinput +> prefix, and will be listed in the output of the <userinput +>show dev</userinput +> command, like this (edited slightly): <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> show dev +ewa0.0.0.9.0 EWA0 08-00-2B-86-98-65 +ewb0.0.0.11.0 EWB0 08-00-2B-86-98-54 +ewc0.0.0.2002.0 EWC0 00-06-2B-01-32-B0 +</screen +></informalexample +> You first need to set the boot protocol: <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> set ewa0_protocols bootp +</screen +></informalexample +> Then check the medium type is correct: <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> set ewa0_mode <replaceable>mode</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> You can get a listing of valid modes with <userinput +>>>>set ewa0_mode</userinput +>. </para +><para +>Then, to boot from the first Ethernet interface, you would type: <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> boot ewa0 -flags "" +</screen +></informalexample +> This will boot using the default kernel parameters as included in the netboot image. </para +><para +>If you wish to use a serial console, you <emphasis +>must</emphasis +> pass the <userinput +>console=</userinput +> parameter to the kernel. This can be done using the <userinput +>-flags</userinput +> argument to the SRM <userinput +>boot</userinput +> command. The serial ports are named the same as their corresponding files in <userinput +>/dev</userinput +>. Also, when specifying additional kernel parameters, you must repeat certain default options that are needed by the &d-i; images. For example, to boot from <userinput +>ewa0</userinput +> and use a console on the first serial port, you would type: <informalexample +><screen +>>>> boot ewa0 -flags "root=/dev/ram ramdisk_size=16384 console=ttyS0" +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" +><title +>Booting from CD-ROM with the SRM Console</title> +<para +>The &debian; install CDs include several preconfigured boot options for VGA and serial consoles. Type <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> boot xxxx -flags 0 +</screen +></informalexample +> to boot using VGA console, where <replaceable +>xxxx</replaceable +> is your CD-ROM drive in SRM notation. To use serial console on the first serial device, type <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> boot xxxx -flags 1 +</screen +></informalexample +> and for console on the second serial port, type <informalexample +><screen +>>>> boot xxxx -flags 2 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME"> + <title +>Booting from CD-ROM with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> +<para +>To boot a CD-ROM from the ARC console, find your sub-architecture code name (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/>), then enter <filename +>\milo\linload.exe</filename +> as the boot loader and <filename +>\milo\<replaceable +>subarch</replaceable +></filename +> (where <replaceable +>subarch</replaceable +> is the proper subarchitecture name) as the OS Path in the `OS Selection Setup' menu. Ruffians make an exception: You need to use <filename +>\milo\ldmilo.exe</filename +> as boot loader. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title +>Booting from Floppies with the SRM Console</title> +<para +>At the SRM prompt (<prompt +>>>></prompt +>), issue the following command: <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> boot dva0 -flags 0 +</screen +></informalexample +> possibly replacing <filename +>dva0</filename +> with the actual device name. Usually, <filename +>dva0</filename +> is the floppy; type <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> show dev +</screen +></informalexample +> to see the list of devices (e.g., if you want to boot from a CD). Note that if you are booting via MILO, <command +>-flags</command +> argument is ignored, so you can just type <command +>boot dva0</command +>. If everything works OK, you will eventually see the Linux kernel boot. </para +><para +>If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via <command +>aboot</command +>, use the following command: <informalexample +><screen +> +>>> boot dva0 -file linux.bin.gz -flags "root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 arguments" +</screen +></informalexample +> (typed on one line), substituting, if necessary, the actual SRM boot device name for <filename +>dva0</filename +>, the Linux boot device name for <filename +>fd0</filename +>, and the desired kernel parameters for <filename +>arguments</filename +>. </para +><para +>If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via <command +>MILO</command +>, you will have to interrupt bootstrap once you get into MILO. See <xref linkend="booting-from-milo"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title +>Booting from Floppies with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> + +<para +>In the OS Selection menu, set <command +>linload.exe</command +> as the boot loader, and <command +>milo</command +> as the OS Path. Bootstrap using the newly created entry. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME" id="booting-from-milo" +><title +>Booting with MILO</title> +<para +>MILO contained on the bootstrap media is configured to proceed straight to Linux automatically. Should you wish to intervene, all you need is to press space during MILO countdown. </para +><para +>If you want to specify all the bits explicitly (for example, to supply additional parameters), you can use a command like this: <informalexample +><screen +> +MILO> boot fd0:linux.bin.gz root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 <!-- arguments --> +</screen +></informalexample +> If you are booting from something other than a floppy, substitute <filename +>fd0</filename +> in the above example with the appropriate device name in Linux notation. The <command +>help</command +> command would give you a brief MILO command reference. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/alpha.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/arm.xml --> +<!-- $Id: arm.xml 36639 2006-04-23 06:26:34Z jfs $ --> + + <sect2 arch="arm" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting from TFTP</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + + <sect3 arch="arm" +><title +>Booting from TFTP on Netwinder</title> +<para +>Netwinders have two network interfaces: A 10Mbps NE2000-compatible card (which is generally referred to as <literal +>eth0</literal +>) and a 100Mbps Tulip card. There may be problems loading the image via TFTP using the 100Mbps card so it is recommended that you use the 10Mbps interface (the one labeled with <literal +>10 Base-T</literal +>). </para> +<note +><para +>You need NeTTrom 2.2.1 or later to boot the installation system, and version 2.3.3 is recommended. Unfortunately, firmware files are currently not available for download because of license issues. If this situation changes, you may find new images at <ulink url="http//www.netwinder.org/" +></ulink +>. </para +></note> +<para +>When you boot your Netwinder you have to interrupt the boot process during the countdown. This allows you to set a number of firmware settings needed in order to boot the installer. First of all, start by loading the default settings: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> load-defaults +</screen +></informalexample +> Furthermore, you must configure the network, either with a static address: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 flash + NeTTrom command-> setenv eth0_ip 192.168.0.10/24 +</screen +></informalexample +> where 24 is the number of set bits in the netmask, or a dynamic address: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 dhcp +</screen +></informalexample +> You may also need to configure the <userinput +>route1</userinput +> settings if the TFTP server is not on the local subnet. Following these settings, you have to specify the TFTP server and the location of the image. You can then store your settings to flash. <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpserver 192.168.0.1 + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpfile boot.img + NeTTrom command-> save-all +</screen +></informalexample +> Now you have to tell the firmware that the TFTP image should be booted: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv kernconfig tftp + NeTTrom command-> setenv rootdev /dev/ram +</screen +></informalexample +> If you use a serial console to install your Netwinder, you need to add the following setting: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram console=ttyS0,115200 +</screen +></informalexample +> Alternatively, for installations using a keyboard and monitor you have to set: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram +</screen +></informalexample +> You can use the <command +>printenv</command +> command to review your environment settings. After you have verified that the settings are correct, you can load the image: <informalexample +><screen +> + NeTTrom command-> boot +</screen +></informalexample +> In case you run into any problems, a <ulink url="http://www.netwinder.org/howto/Firmware-HOWTO.html" +>detailed HOWTO</ulink +> is available. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" +><title +>Booting from TFTP on CATS</title> +<para +>On CATS machines, use <command +>boot de0:</command +> or similar at the Cyclone prompt. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="arm" +><title +>Booting from CD-ROM</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + +<para +>To boot a CD-ROM from the Cyclone console prompt, use the command <command +>boot cd0:cats.bin</command +> </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="arm" id="boot-firmware" +><title +>Booting from Firmware</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-firmware.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-firmware.xml 35309 2006-03-07 19:31:05Z tbm $ --> + +<para +>There is an increasing number of consumer devices that directly boot from a flash chip on the device. The installer can be written to flash so it will automatically start when you reboot your machines. </para +><note +><para +>In many cases, changing the firmware of an embedded device voids your warranty. Sometimes you are also not able to recover your device if there are problems during the flashing process. Therefore, please take care and follow the steps precisely. </para +></note> + +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-firmware.xml --> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="boot-firmware-nslu2" +><title +>Booting the NSLU2</title> +<para +>There are three ways how to put the installer firmware into flash: </para> + + <sect4 arch="arm" +><title +>Using the NSLU2 web interface</title> +<para +>Go to the administration section and choose the menu item <literal +>Upgrade</literal +>. You can then browse your disk for the installer image you have previously downloaded. Then press the <literal +>Start Upgrade</literal +> button, confirm, wait for a few minutes and confirm again. The system will then boot straight into the installer. </para> + </sect4> + + <sect4 arch="arm" +><title +>Via the network using Linux/Unix</title> +<para +>You can use <command +>upslug2</command +> from any Linux or Unix machine to upgrade the machine via the network. This software is packaged for Debian. First, you have to put your NSLU2 in upgrade mode: <orderedlist +> <listitem +><para +> Disconnect any disks and/or devices from the USB ports. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Power off the NSLU2 </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Press and hold the reset button (accessible through the small hole on the back just above the power input). </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Press and release the power button to power on the NSLU2. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Wait for 10 seconds watching the ready/status LED. After 10 seconds it will change from amber to red. Immediately release the reset button. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> The NSLU2 ready/status LED will flash alternately red/green (there is a 1 second delay before the first green). The NSLU2 is now in upgrade mode. </para +></listitem +> </orderedlist +> See the <ulink url="http://www.nslu2-linux.org/wiki/OpenSlug/UsingTheBinary" +>NSLU2-Linux pages</ulink +> if you have problems with this. Once your NSLU2 is in upgrade mode, you can flash the new image: <informalexample +><screen +> +sudo upslug2 -i di-nslu2.bin +</screen +></informalexample +> Note that the tool also shows the MAC address of your NSLU2, which may come in handy to configure your DHCP server. After the whole image has been written and verified, the system will automatically reboot. Make sure you connect your USB disk again now, otherwise the installer won't be able to find it. </para> + </sect4> + + <sect4 arch="arm" +><title +>Via the network using Windows</title> +<para +>There is <ulink url="http://www.everbesthk.com/8-download/sercomm/firmware/all_router_utility.zip" +>a tool</ulink +> for Windows to upgrade the firmware via the network. </para> + </sect4> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/arm.xml --> +<!-- &boot-installer-hppa.xml; --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/x86.xml --> +<!-- $Id: x86.xml 56419 2008-10-15 07:17:25Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="x86" +><title +>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + +<!-- We'll comment the following section until we know exact layout --> +<!-- +CD #1 of official Debian CD-ROM sets for &arch-title; will present a +<prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt on most hardware. Press +<keycap +>F4</keycap +> to see the list of kernel options available +from which to boot. Just type your chosen flavor name (idepci, +vanilla, compact, bf24) at the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt +followed by &enterkey;. + +</para +><para> + +If your hardware doesn't support booting of multiple images, put one +of the other CDs in the drive. It appears that most SCSI CD-ROM drives +do not support <command +>isolinux</command +> multiple image booting, so users +with SCSI CD-ROMs should try either CD2 (vanilla) or CD3 (compact), +or CD5 (bf2.4). + +</para +><para> + +CD's 2 through 5 will each boot a +different ``flavor'' depending on which CD-ROM is +inserted. See <xref linkend="kernel-choice"/> for a discussion of the +different flavors. Here's how the flavors are laid out on the +different CD-ROMs: + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>CD 1</term +><listitem +><para> + +Allows a selection of kernel images to boot from (the idepci flavor is +the default if no selection is made). + +</para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>CD 2</term +><listitem +><para> + +Boots the <quote +>vanilla</quote +> flavor. + +</para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>CD 3</term +><listitem +><para> + +Boots the <quote +>compact</quote +> flavor. + +</para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>CD 4</term +><listitem +><para> + +Boots the <quote +>idepci</quote +> flavor. + +</para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>CD 5</term +><listitem +><para> + +Boots the <quote +>bf2.4</quote +> flavor. + +</para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + + </variablelist> + +</para +><para> + +--> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="boot-win32"> + <title +>Booting from Windows</title> +<para +>To start the installer from Windows, you must first obtain CD-ROM/DVD-ROM or USB memory stick installation media as described in <xref linkend="official-cdrom"/> and <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. </para +><para +>If you use an installation CD or DVD, a pre-installation program should be launched automatically when you insert the disc. In case Windows does not start it automatically, or if you are using a USB memory stick, you can run it manually by accessing the device and executing <command +>setup.exe</command +>. </para +><para +>After the program has been started, a few preliminary questions will be asked and the system will be prepared to start the &debian; installer. </para> + </sect2> + +<!-- FIXME the documented procedure does not exactly work, commented out + until fixes + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="install-from-dos"> + <title +>Booting from a DOS partition</title> + + +<para> + +Boot into DOS (not Windows) without any drivers being loaded. To do +this, you have to press <keycap +>F8</keycap +> at exactly the right +moment (and optionally select the <quote +>safe mode command prompt only</quote> +option). Enter the subdirectory for the flavor you chose, e.g., + +<informalexample +><screen +> +cd c:\install +</screen +></informalexample +>. + +Next, execute <command +>install.bat</command +>. +The kernel will load and launch the installer system. + +</para +><para> + +Please note, there is currently a loadlin problem (#142421) which +precludes <filename +>install.bat</filename +> from being used with the +bf2.4 flavor. The symptom of the problem is an +<computeroutput +>invalid compressed format</computeroutput +> error. + +</para> + </sect2> + +END FIXME --> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="boot-initrd"> + <title +>Booting from Linux Using <command +>LILO</command +> or <command +>GRUB</command +></title> + +<para +>To boot the installer from hard disk, you must first download and place the needed files as described in <xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. </para> + +<para +>If you intend to use the hard drive only for booting and then download everything over the network, you should download the <filename +>netboot/debian-installer/&architecture;/initrd.gz</filename +> file and its corresponding kernel <filename +>netboot/debian-installer/&architecture;/linux</filename +>. This will allow you to repartition the hard disk from which you boot the installer, although you should do so with care. </para> + +<para +>Alternatively, if you intend to keep an existing partition on the hard drive unchanged during the install, you can download the <filename +>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename +> file and its kernel, as well as copy a CD iso to the drive (make sure the file is named ending in <literal +>.iso</literal +>). The installer can then boot from the drive and install from the CD image, without needing the network. </para> + +<para +>For <command +>LILO</command +>, you will need to configure two essential things in <filename +>/etc/lilo.conf</filename +>: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> to load the <filename +>initrd.gz</filename +> installer at boot time; </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> have the <filename +>vmlinuz</filename +> kernel use a RAM disk as its root partition. </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> Here is a <filename +>/etc/lilo.conf</filename +> example: </para +><para> + +<informalexample +><screen +>image=/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz + label=newinstall + initrd=/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz +</screen +></informalexample +> For more details, refer to the <citerefentry +><refentrytitle +>initrd</refentrytitle +> <manvolnum +>4</manvolnum +></citerefentry +> and <citerefentry +><refentrytitle +>lilo.conf</refentrytitle +> <manvolnum +>5</manvolnum +></citerefentry +> man pages. Now run <userinput +>lilo</userinput +> and reboot. </para +><para +>The procedure for <command +>GRUB</command +> is quite similar. Locate your <filename +>menu.lst</filename +> in the <filename +>/boot/grub/</filename +> directory (sometimes in the <filename +>/boot/boot/grub/</filename +>), add the following lines: <informalexample +><screen +> +title New Install +kernel (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz +initrd (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz +</screen +></informalexample +> and reboot. </para +><para +>Note that the value of the <userinput +>ramdisk_size</userinput +> may need to be adjusted for the size of the initrd image. From here on, there should be no difference between <command +>GRUB</command +> or <command +>LILO</command +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" condition="bootable-usb" id="usb-boot"> + <title +>Booting from USB Memory Stick</title> +<para +>Let's assume you have prepared everything from <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/> and <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. Now just plug your USB stick into some free USB connector and reboot the computer. The system should boot up, and you should be presented with the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="floppy-boot"> + <title +>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para +>You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. </para +><para +>To boot from the installer boot floppy, place it in the primary floppy drive, shut down the system as you normally would, then turn it back on. </para +><para +>For installing from an LS-120 drive (ATAPI version) with a set of floppies, you need to specify the virtual location for the floppy device. This is done with the <emphasis +>root=</emphasis +> boot argument, giving the device that the ide-floppy driver maps the device to. For example, if your LS-120 drive is connected as the first IDE device (master) on the second cable, you enter <userinput +>install root=/dev/hdc</userinput +> at the boot prompt. </para +><para +>Note that on some machines, <keycombo +><keycap +>Control</keycap +> <keycap +>Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>Delete</keycap +></keycombo +> does not properly reset the machine, so a <quote +>hard</quote +> reboot is recommended. If you are installing from an existing operating system (e.g., from a DOS box) you don't have a choice. Otherwise, please do a hard reboot when booting. </para +><para +>The floppy disk will be accessed, and you should then see a screen that introduces the boot floppy and ends with the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt. </para +><para +>Once you press &enterkey;, you should see the message <computeroutput +>Loading...</computeroutput +>, followed by <computeroutput +>Uncompressing Linux...</computeroutput +>, and then a screenfull or so of information about the hardware in your system. More information on this phase of the boot process can be found below in <xref linkend="kernel-msgs"/>. </para +><para +>After booting from the boot floppy, the root floppy is requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;, and the contents are loaded into memory. The installer program <command +>debian-installer</command +> is automatically launched. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + +<para +>There are various ways to do a TFTP boot on i386. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>NIC or Motherboard that support PXE</title> +<para +>It could be that your Network Interface Card or Motherboard provides PXE boot functionality. This is a <trademark class="trade" +>Intel</trademark +> re-implementation of TFTP boot. If so, you may be able to configure your BIOS to boot from the network. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>NIC with Network BootROM</title> +<para +>It could be that your Network Interface Card provides TFTP boot functionality. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>Let us (<email +>&email-debian-boot-list;</email +>) know how did you manage it. Please refer to this document. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Etherboot</title> +<para +>The <ulink url="http://www.etherboot.org" +>etherboot project</ulink +> provides bootdiskettes and even bootroms that do a TFTPboot. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="boot-screen"> + <title +>The Boot Screen</title> +<para +>When the installer boots, you should be presented with a friendly graphical screen showing the Debian logo and a menu: <informalexample +><screen +> +Installer boot menu + +Install +Graphical install +Advanced options > +Help + +Press ENTER to boot or TAB to edit a menu entry +</screen +></informalexample +> Depending on the installation method you are using, the <quote +>Graphical install</quote +> option may not be available. </para +><para +>For a normal installation, select either the <quote +>Install</quote +> or the <quote +>Graphical install</quote +> entry — using either the arrow keys on your keyboard or by typing the first (highlighted) letter — and press &enterkey; to boot the installer. </para +><para +>The <quote +>Advanced options</quote +> entry gives access to a second menu that allows to boot the installer in expert mode, in rescue mode and for automated installs. </para +><para +>If you wish or need to add any boot parameters for either the installer or the kernel, press &tabkey;. This will display the default boot command for the selected menu entry and allow to add additional options. The help screens (see below) list some common possible options. Press &enterkey; to boot the installer with your options; pressing &escapekey; will return you to the boot menu and undo any changes you made. </para +><para +>Choosing the <quote +>Help</quote +> entry will result in the first help screen being displayed which gives an overview of all available help screens. Note that it is not possible to return to the boot menu after the help screens have been displayed. However, the F3 and F4 help screens list commands that are equivalent to the boot methods listed in the menu. All help screens have a boot prompt at which the boot command can be typed: <informalexample +><screen +> +Press F1 for the help index, or ENTER to boot: +</screen +></informalexample +> At this boot prompt you can either just press &enterkey; to boot the installer with default options or enter a specific boot command and, optionally, boot parameters. A number of boot parameters which might be useful can be found on the various help screens. If you do add any parameters to the boot command line, be sure to first type the boot method (the default is <userinput +>install</userinput +>) and a space before the first parameter (e.g., <userinput +>install fb=false</userinput +>). <note +><para +>The keyboard is assumed to have a default American English layout at this point. This means that if your keyboard has a different (language-specific) layout, the characters that appear on the screen may be different from what you'd expect when you type parameters. Wikipedia has a <ulink url="&url-us-keymap;" +>schema of the US keyboard layout</ulink +> which can be used as a reference to find the correct keys to use. </para +></note> +<note +><para +>If you are using a system that has the BIOS configured to use serial console, you may not be able to see the initial graphical splash screen upon booting the installer; you may even not see the boot menu. The same can happen if you are installing the system via a remote management device that provides a text interface to the VGA console. Examples of these devices include the text console of Compaq's <quote +>integrated Lights Out</quote +> (iLO) and HP's <quote +>Integrated Remote Assistant</quote +> (IRA). </para +><para +>To bypass the graphical boot screen you can either blindly press &escapekey; to get a text boot prompt, or (equally blindly) press <quote +>H</quote +> followed by &enterkey; to select the <quote +>Help</quote +> option described above. After that your keystrokes should be echoed at the prompt. To prevent the installer from using the framebuffer for the rest of the installation, you will also want to add <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +> to the boot prompt, as described in the help text. </para +></note> +</para> + + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/x86.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/ia64.xml --> +<!-- $Id: ia64.xml 43841 2007-01-04 01:45:08Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="ia64" +><title +>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + + <note> + <title +>CD Contents</title> + +<para +>There are three basic variations of Debian Install CDs. The <emphasis +>Business Card</emphasis +> CD has a minimal installation that will fit on the small form factor CD media. It requires a network connection in order to install the rest of the base installation and make a usable system. The <emphasis +>Network Install</emphasis +> CD has all of the packages for a base install but requires a network connection to a Debian mirror site in order to install the extra packages one would want for a complete system . The set of Debian CDs can install a complete system from the wide range of packages without needing access to the network. </para> + </note> + +<para +>The IA-64 architecture uses the next generation Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) from Intel. Unlike the traditional x86 BIOS which knows little about the boot device other than the partition table and Master Boot Record (MBR), EFI can read and write files from FAT16 or FAT32 formatted disk partitions. This simplifies the often arcane process of starting a system. The system boot loader and the EFI firmware that supports it have a full filesystem to store the files necessary for booting the machine. This means that the system disk on an IA-64 system has an additional disk partition dedicated to EFI instead of the simple MBR or boot block on more conventional systems. </para +><para +>The Debian Installer CD contains a small EFI partition where the <command +>ELILO</command +> bootloader, its configuration file, the installer's kernel, and initial filesystem (initrd) are located. The running system also contains an EFI partition where the necessary files for booting the system reside. These files are readable from the EFI Shell as described below. </para +><para +>Most of the details of how <command +>ELILO</command +> actually loads and starts a system are transparent to the system installer. However, the installer must set up an EFI partition prior to installing the base system. Otherwise, the installation of <command +>ELILO</command +> will fail, rendering the system un-bootable. The EFI partition is allocated and formatted in the partitioning step of the installation prior to loading any packages on the system disk. The partitioning task also verifies that a suitable EFI partition is present before allowing the installation to proceed. </para +><para +>The EFI Boot Manager is presented as the last step of the firmware initialization. It displays a menu list from which the user can select an option. Depending on the model of system and what other software has been loaded on the system, this menu may be different from one system to another. There should be at least two menu items displayed, <command +>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</command +> and <command +>EFI Shell (Built-in)</command +>. Using the first option is preferred, however, if that option is not available or the CD for some reason does not boot with it, use the second option. </para> + + <warning> + <title +>IMPORTANT</title> +<para +>The EFI Boot Manager will select a default boot action, typically the first menu choice, within a pre-set number of seconds. This is indicated by a countdown at the bottom of the screen. Once the timer expires and the systems starts the default action, you may have to reboot the machine in order to continue the installation. If the default action is the EFI Shell, you can return to the Boot Manager by running <command +>exit</command +> at the shell prompt. </para> + </warning> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="bootable-cd"> + <title +>Option 1: Booting from the Boot Option Maintenance Menu</title> + + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem +><para +>Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after it completes its system initialization. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Select <command +>Boot Maintenance Menu</command +> from the menu with the arrow keys and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. This will display a new menu. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Select <command +>Boot From a File</command +> from the menu with the arrow keys and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. This will display a list of devices probed by the firmware. You should see two menu lines containing either the label <command +>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command +> or <command +>Removable Media Boot</command +>. If you examine the rest of the menu line, you will notice that the device and controller information should be the same. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>You can choose either of the entries that refer to the CD/DVD drive. Select your choice with the arrow keys and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. If you choose <command +>Removable Media Boot</command +> the machine will immediately start the boot load sequence. If you choose <command +>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command +> instead, it will display a directory listing of the bootable portion of the CD, requiring you to proceed to the next (additional) step. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>You will only need this step if you chose <command +>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command +>. The directory listing will also show <command +>[Treat like Removable Media Boot]</command +> on the next to the last line. Select this line with the arrow keys and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. This will start the boot load sequence. </para +></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>These steps start the Debian boot loader which will display a menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-with-efi"> + <title +>Option 2: Booting from the EFI Shell</title> +<para +>If, for some reason, option 1 is not successful, reboot the machine and when the EFI Boot Manager screen appears there should be one option called <command +>EFI Shell [Built-in]</command +>. Boot the Debian Installer CD with the following steps: </para> + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem +><para +>Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after it completes system initialization. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Select <command +>EFI Shell</command +> from the menu with the arrow keys and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. The EFI Shell will scan all of the bootable devices and display them to the console before displaying its command prompt. The recognized bootable partitions on devices will show a device name of <filename +>fs<replaceable +>n</replaceable +>:</filename +>. All other recognized partitions will be named <filename +>blk<replaceable +>n</replaceable +>:</filename +>. If you inserted the CD just before entering the shell, this may take a few extra seconds as it initializes the CD drive. </para> +</listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Examine the output from the shell looking for the CDROM drive. It is most likely the <filename +>fs0:</filename +> device although other devices with bootable partitions will also show up as <filename +>fs<replaceable +>n</replaceable +></filename +>. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Enter <command +>fs<replaceable +>n</replaceable +>:</command +> and press <command +>ENTER</command +> to select that device where <replaceable +>n</replaceable +> is the partition number for the CDROM. The shell will now display the partition number as its prompt. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Enter <command +>elilo</command +> and press <command +>ENTER</command +>. This will start the boot load sequence. </para +></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>As with option 1, these steps start the Debian boot loader which will display a menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. You can also enter the shorter <command +>fs<replaceable +>n</replaceable +>:elilo</command +> command at the shell prompt. Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. </para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="serial-console"> + <title +>Installing using a Serial Console</title> + +<para +>You may choose to perform an install using a monitor and keyboard or using a serial connection. To use a monitor/keyboard setup, select an option containing the string [VGA console]. To install over a serial connection, choose an option containing the string [<replaceable +>BAUD</replaceable +> baud serial console], where <replaceable +>BAUD</replaceable +> is the speed of your serial console. Menu items for the most typical baud rate settings on the ttyS0 device are preconfigured. </para +><para +>In most circumstances, you will want the installer to use the same baud rate as your connection to the EFI console. If you aren't sure what this setting is, you can obtain it using the command <command +>baud</command +> at the EFI shell. </para +><para +>If there is not an option available that is configured for the serial device or baud rate you would like to use, you may override the console setting for one of the existing menu options. For example, to use a 57600 baud console over the ttyS1 device, enter <command +>console=ttyS1,57600n8</command +> into the <classname +>Boot:</classname +> text window. </para> + +<note +><para +>Most IA-64 boxes ship with a default console setting of 9600 baud. This setting is rather slow, and the normal installation process will take a significant time to draw each screen. You should consider either increasing the baud rate used for performing the installation, or performing a Text Mode installation. See the <classname +>Params</classname +> help menu for instructions on starting the installer in Text Mode. </para +></note> + +<warning +><para +>If you select the wrong console type, you will be able to select the kernel and enter parameters but both the display and your input will go dead as soon as the kernel starts, requiring you to reboot before you can begin the installation. </para +></warning> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="kernel-option-menu"> + <title +>Selecting the Boot Kernel and Options</title> + +<para +>The boot loader will display a form with a menu list and a text window with a <classname +>Boot:</classname +> prompt. The arrow keys select an item from the menu and any text typed at the keyboard will appear in the text window. There are also help screens which can be displayed by pressing the appropriate function key. The <classname +>General</classname +> help screen explains the menu choices and the <classname +>Params</classname +> screen explains the common command line options. </para +><para +>Consult the <classname +>General</classname +> help screen for the description of the kernels and install modes most appropriate for your installation. You should also consult <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> below for any additional parameters that you may want to set in the <classname +>Boot:</classname +> text window. The kernel version you choose selects the kernel version that will be used for both the installation process and the installed system. If you encounter kernel problems with the installation, you may also have those same problems with the system you install. The following two steps will select and start the install: </para> + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem +><para +>Select the kernel version and installation mode most appropriate to your needs with the arrow keys. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Enter any boot parameters by typing at the keyboard. The text will be displayed directly in the text window. This is where kernel parameters (such as serial console settings) are specified. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Press <command +>ENTER</command +>. This will load and start the kernel. The kernel will display its usual initialization messages followed by the first screen of the Debian Installer. </para +></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where you will set up the language locale, network, and disk partitions. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + +<para +>Booting an IA-64 system from the network is similar to a CD boot. The only difference is how the installation kernel is loaded. The EFI Boot Manager can load and start programs from a server on the network. Once the installation kernel is loaded and starts, the system install will proceed through the same steps as the CD install with the exception that the packages of the base install will be loaded from the network rather than the CD drive. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + +<para +>Network booting an IA-64 system requires two architecture-specific actions. On the boot server, DHCP and TFTP must be configured to deliver <command +>elilo</command +>. On the client a new boot option must be defined in the EFI boot manager to enable loading over a network. </para> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-server"> + <title +>Configuring the Server</title> +<para +>A suitable TFTP entry for network booting an IA-64 system looks something like this: <informalexample +><screen +> +host mcmuffin { + hardware ethernet 00:30:6e:1e:0e:83; + fixed-address 10.0.0.21; + filename "debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi"; +} +</screen +></informalexample +> Note that the goal is to get <command +>elilo.efi</command +> running on the client. </para +><para +>Extract the <filename +>netboot.tar.gz</filename +> file into the directory used as the root for your tftp server. Typical tftp root directories include <filename +>/var/lib/tftp</filename +> and <filename +>/tftpboot</filename +>. This will create a <filename +>debian-installer</filename +> directory tree containing the boot files for an IA-64 system. </para +><para> + +<informalexample +><screen +># cd /var/lib/tftp +# tar xvfz /home/user/netboot.tar.gz +./ +./debian-installer/ +./debian-installer/ia64/ +[...] +</screen +></informalexample +> The <filename +>netboot.tar.gz</filename +> contains an <filename +>elilo.conf</filename +> file that should work for most configurations. However, should you need to make changes to this file, you can find it in the <filename +>debian-installer/ia64/</filename +> directory. It is possible to have different config files for different clients by naming them using the client's IP address in hex with the suffix <filename +>.conf</filename +> instead of <filename +>elilo.conf</filename +>. See documentation provided in the <classname +>elilo</classname +> package for details. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-client"> + <title +>Configuring the Client</title> +<para +>To configure the client to support TFTP booting, start by booting to EFI and entering the <guimenu +>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</guimenu +>. <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> Add a boot option. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> You should see one or more lines with the text <guimenuitem +>Load File [Acpi()/.../Mac()]</guimenuitem +>. If more than one of these entries exist, choose the one containing the MAC address of the interface from which you'll be booting. Use the arrow keys to highlight your choice, then press enter. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Name the entry <userinput +>Netboot</userinput +> or something similar, save, and exit back to the boot options menu. </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> You should see the new boot option you just created, and selecting it should initiate a DHCP query, leading to a TFTP load of <filename +>elilo.efi</filename +> from the server. </para +><para +>The boot loader will display its prompt after it has downloaded and processed its configuration file. At this point, the installation proceeds with the same steps as a CD install. Select a boot option as in above and when the kernel has completed installing itself from the network, it will start the Debian Installer. </para +><para +>Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where you will set up the language locale, network, and disk partitions. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/ia64.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 45435 2007-02-26 18:29:36Z wouter $ --> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Choosing an Installation Method</title> + +<para +>Some &arch-title; subarchs have the option of booting using either a 2.4.x or 2.2.x linux kernel. When such a choice exists, try the 2.4.x linux kernel. The installer should also require less memory when using a 2.4.x linux kernel as 2.2.x support requires a fixed-sized ramdisk and 2.4.x uses tmpfs. </para +><para +>If you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you need to use the &ramdisksize; kernel parameter. </para +><para +>Make sure <userinput +>root=/dev/ram</userinput +> is one of your kernel parameters. </para +><para +>If you're having trouble, check <ulink url="&url-m68k-cts-faq;" +>cts's &arch-title; debian-installer FAQ</ulink +>. </para> + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-amiga"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-atari"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-bvme6000"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mac"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mvme"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boot-q40"/></para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-amiga" +><title +>Amiga</title> +<para +>The only method of installation available to amiga is the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). <emphasis +>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis +> </para +><para +>Amiga does not currently work with bogl, so if you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the boot parameter <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +>. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-atari" +><title +>Atari</title> +<para +>The installer for atari may be started from either the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>) or from floppies (see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>). <emphasis +>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis +> </para +><para +>Atari does not currently work with bogl, so if you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the boot parameter <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +>. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-bvme6000" +><title +>BVME6000</title> +<para +>The installer for BVME6000 may be started from a cdrom (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-cdrom"/>), floppies (see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>), or the net (see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mac" +><title +>Macintosh</title> +<para +>The only method of installation available to mac is from the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). <emphasis +>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis +> Macs do not have a working 2.4.x kernel. </para +><para +>If your hardware uses a 53c9x-based scsi bus, then you may need to include the kernel parameter <userinput +>mac53c9x=1,0</userinput +>. Hardware with two such scsi buses, such as the Quadra 950, will need <userinput +>mac53c9x=2,0</userinput +> instead. Alternatively, the parameter can be specified as <userinput +>mac53c9x=-1,0</userinput +> which will leave autodetection on, but which will disable SCSI disconnects. Note that specifying this parameter is only necessary if you have more than one hard disk; otherwise, the system will run faster if you do not specify it. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mvme" +><title +>MVME147 and MVME16x</title> +<para +>The installer for MVME147 and MVME16x may be started from either floppies (see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>) or the net (see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). <emphasis +>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis +> </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-q40" +><title +>Q40/Q60</title> +<para +>The only method of installation available to Q40/Q60 is from the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). <emphasis +>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis +> </para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-hd" +><title +>Booting from a Hard Disk</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-hd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-hd.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>Booting from an existing operating system is often a convenient option; for some systems it is the only supported method of installation. </para +><para +>To boot the installer from hard disk, you will have already completed downloading and placing the needed files in <xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-hd.xml --> + +<para +>At least six different ramdisks may be used to boot from the hard drive, three different types each with and without support for a 2.2.x linux kernel (see <ulink url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST" +>MANIFEST</ulink +> for details). </para +><para +>The three different types of ramdisks are <filename +>cdrom</filename +>, <filename +>hd-media</filename +>, and <filename +>nativehd</filename +>. These ramdisks differ only in their source for installation packages. The <filename +>cdrom</filename +> ramdisk uses a cdrom to get debian-installer packages. The <filename +>hd-media</filename +> ramdisk uses an iso image file of a cdrom currently residing on a hard disk. Finally, the <filename +>nativehd</filename +> ramdisk uses the net to install packages. </para> + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-amiga"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-atari"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-mac"/></para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-q40"/></para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-amiga" +><title +>Booting from AmigaOS</title> +<para +>In the <command +>Workbench</command +>, start the Linux installation process by double-clicking on the <guiicon +>StartInstall</guiicon +> icon in the <filename +>debian</filename +> directory. </para +><para +>You may have to press the &enterkey; key twice after the Amiga installer program has output some debugging information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you can continue down at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. </para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-atari" +><title +>Booting from Atari TOS</title> +<para +>At the GEM desktop, start the Linux installation process by double-clicking on the <guiicon +>bootstra.prg</guiicon +> icon in the <filename +>debian</filename +> directory and clicking <guibutton +>Ok</guibutton +> at the program options dialog box. </para +><para +>You may have to press the &enterkey; key after the Atari bootstrap program has output some debugging information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you can continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. </para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-mac" +><title +>Booting from MacOS</title> +<para +>You must retain the original Mac system and boot from it. It is <emphasis +>essential</emphasis +> that, when booting MacOS in preparation for booting the Penguin linux loader, you hold the <keycap +>shift</keycap +> key down to prevent extensions from loading. If you don't use MacOS except for loading linux, you can accomplish the same thing by removing all extensions and control panels from the Mac's System Folder. Otherwise extensions may be left running and cause random problems with the running linux kernel. </para +><para +>Macs require the <command +>Penguin</command +> bootloader, which can be downloaded from <ulink url="&url-m68k-mac;" +>the Linux/mac68k sourceforge.net project</ulink +>. If you do not have the tools to handle a <command +>Stuffit</command +> archive, you can put it on a MacOS-formatted floppy using a second GNU/Linux machine of any architecture and the <command +>hmount</command +>, <command +>hcopy</command +>, and <command +>humount</command +> tools from the <classname +>hfsutils</classname +> suite. </para +><para +>At the MacOS desktop, start the Linux installation process by double-clicking on the <guiicon +>Penguin Prefs</guiicon +> icon in the <filename +>Penguin</filename +> directory. The <command +>Penguin</command +> booter will start up. Go to the <guimenuitem +>Settings</guimenuitem +> item in the <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> menu, click the <guilabel +>Kernel</guilabel +> tab. Select the kernel (<filename +>vmlinuz</filename +>) and ramdisk (<filename +>initrd.gz</filename +>) images in the <filename +>install</filename +> directory by clicking on the corresponding buttons in the upper right corner, and navigating the file select dialogs to locate the files. </para +><para +>To set the boot parameters in Penguin, choose <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> -> <guimenuitem +>Settings...</guimenuitem +>, then switch to the <guilabel +>Options</guilabel +> tab. Boot parameters may be typed in to the text entry area. If you will always want to use these settings, select <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> -> <guimenuitem +>Save Settings as Default</guimenuitem +>. </para +><para +>Close the <guilabel +>Settings</guilabel +> dialog, save the settings and start the bootstrap using the <guimenuitem +>Boot Now</guimenuitem +> item in the <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> menu. </para +><para +>The <command +>Penguin</command +> booter will output some debugging information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you can continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. </para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-q40" +><title +>Booting from Q40/Q60</title> + +<para +>FIXME </para +><para +>The installation program should start automatically, so you can continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. </para> + + </sect3> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-cdrom" +><title +>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> +<para +>Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitecture that supports CD-ROM booting is the BVME6000. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + +<para +>After booting the VMEbus systems you will be presented with the LILO <prompt +>Boot:</prompt +> prompt. At that prompt enter one of the following to boot Linux and begin installation proper of the Debian software using vt102 terminal emulation: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>type <screen +>i6000 &enterkey;</screen +> to install a BVME4000/6000 </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>type <screen +>i162 &enterkey;</screen +> to install an MVME162 </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>type <screen +>i167 &enterkey;</screen +> to install an MVME166/167 </para +></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>You may additionally append the string <screen +>TERM=vt100</screen +> to use vt100 terminal emulation, e.g., <screen +>i6000 TERM=vt100 &enterkey;</screen +>. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-from-floppies"> + <title +>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para +>For most &arch-title; architectures, booting from a local filesystem is the recommended method. </para +><para +>Booting from the boot floppy is supported only for Atari and VME (with a SCSI floppy drive on VME) at this time. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/m68k.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/mips.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mips.xml 35613 2006-03-19 04:18:28Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + <sect3> + <title +>SGI TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>After entering the command monitor use <informalexample +><screen +> +bootp(): +</screen +></informalexample +> on SGI machines to boot linux and to begin installation of the Debian Software. In order to make this work you may have to unset the <envar +>netaddr</envar +> environment variable. Type <informalexample +><screen +> +unsetenv netaddr +</screen +></informalexample +> in the command monitor to do this. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>On the Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards, you have to load the SiByl boot loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can enter the following command on the CFE prompt: <informalexample +><screen +> +ifconfig eth0 -auto +</screen +></informalexample +> Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following command: <informalexample +><screen +> +boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl +</screen +></informalexample +> You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this command, the installer will be loaded automatically. </para> +</sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="mips" +><title +>Boot Parameters</title> + + <sect3> + <title +>SGI TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>On SGI machines you can append boot parameters to the <command +>bootp():</command +> command in the command monitor. </para +><para +>Following the <command +>bootp():</command +> command you can give the path and name of the file to boot if you did not give an explicit name via your bootp/dhcp server. Example: <informalexample +><screen +> +bootp():/boot/tftpboot.img +</screen +></informalexample +> Further kernel parameters can be passed via <command +>append</command +>: <informalexample +><screen +>bootp(): append="root=/dev/sda1" +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, you have to edit the <filename +>/boot/sibyl.conf</filename +> file on the TFTP server and add your parameters to the <replaceable +>extra_args</replaceable +> variable. </para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/mips.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/mipsel.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mipsel.xml 35612 2006-03-19 03:34:30Z tbm $ --> + + <sect2 arch="mipsel" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + <sect3> + <title +>Cobalt TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>Strictly speaking, Cobalt does not use TFTP but NFS to boot. You need to install an NFS server and put the installer files in <filename +>/nfsroot</filename +>. When you boot your Cobalt, you have to press the left and the right cursor buttons at the same time and the machine will boot via the network from NFS. It will then display several options on the display. There are the following two installation methods: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Via SSH (default): In this case, the installer will configure the network via DHCP and start an SSH server. It will then display a random password and other login information (such as the IP address) on the Cobalt LCD. When you connect to the machine with an SSH client you can start with the installation. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Via serial console: Using a null modem cable, you can connect to the serial port of your Cobalt machine (using 115200 bps) and perform the installation this way. This option is not available on Qube 2700 (Qube1) machines since they have no serial port. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> +<!-- Note to translators: this is the same section as in mips.xml --> + <title +>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>On the Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards, you have to load the SiByl boot loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can enter the following command on the CFE prompt: <informalexample +><screen +> +ifconfig eth0 -auto +</screen +></informalexample +> Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following command: <informalexample +><screen +> +boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl +</screen +></informalexample +> You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this command, the installer will be loaded automatically. </para> +</sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="mipsel" +><title +>Boot Parameters</title> + + <sect3> + <title +>Cobalt TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>You cannot pass any boot parameters directly. Instead, you have to edit the <filename +>/nfsroot/default.colo</filename +> file on the NFS server and add your parameters to the <replaceable +>args</replaceable +> variable. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> +<!-- Note to translators: this is the same section as in mips.xml --> + <title +>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, you have to edit the <filename +>/boot/sibyl.conf</filename +> file on the TFTP server and add your parameters to the <replaceable +>extra_args</replaceable +> variable. </para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/mipsel.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/s390.xml --> +<!-- $Id: s390.xml 43745 2007-01-01 13:52:38Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="s390" +><title +>s390 Limitations</title> +<para +>In order to run the installation system a working network setup and ssh session is needed on S/390. </para +><para +>The booting process starts with a network setup that prompts you for several network parameters. If the setup is successful, you will login to the system by starting an ssh session which will launch the standard installation system. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="s390" +><title +>s390 Boot Parameters</title> +<para +>On S/390 you can append boot parameters in the parm file. This file can either be in ASCII or EBCDIC format. A sample parm file <filename +>parmfile.debian</filename +> is provided with the installation images. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/s390.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 56248 2008-10-03 17:07:28Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-cd" +><title +>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + +<para +>Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitectures that support CD-ROM booting are PReP (though not all systems) and New World PowerMacs. On PowerMacs, hold the <keycap +>c</keycap +> key, or else the combination of <keycap +>Command</keycap +>, <keycap +>Option</keycap +>, <keycap +>Shift</keycap +>, and <keycap +>Delete</keycap +> keys together while booting to boot from the CD-ROM. </para +><para +>OldWorld PowerMacs will not boot a Debian CD, because OldWorld computers relied on a Mac OS ROM CD boot driver to be present on the CD, and a free-software version of this driver is not available. All OldWorld systems have floppy drives, so use the floppy drive to launch the installer, and then point the installer to the CD for the needed files. </para +><para +>If your system doesn't boot directly from CD-ROM, you can still use the CD-ROM to install the system. On NewWorlds, you can also use an OpenFirmware command to boot from the CD-ROM manually. Follow the instructions in <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/> for booting from the hard disk, except use the path to <command +>yaboot</command +> on the CD at the OF prompt, such as <informalexample +><screen +>0 > boot cd:,\install\yaboot +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="install-drive"> + <title +>Booting from Hard Disk</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-hd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-hd.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>Booting from an existing operating system is often a convenient option; for some systems it is the only supported method of installation. </para +><para +>To boot the installer from hard disk, you will have already completed downloading and placing the needed files in <xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-hd.xml --> + +<!-- + <sect3 +><title +>Booting CHRP from OpenFirmware</title> + +<para> + + <emphasis +>Not yet written.</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect3> +--> + + <sect3 +><title +>Booting OldWorld PowerMacs from MacOS</title> +<para +>If you set up BootX in <xref linkend="files-oldworld"/>, you can use it to boot into the installation system. Double click the <guiicon +>BootX</guiicon +> application icon. Click on the <guibutton +>Options</guibutton +> button and select <guilabel +>Use Specified RAM Disk</guilabel +>. This will give you the chance to select the <filename +>ramdisk.image.gz</filename +> file. You may need to select the <guilabel +>No Video Driver</guilabel +> checkbox, depending on your hardware. Then click the <guibutton +>Linux</guibutton +> button to shut down MacOS and launch the installer. </para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="boot-newworld"> + <title +>Booting NewWorld Macs from OpenFirmware</title> +<para +>You will have already placed the <filename +>vmlinux</filename +>, <filename +>initrd.gz</filename +>, <filename +>yaboot</filename +>, and <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> files at the root level of your HFS partition in <xref linkend="files-newworld"/>. You will now have to boot into OpenFirmware (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>). At the prompt, type <informalexample +><screen +> +0 > boot hd:<replaceable>x</replaceable>,yaboot +</screen +></informalexample +> replacing <replaceable +>x</replaceable +> with the partition number of the HFS partition where the kernel and yaboot files were placed, followed by a &enterkey;. On some machines, you may need to use <userinput +>ide0:</userinput +> instead of <userinput +>hd:</userinput +>. In a few more seconds you will see a yaboot prompt <informalexample +><screen +> +boot: +</screen +></informalexample +> At yaboot's <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt, type either <userinput +>install</userinput +> or <userinput +>install video=ofonly</userinput +> followed by a &enterkey;. The <userinput +>video=ofonly</userinput +> argument is for maximum compatibility; you can try it if <userinput +>install</userinput +> doesn't work. The Debian installation program should start. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" condition="bootable-usb" id="usb-boot"> + <title +>Booting from USB memory stick</title> +<para +>Currently, NewWorld PowerMac systems are known to support USB booting. </para> + +<para +>Make sure you have prepared everything from <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. To boot a Macintosh system from a USB stick, you will need to use the Open Firmware prompt, since Open Firmware does not search USB storage devices by default. See <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>. </para +><para +>You will need to work out where the USB storage device appears in the device tree, since at the moment <command +>ofpath</command +> cannot work that out automatically. Type <userinput +>dev / ls</userinput +> and <userinput +>devalias</userinput +> at the Open Firmware prompt to get a list of all known devices and device aliases. On the author's system with various types of USB stick, paths such as <filename +>usb0/disk</filename +>, <filename +>usb0/hub/disk</filename +>, <filename +>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/disk@1</filename +>, and <filename +>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/hub@1/disk@1</filename +> work. </para +><para +>Having worked out the device path, use a command like this to boot the installer: <informalexample +><screen +> +boot <replaceable>usb0/disk</replaceable>:<replaceable>2</replaceable>,\\:tbxi +</screen +></informalexample +> The <replaceable +>2</replaceable +> matches the Apple_HFS or Apple_Bootstrap partition onto which you copied the boot image earlier, and the <userinput +>,\\:tbxi</userinput +> part instructs Open Firmware to boot from the file with an HFS file type of "tbxi" (i.e. <command +>yaboot</command +>) in the directory previously blessed with <command +>hattrib -b</command +>. </para +><para +>The system should now boot up, and you should be presented with the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. </para +><warning +><para +>This boot method is new, and may be difficult to get to work on some NewWorld systems. If you have problems, please file an installation report, as explained in <xref linkend="submit-bug"/>. </para +></warning> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + +<para +>Currently, PReP and New World PowerMac systems support netbooting. </para +><para +>On machines with Open Firmware, such as NewWorld Power Macs, enter the boot monitor (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>) and use the command <informalexample +><screen +> +0 > boot enet:0 +</screen +></informalexample +> If this doesn't work, you might have to add the filename like this: <informalexample +><screen +> +0 > boot enet:0,yaboot +</screen +></informalexample +> PReP and CHRP boxes may have different ways of addressing the network. On a PReP machine, you should try <informalexample +><screen +> +boot net:<replaceable>server_ipaddr</replaceable>,<replaceable>file</replaceable>,<replaceable>client_ipaddr</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> On some PReP systems (e.g. Motorola PowerStack machines) the command <userinput +>help boot</userinput +> may give a description of syntax and available options. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title +>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para +>Booting from floppies is supported for &arch-title;, although it is generally only applicable for OldWorld systems. NewWorld systems are not equipped with floppy drives, and attached USB floppy drives are not supported for booting. </para +><para +>You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. </para +><para +>To boot from the <filename +>boot-floppy-hfs.img</filename +> floppy, place it in floppy drive after shutting the system down, and before pressing the power-on button. </para +><note +><para +>For those not familiar with Macintosh floppy operations: a floppy placed in the machine prior to boot will be the first priority for the system to boot from. A floppy without a valid boot system will be ejected, and the machine will then check for bootable hard disk partitions. </para +></note +><para +>After booting, the <filename +>root.bin</filename +> floppy is requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;. The installer program is automatically launched after the root system has been loaded into memory. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>PowerPC Boot Parameters</title> +<para +>Many older Apple monitors used a 640x480 67Hz mode. If your video appears skewed on an older Apple monitor, try appending the boot argument <userinput +>video=atyfb:vmode:6</userinput +> , which will select that mode for most Mach64 and Rage video hardware. For Rage 128 hardware, this changes to <userinput +>video=aty128fb:vmode:6</userinput +> . </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/powerpc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/sparc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sparc.xml 48719 2007-07-26 00:36:32Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-tftp" +><title +>Booting with TFTP</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-net.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<para +>Booting from the network requires that you have a network connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server instead of a BOOTP server. </para +><para +>The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-net.xml --> + +<para +>On machines with OpenBoot, simply enter the boot monitor on the machine which is being installed (see <xref linkend="invoking-openboot"/>). Use the command <userinput +>boot net</userinput +> to boot from a TFTP and RARP server, or try <userinput +>boot net:bootp</userinput +> or <userinput +>boot net:dhcp</userinput +> to boot from a TFTP and BOOTP or DHCP server. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" +><title +>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: intro-cd.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off the CD, great! Simply <phrase arch="x86" +> configure your system for booting off a CD as described in <xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, </phrase +> insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. </para +><para +>Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation methods which may work for you. </para +><para +>Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. </para +><para +>If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/intro-cd.xml --> + +<para +>Most OpenBoot versions support the <userinput +>boot cdrom</userinput +> command which is simply an alias to boot from the SCSI device on ID 6 (or the secondary master for IDE based systems). </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" +><title +>IDPROM Messages</title> +<para +>If you cannot boot because you get messages about a problem with <quote +>IDPROM</quote +>, then it's possible that your NVRAM battery, which holds configuration information for you firmware, has run out. See the <ulink url="&url-sun-nvram-faq;" +>Sun NVRAM FAQ</ulink +> for more information. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/sparc.xml --> + + </sect1> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/parameters.xml --> +<!-- $Id: parameters.xml 57693 2009-02-27 05:55:08Z cjwatson $ --> + + <sect1 id="boot-parms" +><title +>Boot Parameters</title> +<para +>Boot parameters are Linux kernel parameters which are generally used to make sure that peripherals are dealt with properly. For the most part, the kernel can auto-detect information about your peripherals. However, in some cases you'll have to help the kernel a bit. </para +><para +>If this is the first time you're booting the system, try the default boot parameters (i.e., don't try setting parameters) and see if it works correctly. It probably will. If not, you can reboot later and look for any special parameters that inform the system about your hardware. </para +><para +>Information on many boot parameters can be found in the <ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/BootPrompt-HOWTO.html" +> Linux BootPrompt HOWTO</ulink +>, including tips for obscure hardware. This section contains only a sketch of the most salient parameters. Some common gotchas are included below in <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. </para +><para +>When the kernel boots, a message <informalexample +><screen +> +Memory:<replaceable>avail</replaceable>k/<replaceable>total</replaceable>k available +</screen +></informalexample +> should be emitted early in the process. <replaceable +>total</replaceable +> should match the total amount of RAM, in kilobytes. If this doesn't match the actual amount of RAM you have installed, you need to use the <userinput +>mem=<replaceable +>ram</replaceable +></userinput +> parameter, where <replaceable +>ram</replaceable +> is set to the amount of memory, suffixed with <quote +>k</quote +> for kilobytes, or <quote +>m</quote +> for megabytes. For example, both <userinput +>mem=65536k</userinput +> and <userinput +>mem=64m</userinput +> mean 64MB of RAM. </para +><para condition="supports-serial-console" +>If you are booting with a serial console, generally the kernel will autodetect this. If you have a videocard (framebuffer) and a keyboard also attached to the computer which you wish to boot via serial console, you may have to pass the <userinput +>console=<replaceable +>device</replaceable +></userinput +> argument to the kernel, where <replaceable +>device</replaceable +> is your serial device, which is usually something like <filename +>ttyS0</filename +>. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>For &arch-title; the serial devices are <filename +>ttya</filename +> or <filename +>ttyb</filename +>. Alternatively, set the <envar +>input-device</envar +> and <envar +>output-device</envar +> OpenPROM variables to <filename +>ttya</filename +>. </para> + + + <sect2 id="installer-args" +><title +>Debian Installer Parameters</title> +<para +>The installation system recognizes a few additional boot parameters<footnote +> <para +> With current kernels (2.6.9 or newer) you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. If these numbers are exceeded, the kernel will panic. </para +> </footnote +> which may be useful. </para +><para +>A number of parameters have a <quote +>short form</quote +> that helps avoid the limitations of the kernel command line options and makes entering the parameters easier. If a parameter has a short form, it will be listed in brackets behind the (normal) long form. Examples in this manual will normally use the short form too. </para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>debconf/priority (priority)</term> +<listitem +><para +>This parameter sets the lowest priority of messages to be displayed. </para +><para +>The default installation uses <userinput +>priority=high</userinput +>. This means that both high and critical priority messages are shown, but medium and low priority messages are skipped. If problems are encountered, the installer adjusts the priority as needed. </para +><para +>If you add <userinput +>priority=medium</userinput +> as boot parameter, you will be shown the installation menu and gain more control over the installation. When <userinput +>priority=low</userinput +> is used, all messages are shown (this is equivalent to the <emphasis +>expert</emphasis +> boot method). With <userinput +>priority=critical</userinput +>, the installation system will display only critical messages and try to do the right thing without fuss. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND</term> +<listitem +><para +>This boot parameter controls the type of user interface used for the installer. The current possible parameter settings are: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +> <para +><userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=noninteractive</userinput +></para +> </listitem +><listitem +> <para +><userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput +></para +> </listitem +><listitem +> <para +><userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput +></para +> </listitem +><listitem +> <para +><userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=gtk</userinput +></para +> </listitem +> </itemizedlist +> The default frontend is <userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput +>. <userinput +>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput +> may be preferable for serial console installs. Generally, only the <userinput +>newt</userinput +> frontend is available on default install media. On architectures that support it, the graphical installer uses the <userinput +>gtk</userinput +> frontend. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term +>BOOT_DEBUG</term> +<listitem +><para +>Setting this boot parameter to 2 will cause the installer's boot process to be verbosely logged. Setting it to 3 makes debug shells available at strategic points in the boot process. (Exit the shells to continue the boot process.) <variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +><userinput +>BOOT_DEBUG=0</userinput +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the default.</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><userinput +>BOOT_DEBUG=1</userinput +></term> +<listitem +><para +>More verbose than usual.</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><userinput +>BOOT_DEBUG=2</userinput +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Lots of debugging information.</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><userinput +>BOOT_DEBUG=3</userinput +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Shells are run at various points in the boot process to allow detailed debugging. Exit the shell to continue the boot. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term +>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV</term> +<listitem +><para +>The value of the parameter is the path to the device to load the Debian installer from. For example, <userinput +>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV=/dev/floppy/0</userinput +> </para +><para +>The boot floppy, which normally scans all floppies it can to find the root floppy, can be overridden by this parameter to only look at the one device. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>lowmem</term> +<listitem +><para +>Can be used to force the installer to a lowmem level higher than the one the installer sets by default based on available memory. Possible values are 1 and 2. See also <xref linkend="lowmem"/>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="squeeze"> +<term +>noshell</term> +<listitem +><para +>Prevents the installer from offering interactive shells on tty2 and tty3. Useful for unattended installations where physical security is limited. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>debian-installer/framebuffer (fb)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Some architectures use the kernel framebuffer to offer installation in a number of languages. If framebuffer causes a problem on your system you can disable the feature by the parameter <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +>. Problem symptoms are error messages about bterm or bogl, a blank screen, or a freeze within a few minutes after starting the install. </para +><para arch="x86" +>The <userinput +>video=vga16:off</userinput +> argument may also be used to disable the kernel's use of the framebuffer. Such problems have been reported on a Dell Inspiron with Mobile Radeon card. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>Such problems have been reported on the Amiga 1200 and SE/30. </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Such problems have been reported on hppa. </para +><note arch="sparc" +><para +>Because of display problems on some systems, framebuffer support is <emphasis +>disabled by default</emphasis +> for &arch-title;. This can result in ugly display on systems that do properly support the framebuffer, like those with ATI graphical cards. If you see display problems in the installer, you can try booting with parameter <userinput +>debian-installer/framebuffer=true</userinput +> or <userinput +>fb=true</userinput +> for short. </para +></note +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry arch="not-s390"> +<term +>debian-installer/theme (theme)</term> +<listitem +><para +>A theme determines how the user interface of the installer looks (colors, icons, etc.). What themes are available differs per frontend. Currently both the newt and gtk frontends only have a <quote +>dark</quote +> theme that was designed for visually impaired users. Set the theme by booting with <userinput +>theme=<replaceable +>dark</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>netcfg/disable_dhcp</term> +<listitem +><para +>By default, the &d-i; automatically probes for network configuration via DHCP. If the probe succeeds, you won't have a chance to review and change the obtained settings. You can get to the manual network setup only in case the DHCP probe fails. </para +><para +>If you have a DHCP server on your local network, but want to avoid it because e.g. it gives wrong answers, you can use the parameter <userinput +>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput +> to prevent configuring the network with DHCP and to enter the information manually. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>hw-detect/start_pcmcia</term> +<listitem +><para +>Set to <userinput +>false</userinput +> to prevent starting PCMCIA services, if that causes problems. Some laptops are well known for this misbehavior. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>disk-detect/dmraid/enable (dmraid)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to enable support for Serial ATA RAID (also called ATA RAID, BIOS RAID or fake RAID) disks in the installer. Note that this support is currently experimental. Additional information can be found on the <ulink url="&url-d-i-wiki;" +>Debian Installer Wiki</ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>preseed/url (url)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Specify the url to a preconfiguration file to download and use for automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>preseed/file (file)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Specify the path to a preconfiguration file to load for automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>preseed/interactive</term> +<listitem +><para +>Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to display questions even if they have been preseeded. Can be useful for testing or debugging a preconfiguration file. Note that this will have no effect on parameters that are passed as boot parameters, but for those a special syntax can be used. See <xref linkend="preseed-seenflag"/> for details. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>auto-install/enable (auto)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Delay questions that are normally asked before preseeding is possible until after the network is configured. See <xref linkend="preseed-auto"/> for details about using this to automate installs. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>finish-install/keep-consoles</term> +<listitem +><para +>During installations from serial or management console, the regular virtual consoles (VT1 to VT6) are normally disabled in <filename +>/etc/inittab</filename +>. Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to prevent this. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>cdrom-detect/eject</term> +<listitem +><para +>By default, before rebooting, &d-i; automatically ejects the optical media used during the installation. This can be unnecessary if the system does not automatically boot off the CD. In some cases it may even be undesirable, for example if the optical drive cannot reinsert the media itself and the user is not there to do it manually. Many slot loading, slim-line, and caddy style drives cannot reload media automatically. </para +><para +>Set to <userinput +>false</userinput +> to disable automatic ejection, and be aware that you may need to ensure that the system does not automatically boot from the optical drive after the initial installation. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>debian-installer/allow_unauthenticated</term> +<listitem +><para +>By default the installer requires that repositories be authenticated using a known gpg key. Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to disable that authentication. <emphasis role="bold" +>Warning: insecure, not recommended.</emphasis +> </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry arch="alpha;m68k;mips;mipsel"> +<term +>ramdisk_size</term> +<listitem +><para +>This parameter should already be set to a correct value where needed; set it only it you see errors during the boot that indicate the ramdisk could not be loaded completely. The value is in kB. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="gtk"> +<term +>mouse/protocol</term> +<listitem +><para +>For the gtk frontend (graphical installer), users can set the mouse protocol to be used by setting this parameter. Supported values are<footnote +> <para +> See the man page for <citerefentry +><refentrytitle +>directfbrc</refentrytitle +> <manvolnum +>5</manvolnum +></citerefentry +> for additional information. </para +> </footnote +>: <userinput +>PS/2</userinput +>, <userinput +>IMPS/2</userinput +>, <userinput +>MS</userinput +>, <userinput +>MS3</userinput +>, <userinput +>MouseMan</userinput +> and <userinput +>MouseSystems</userinput +>. In most cases the default protocol should work correctly. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="gtk"> +<term +>mouse/device</term> +<listitem +><para +>For the gtk frontend (graphical installer), users can specify the mouse device to be used by setting this parameter. This is mostly useful if the mouse is connected to a serial port (serial mouse). Example: <userinput +>mouse/device=<replaceable +>/dev/ttyS1</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="gtk"> +<term +>mouse/left</term> +<listitem +><para +>For the gtk frontend (graphical installer), users can switch the mouse to left-handed operation by setting this parameter to <userinput +>true</userinput +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="gtk"> +<term +>directfb/hw-accel</term> +<listitem +><para +>For the gtk frontend (graphical installer), hardware acceleration in directfb is disabled by default. Set this parameter to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to enable it. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>rescue/enable</term> +<listitem +><para +>Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> to enter rescue mode rather than performing a normal installation. See <xref linkend="rescue"/>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + <sect3 id="preseed-args"> + <title +>Using boot parameters to answer questions</title> +<para +>With some exceptions, a value can be set at the boot prompt for any question asked during the installation, though this is only really useful in specific cases. General instructions how to do this can be found in <xref linkend="preseed-bootparms"/>. Some specific examples are listed below. </para> + +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>debian-installer/locale (locale)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Can be used to set both the language and country for the installation. This will only work if the locale is supported in Debian. For example, use <userinput +>locale=de_CH</userinput +> to select German as language and Switzerland as country. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>anna/choose_modules (modules)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Can be used to automatically load installer components that are not loaded by default. Examples of optional components that may be useful are <classname +>openssh-client-udeb</classname +> (so you can use <command +>scp</command +> during the installation)<phrase arch="not-s390" +> and <classname +>ppp-udeb</classname +> (see <xref linkend="pppoe"/>)</phrase +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>netcfg/disable_dhcp</term> +<listitem +><para +>Set to <userinput +>true</userinput +> if you want to disable DHCP and instead force static network configuration. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>mirror/protocol (protocol)</term> +<listitem +><para +>By default the installer will use the http protocol to download files from Debian mirrors and changing that to ftp is not possible during installations at normal priority. By setting this parameter to <userinput +>ftp</userinput +>, you can force the installer to use that protocol instead. Note that you cannot select an ftp mirror from a list, you have to enter the hostname manually. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>tasksel:tasksel/first (tasks)</term> +<listitem +><para +>Can be used to select tasks that are not available from the interactive task list, such as the <literal +>kde-desktop</literal +> task. See <xref linkend="pkgsel"/> for additional information. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="module-parms"> + <title +>Passing parameters to kernel modules</title> +<para +>If drivers are compiled into the kernel, you can pass parameters to them as described in the kernel documentation. However, if drivers are compiled as modules and because kernel modules are loaded a bit differently during an installation than when booting an installed system, it is not possible to pass parameters to modules as you would normally do. Instead, you need to use a special syntax recognized by the installer which will then make sure that the parameters are saved in the proper configuration files and will thus be used when the modules are actually loaded. The parameters will also be propagated automatically to the configuration for the installed system. </para +><para +>Note that it is now quite rare that parameters need to be passed to modules. In most cases the kernel will be able to probe the hardware present in a system and set good defaults that way. However, in some situations it may still be needed to set parameters manually. </para +><para +>The syntax to use to set parameters for modules is: <informalexample +><screen +> +<replaceable>module_name</replaceable>.<replaceable>parameter_name</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> If you need to pass multiple parameters to the same or different modules, just repeat this. For example, to set an old 3Com network interface card to use the BNC (coax) connector and IRQ 10, you would pass: <informalexample +><screen +>3c509.xcvr=3 3c509.irq=10 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="module-blacklist"> + <title +>Blacklisting kernel modules</title> +<para +>Sometimes it may be necessary to blacklist a module to prevent it from being loaded automatically by the kernel and udev. One reason could be that a particular module causes problems with your hardware. The kernel also sometimes lists two different drivers for the same device. This can cause the device to not work correctly if the drivers conflict or if the wrong driver is loaded first. </para +><para +>You can blacklist a module using the following syntax: <userinput +><replaceable +>module_name</replaceable +>.blacklist=yes</userinput +>. This will cause the module to be blacklisted in <filename +>/etc/modprobe.d/blacklist.local</filename +> both during the installation and for the installed system. </para +><para +>Note that a module may still be loaded by the installation system itself. You can prevent that from happening by running the installation in expert mode and unselecting the module from the list of modules displayed during the hardware detection phases. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/parameters.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file boot-installer/trouble.xml --> +<!-- $Id: trouble.xml 56669 2008-11-17 22:21:26Z jfs $ --> + + <sect1 id="boot-troubleshooting"> + <title +>Troubleshooting the Installation Process</title> + + + <sect2 arch="not-s390" id="unreliable-cd"> + <title +>CD-ROM Reliability</title> +<para +>Sometimes, especially with older CD-ROM drives, the installer may fail to boot from a CD-ROM. The installer may also — even after booting successfully from CD-ROM — fail to recognize the CD-ROM or return errors while reading from it during the installation. </para +><para +>There are many different possible causes for these problems. We can only list some common issues and provide general suggestions on how to deal with them. The rest is up to you. </para +><para +>There are two very simple things that you should try first. <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>If the CD-ROM does not boot, check that it was inserted correctly and that it is not dirty. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>If the installer fails to recognize a CD-ROM, try just running the option <menuchoice +> <guimenuitem +>Detect and mount CD-ROM</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +> a second time. Some DMA related issues with older CD-ROM drives are known to be resolved in this way. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>If this does not work, then try the suggestions in the subsections below. Most, but not all, suggestions discussed there are valid for both CD-ROM and DVD, but we'll use the term CD-ROM for simplicity. </para +><para +>If you cannot get the installation working from CD-ROM, try one of the other installation methods that are available. </para> + + <sect3> + <title +>Common issues</title> + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>Some older CD-ROM drives do not support reading from discs that were burned at high speeds using a modern CD writer. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>If your system boots correctly from the CD-ROM, it does not necessarily mean that Linux also supports the CD-ROM (or, more correctly, the controller that your CD-ROM drive is connected to). </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Some older CD-ROM drives do not work correctly if <quote +>direct memory access</quote +> (DMA) is enabled. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>How to investigate and maybe solve issues</title> +<para +>If the CD-ROM fails to boot, try the suggestions listed below. <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>Check that your BIOS actually supports booting from CD-ROM (older systems possibly don't) and that your CD-ROM drive supports the media you are using. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>If you downloaded an iso image, check that the md5sum of that image matches the one listed for the image in the <filename +>MD5SUMS</filename +> file that should be present in the same location as where you downloaded the image from. <informalexample +><screen +> +$ md5sum <replaceable>debian-testing-i386-netinst.iso</replaceable> +a20391b12f7ff22ef705cee4059c6b92 <replaceable>debian-testing-i386-netinst.iso</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Next, check that the md5sum of the burned CD-ROM matches as well. The following command should work. It uses the size of the image to read the correct number of bytes from the CD-ROM. <informalexample +><screen +>$ dd if=/dev/cdrom | \ +> head -c `stat --format=%s <replaceable>debian-testing-i386-netinst.iso</replaceable>` | \ +> md5sum +a20391b12f7ff22ef705cee4059c6b92 - +262668+0 records in +262668+0 records out +134486016 bytes (134 MB) copied, 97.474 seconds, 1.4 MB/s +</screen +></informalexample> + + </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>If, after the installer has been booted successfully, the CD-ROM is not detected, sometimes simply trying again may solve the problem. If you have more than one CD-ROM drive, try changing the CD-ROM to the other drive. If that does not work or if the CD-ROM is recognized but there are errors when reading from it, try the suggestions listed below. Some basic knowledge of Linux is required for this. To execute any of the commands, you should first switch to the second virtual console (VT2) and activate the shell there. <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>Switch to VT4 or view the contents of <filename +>/var/log/syslog</filename +> (use <command +>nano</command +> as editor) to check for any specific error messages. After that, also check the output of <command +>dmesg</command +>. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Check in the output of <command +>dmesg</command +> if your CD-ROM drive was recognized. You should see something like (the lines do not necessarily have to be consecutive): <informalexample +><screen +> +Probing IDE interface ide1... +hdc: TOSHIBA DVD-ROM SD-R6112, ATAPI CD/DVD-ROM drive +ide1 at 0x170-0x177,0x376 on irq 15 +hdc: ATAPI 24X DVD-ROM DVD-R CD-R/RW drive, 2048kB Cache, UDMA(33) +Uniform CD-ROM driver Revision: 3.20 +</screen +></informalexample +> If you don't see something like that, chances are the controller your CD-ROM is connected to was not recognized or may be not supported at all. If you know what driver is needed for the controller, you can try loading it manually using <command +>modprobe</command +>. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Check that there is a device node for your CD-ROM drive under <filename +>/dev/</filename +>. In the example above, this would be <filename +>/dev/hdc</filename +>. There should also be a <filename +>/dev/cdrom</filename +>. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Use the <command +>mount</command +> command to check if the CD-ROM is already mounted; if not, try mounting it manually: <informalexample +><screen +> +$ mount /dev/<replaceable>hdc</replaceable> /cdrom +</screen +></informalexample +> Check if there are any error messages after that command. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Check if DMA is currently enabled: <informalexample +><screen +> +$ cd /proc/<replaceable>ide</replaceable>/<replaceable>hdc</replaceable> +$ grep using_dma settings +using_dma 1 0 1 rw +</screen +></informalexample +> A <quote +>1</quote +> in the first column after <literal +>using_dma</literal +> means it is enabled. If it is, try disabling it: <informalexample +><screen +> +$ echo -n "using_dma:0" >settings +</screen +></informalexample +> Make sure that you are in the directory for the device that corresponds to your CD-ROM drive. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>If there are any problems during the installation, try checking the integrity of the CD-ROM using the option near the bottom of the installer's main menu. This option can also be used as a general test if the CD-ROM can be read reliably. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="unreliable-floppies"> + <title +>Floppy Disk Reliability</title> + +<para +>The biggest problem for people using floppy disks to install Debian seems to be floppy disk reliability. </para +><para +>The boot floppy is the floppy with the worst problems, because it is read by the hardware directly, before Linux boots. Often, the hardware doesn't read as reliably as the Linux floppy disk driver, and may just stop without printing an error message if it reads incorrect data. There can also be failures in the driver floppies, most of which indicate themselves with a flood of messages about disk I/O errors. </para +><para +>If you are having the installation stall at a particular floppy, the first thing you should do is write the image to a <emphasis +>different</emphasis +> floppy and see if that solves the problem. Simply reformatting the old floppy may not be sufficient, even if it appears that the floppy was reformatted and written with no errors. It is sometimes useful to try writing the floppy on a different system. </para +><para +>One user reports he had to write the images to floppy <emphasis +>three</emphasis +> times before one worked, and then everything was fine with the third floppy. </para +><para +>Normally you should not have to download a floppy image again, but if you are experiencing problems it is always useful to verify that the images were downloaded correctly by verifying their md5sums. </para +><para +>Other users have reported that simply rebooting a few times with the same floppy in the floppy drive can lead to a successful boot. This is all due to buggy hardware or firmware floppy drivers. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Boot Configuration</title> + +<para +>If you have problems and the kernel hangs during the boot process, doesn't recognize peripherals you actually have, or drives are not recognized properly, the first thing to check is the boot parameters, as discussed in <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>. </para +><para +>Often, problems can be solved by removing add-ons and peripherals, and then trying booting again. <phrase arch="x86" +>Internal modems, sound cards, and Plug-n-Play devices can be especially problematic.</phrase +> </para +><para +>If you have a large amount of memory installed in your machine, more than 512M, and the installer hangs when booting the kernel, you may need to include a boot argument to limit the amount of memory the kernel sees, such as <userinput +>mem=512m</userinput +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="i386-boot-problems"> + <title +>Common &arch-title; Installation Problems</title> +<para +>There are some common installation problems that can be solved or avoided by passing certain boot parameters to the installer. </para +><para +>Some systems have floppies with <quote +>inverted DCLs</quote +>. If you receive errors reading from the floppy, even when you know the floppy is good, try the parameter <userinput +>floppy=thinkpad</userinput +>. </para +><para +>On some systems, such as the IBM PS/1 or ValuePoint (which have ST-506 disk drivers), the IDE drive may not be properly recognized. Again, try it first without the parameters and see if the IDE drive is recognized properly. If not, determine your drive geometry (cylinders, heads, and sectors), and use the parameter <userinput +>hd=<replaceable +>cylinders</replaceable +>,<replaceable +>heads</replaceable +>,<replaceable +>sectors</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +><para +>If you have a very old machine, and the kernel hangs after saying <computeroutput +>Checking 'hlt' instruction...</computeroutput +>, then you should try the <userinput +>no-hlt</userinput +> boot argument, which disables this test. </para +><para +>Some systems (especially laptops) that have a native resolution that is not a 4:3 ratio (i.e. not for example 800x600 or 1024x768) may have a blank display after the installer has been booted. In that case adding the boot parameter <userinput +>vga=788</userinput +><footnote +> <para +> The parameter <userinput +>vga=788</userinput +> will activate the VESA framebuffer with a resolution of 800x600. This will probably work, but may not be the optimal resolution for your system. A list of supported resolutions can be obtained by using <userinput +>vga=ask</userinput +>, but you should be aware that list may not be complete. </para +> </footnote +> may help. If that does not work, try adding the boot parameter <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +>. </para +><para +>If your screen begins to show a weird picture while the kernel boots, eg. pure white, pure black or colored pixel garbage, your system may contain a problematic video card which does not switch to the framebuffer mode properly. Then you can use the boot parameter <userinput +>fb=false</userinput +> to disable the framebuffer console. Only a reduced set of languages will be available during the installation due to limited console features. See <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> for details. </para> + + <sect3> + <title +>System Freeze During the PCMCIA Configuration Phase</title> +<para +>Some laptop models produced by Dell are known to crash when PCMCIA device detection tries to access some hardware addresses. Other laptops may display similar problems. If you experience such a problem and you don't need PCMCIA support during the installation, you can disable PCMCIA using the <userinput +>hw-detect/start_pcmcia=false</userinput +> boot parameter. You can then configure PCMCIA after the installation is completed and exclude the resource range causing the problems. </para +><para +>Alternatively, you can boot the installer in expert mode. You will then be asked to enter the resource range options your hardware needs. For example, if you have one of the Dell laptops mentioned above, you should enter <userinput +>exclude port 0x800-0x8ff</userinput +> here. There is also a list of some common resource range options in the <ulink url="http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/ftp/doc/PCMCIA-HOWTO-1.html#ss1.12" +>System resource settings section of the PCMCIA HOWTO</ulink +>. Note that you have to omit the commas, if any, when you enter this value in the installer. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>System Freeze while Loading USB Modules</title> +<para +>The kernel normally tries to install USB modules and the USB keyboard driver in order to support some non-standard USB keyboards. However, there are some broken USB systems where the driver hangs on loading. A possible workaround may be disabling the USB controller in your mainboard BIOS setup. Another option is passing the <userinput +>nousb</userinput +> parameter at the boot prompt. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="sparc-boot-problems"> + <title +>Common &arch-title; Installation Problems</title> +<para +>There are some common installation problems that are worth mentioning. </para> + <sect3> + <title +>Misdirected video output</title> +<para +>It is fairly common for &arch-title; to have two video cards in one machine, for example an ATI card and a Sun Creator 3D. In some cases, this may result in the video output getting misdirected soon after the system boots. In typical cases, the display will only show: <informalexample +><screen +> +Remapping the kernel... done +Booting Linux... +</screen +></informalexample +> To work around this, you can either pull out one of the video cards, or disable the one not used during the OpenProm boot phase using a kernel parameter. For example, to disable an ATI card, you should boot the installer with <userinput +>video=atyfb:off</userinput +>. </para +><para +>Note that you may also have to manually add this parameter to the silo configuration (edit <filename +>/target/etc/silo.conf</filename +> before rebooting) and, if you installed X11, modify the video driver in <filename +>/etc/X11/xorg.conf</filename +>. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Failure to Boot or Install from CD-ROM</title> +<para +>Some Sparc systems are notoriously difficult to boot from CD-ROM and even if they do boot, there may be inexplicable failures during the installation. Most problems have been reported with SunBlade systems. </para +><para +>We recommend to install such systems by netbooting the installer. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="kernel-msgs"> + <title +>Interpreting the Kernel Startup Messages</title> + +<para +>During the boot sequence, you may see many messages in the form <computeroutput +>can't find <replaceable +>something</replaceable +></computeroutput +>, or <computeroutput +><replaceable +>something</replaceable +> not present</computeroutput +>, <computeroutput +>can't initialize <replaceable +>something</replaceable +></computeroutput +>, or even <computeroutput +>this driver release depends on <replaceable +>something</replaceable +></computeroutput +>. Most of these messages are harmless. You see them because the kernel for the installation system is built to run on computers with many different peripheral devices. Obviously, no one computer will have every possible peripheral device, so the operating system may emit a few complaints while it looks for peripherals you don't own. You may also see the system pause for a while. This happens when it is waiting for a device to respond, and that device is not present on your system. If you find the time it takes to boot the system unacceptably long, you can create a custom kernel later (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>). </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 id="problem-report"> + <title +>Reporting Installation Problems</title> +<para +>If you get through the initial boot phase but cannot complete the install, the menu option <guimenuitem +>Save debug logs</guimenuitem +> may be helpful. It lets you store system error logs and configuration information from the installer to a floppy, or download them using a web browser. This information may provide clues as to what went wrong and how to fix it. If you are submitting a bug report, you may want to attach this information to the bug report. </para +><para +>Other pertinent installation messages may be found in <filename +>/var/log/</filename +> during the installation, and <filename +>/var/log/installer/</filename +> after the computer has been booted into the installed system. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="submit-bug"> + <title +>Submitting Installation Reports</title> +<para +>If you still have problems, please submit an installation report. We also encourage installation reports to be sent even if the installation is successful, so that we can get as much information as possible on the largest number of hardware configurations. </para +><para +>Note that your installation report will be published in the Debian Bug Tracking System (BTS) and forwarded to a public mailing list. Make sure that you use an e-mail address that you do not mind being made public. </para +><para +>If you have a working Debian system, the easiest way to send an installation report is to install the <classname +>installation-report</classname +> and <classname +>reportbug</classname +> packages (<command +>aptitude install installation-report reportbug</command +>), configure <classname +>reportbug</classname +> as explained in <xref linkend="mail-outgoing"/>, and run the command <command +>reportbug installation-reports</command +>. </para +><para +>Alternatively you can use this template when filling out installation reports, and file the report as a bug report against the <classname +>installation-reports</classname +> pseudo package, by sending it to <email +>submit@bugs.debian.org</email +>. <informalexample +><screen +> +Package: installation-reports + +Boot method: <How did you boot the installer? CD? floppy? network?> +Image version: <Full URL to image you downloaded is best> +Date: <Date and time of the install> + +Machine: <Description of machine (eg, IBM Thinkpad R32)> +Processor: +Memory: +Partitions: <df -Tl will do; the raw partition table is preferred> + +Output of lspci -knn (or lspci -nn): + +Base System Installation Checklist: +[O] = OK, [E] = Error (please elaborate below), [ ] = didn't try it + +Initial boot: [ ] +Detect network card: [ ] +Configure network: [ ] +Detect CD: [ ] +Load installer modules: [ ] +Detect hard drives: [ ] +Partition hard drives: [ ] +Install base system: [ ] +Clock/timezone setup: [ ] +User/password setup: [ ] +Install tasks: [ ] +Install boot loader: [ ] +Overall install: [ ] + +Comments/Problems: + +<Description of the install, in prose, and any thoughts, comments + and ideas you had during the initial install.> +</screen +></informalexample +> In the bug report, describe what the problem is, including the last visible kernel messages in the event of a kernel hang. Describe the steps that you did which brought the system into the problem state. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/trouble.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file boot-installer/boot-installer.xml --> diff --git a/nb/boot-new/boot-new.xml b/nb/boot-new/boot-new.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6994d24d --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/boot-new/boot-new.xml @@ -0,0 +1,451 @@ +<!-- Start of file boot-new/boot-new.xml --> +<!-- $Id: boot-new.xml 56817 2008-11-30 08:13:01Z fjp $ --> + +<chapter id="boot-new"> + <title +>Booting Into Your New Debian System</title> + + <sect1 id="base-boot" +><title +>The Moment of Truth</title> +<para +>Your system's first boot on its own power is what electrical engineers call the <quote +>smoke test</quote +>. </para +><para arch="x86" +>If you did a default installation, the first thing you should see when you boot the system is the menu of the <classname +>grub</classname +> or possibly the <classname +>lilo</classname +> bootloader. The first choices in the menu will be for your new Debian system. If you had any other operating systems on your computer (like Windows) that were detected by the installation system, those will be listed lower down in the menu. </para +><para +>If the system fails to start up correctly, don't panic. If the installation was successful, chances are good that there is only a relatively minor problem that is preventing the system from booting Debian. In most cases such problems can be fixed without having to repeat the installation. One available option to fix boot problems is to use the installer's built-in rescue mode (see <xref linkend="rescue"/>). </para +><para +>If you are new to Debian and Linux, you may need some help from more experienced users. <phrase arch="x86" +>For direct on-line help you can try the IRC channels #debian or #debian-boot on the OFTC network. Alternatively you can contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +>debian-user mailing list</ulink +>.</phrase +> <phrase arch="not-x86" +>For less common architectures like &arch-title;, your best option is to ask on the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +>debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink +>.</phrase +> You can also file an installation report as described in <xref linkend="submit-bug"/>. Please make sure that you describe your problem clearly and include any messages that are displayed and may help others to diagnose the issue. </para +><para arch="x86" +>If you had any other operating systems on your computer that were not detected or not detected correctly, please file an installation report. </para> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>BVME 6000 Booting</title> +<para +>If you have just performed a diskless install on a BVM or Motorola VMEbus machine: once the system has loaded the <command +>tftplilo</command +> program from the TFTP server, from the <prompt +>LILO Boot:</prompt +> prompt enter one of: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +><userinput +>b6000</userinput +> followed by &enterkey; to boot a BVME 4000/6000 </para +></listitem +><listitem +><para +><userinput +>b162</userinput +> followed by &enterkey; to boot an MVME162 </para +></listitem +><listitem +><para +><userinput +>b167</userinput +> followed by &enterkey; to boot an MVME166/167 </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Macintosh Booting</title> + +<para +>Go to the directory containing the installation files and start up the <command +>Penguin</command +> booter, holding down the <keycap +>command</keycap +> key. Go to the <userinput +>Settings</userinput +> dialogue (<keycombo +> <keycap +>command</keycap +> <keycap +>T</keycap +> </keycombo +>), and locate the kernel options line which should look like <userinput +>root=/dev/ram ramdisk_size=15000</userinput +> or similar. </para +><para +>You need to change the entry to <userinput +>root=/dev/<replaceable +>yyyy</replaceable +></userinput +>. Replace the <replaceable +>yyyy</replaceable +> with the Linux name of the partition onto which you installed the system (e.g. <filename +>/dev/sda1</filename +>); you wrote this down earlier. For users with tiny screens, adding <userinput +>fbcon=font:VGA8x8</userinput +> (or <userinput +>video=font:VGA8x8</userinput +> on pre-2.6 kernels) may help readability. You can change this at any time. </para +><para +>If you don't want to start GNU/Linux immediately each time you start, uncheck the <userinput +>Auto Boot</userinput +> option. Save your settings in the <filename +>Prefs</filename +> file using the <userinput +>Save Settings As Default</userinput +> option. </para +><para +>Now select <userinput +>Boot Now</userinput +> (<keycombo +> <keycap +>command</keycap +> <keycap +>B</keycap +> </keycombo +>) to start your freshly installed GNU/Linux instead of the RAMdisk installer system. </para +><para +>Debian should boot, and you should see the same messages as when you first booted the installation system, followed by some new messages. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>OldWorld PowerMacs</title> +<para +>If the machine fails to boot after completing the installation, and stops with a <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt, try typing <userinput +>Linux</userinput +> followed by &enterkey;. (The default boot configuration in <filename +>quik.conf</filename +> is labeled Linux). The labels defined in <filename +>quik.conf</filename +> will be displayed if you press the <keycap +>Tab</keycap +> key at the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt. You can also try booting back into the installer, and editing the <filename +>/target/etc/quik.conf</filename +> placed there by the <guimenuitem +>Install Quik on a Hard Disk</guimenuitem +> step. Clues for dealing with <command +>quik</command +> are available at <ulink url="&url-powerpc-quik-faq;" +></ulink +>. </para +><para +>To boot back into MacOS without resetting the nvram, type <userinput +>bye</userinput +> at the OpenFirmware prompt (assuming MacOS has not been removed from the machine). To obtain an OpenFirmware prompt, hold down the <keycombo +> <keycap +>command</keycap +> <keycap +>option</keycap +> <keycap +>o</keycap +> <keycap +>f</keycap +> </keycombo +> keys while cold booting the machine. If you need to reset the OpenFirmware nvram changes to the MacOS default in order to boot back to MacOS, hold down the <keycombo +> <keycap +>command</keycap +> <keycap +>option</keycap +> <keycap +>p</keycap +> <keycap +>r</keycap +> </keycombo +> keys while cold booting the machine. </para +><para +>If you use <command +>BootX</command +> to boot into the installed system, just select your desired kernel in the <filename +>Linux Kernels</filename +> folder, un-choose the ramdisk option, and add a root device corresponding to your installation; e.g. <userinput +>/dev/hda8</userinput +>. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>NewWorld PowerMacs</title> +<para +>On G4 machines and iBooks, you can hold down the <keycap +>option</keycap +> key and get a graphical screen with a button for each bootable OS, &debian; will be a button with a small penguin icon. </para +><para +>If you kept MacOS and at some point it changes the OpenFirmware <envar +>boot-device</envar +> variable you should reset OpenFirmware to its default configuration. To do this hold down the <keycombo +> <keycap +>command</keycap +> <keycap +>option</keycap +> <keycap +>p</keycap +> <keycap +>r</keycap +> </keycombo +> keys while cold booting the machine. </para +><para +>The labels defined in <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> will be displayed if you press the <keycap +>Tab</keycap +> key at the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt. </para +><para +>Resetting OpenFirmware on G3 or G4 hardware will cause it to boot &debian; by default (if you correctly partitioned and placed the Apple_Bootstrap partition first). If you have &debian; on a SCSI disk and MacOS on an IDE disk this may not work and you will have to enter OpenFirmware and set the <envar +>boot-device</envar +> variable, <command +>ybin</command +> normally does this automatically. </para +><para +>After you boot &debian; for the first time you can add any additional options you desire (such as dual boot options) to <filename +>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename +> and run <command +>ybin</command +> to update your boot partition with the changed configuration. Please read the <ulink url="&url-powerpc-yaboot-faq;" +>yaboot HOWTO</ulink +> for more information. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + +<!-- Start of file boot-new/mount-encrypted.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mount-encrypted.xml 56326 2008-10-06 23:03:54Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="mount-encrypted-volumes"> + <title +>Mounting encrypted volumes</title> + +<para +>If you created encrypted volumes during the installation and assigned them mount points, you will be asked to enter the passphrase for each of these volumes during the boot. The actual procedure differs slightly between dm-crypt and loop-AES. </para> + + <sect2 id="mount-dm-crypt"> + <title +>dm-crypt</title> + +<para +>For partitions encrypted using dm-crypt you will be shown the following prompt during the boot: <informalexample +><screen +> +Starting early crypto disks... <replaceable>part</replaceable>_crypt(starting) +Enter LUKS passphrase: +</screen +></informalexample +> In the first line of the prompt, <replaceable +>part</replaceable +> is the name of the underlying partition, e.g. sda2 or md0. You are now probably wondering <emphasis +>for which volume</emphasis +> you are actually entering the passphrase. Does it relate to your <filename +>/home</filename +>? Or to <filename +>/var</filename +>? Of course, if you have just one encrypted volume, this is easy and you can just enter the passphrase you used when setting up this volume. If you set up more than one encrypted volume during the installation, the notes you wrote down as the last step in <xref linkend="partman-crypto"/> come in handy. If you did not make a note of the mapping between <filename +><replaceable +>part</replaceable +>_crypt</filename +> and the mount points before, you can still find it in <filename +>/etc/crypttab</filename +> and <filename +>/etc/fstab</filename +> of your new system. </para +><para +>The prompt may look somewhat different when an encrypted root file system is mounted. This depends on which initramfs generator was used to generate the initrd used to boot the system. The example below is for an initrd generated using <classname +>initramfs-tools</classname +>: <informalexample +><screen +>Begin: Mounting <emphasis>root file system</emphasis>... ... +Begin: Running /scripts/local-top ... +Enter LUKS passphrase: +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>No characters (even asterisks) will be shown while entering the passphrase. If you enter the wrong passphrase, you have two more tries to correct it. After the third try the boot process will skip this volume and continue to mount the next filesystem. Please see <xref linkend="crypto-troubleshooting"/> for further information. </para +><para +>After entering all passphrases the boot should continue as usual. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="mount-loop-aes"> + <title +>loop-AES</title> + +<para +>For partitions encrypted using loop-AES you will be shown the following prompt during the boot: <informalexample +><screen +>Checking loop-encrypted file systems. +Setting up /dev/loop<replaceable>X</replaceable> (/<replaceable>mountpoint</replaceable>) +Password: +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>No characters (even asterisks) will be shown while entering the passphrase. If you enter the wrong passphrase, you have two more tries to correct it. After the third try the boot process will skip this volume and continue to mount the next filesystem. Please see <xref linkend="crypto-troubleshooting"/> for further information. </para +><para +>After entering all passphrases the boot should continue as usual. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="crypto-troubleshooting"> + <title +>Troubleshooting</title> + +<para +>If some of the encrypted volumes could not be mounted because a wrong passphrase was entered, you will have to mount them manually after the boot. There are several cases. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>The first case concerns the root partition. When it is not mounted correctly, the boot process will halt and you will have to reboot the computer to try again. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The easiest case is for encrypted volumes holding data like <filename +>/home</filename +> or <filename +>/srv</filename +>. You can simply mount them manually after the boot. For loop-AES this is a one-step operation: <informalexample +><screen +> +<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>mount <replaceable>/mount_point</replaceable></userinput> +<prompt>Password:</prompt> +</screen +></informalexample +> where <replaceable +>/mount_point</replaceable +> should be replaced by the particular directory (e.g. <filename +>/home</filename +>). The only difference from an ordinary mount is that you will be asked to enter the passphrase for this volume. </para +><para +>For dm-crypt this is a bit trickier. First you need to register the volumes with <application +>device mapper</application +> by running: <informalexample +><screen +> +<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>/etc/init.d/cryptdisks start</userinput> +</screen +></informalexample +> This will scan all volumes mentioned in <filename +>/etc/crypttab</filename +> and will create appropriate devices under the <filename +>/dev</filename +> directory after entering the correct passphrases. (Already registered volumes will be skipped, so you can repeat this command several times without worrying.) After successful registration you can simply mount the volumes the usual way: <informalexample +><screen +><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>mount <replaceable>/mount_point</replaceable></userinput> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>If any volume holding noncritical system files could not be mounted (<filename +>/usr</filename +> or <filename +>/var</filename +>), the system should still boot and you should be able to mount the volumes manually like in the previous case. However, you will also need to (re)start any services usually running in your default runlevel because it is very likely that they were not started. The easiest way to achieve this is by switching to the first runlevel and back by entering <informalexample +><screen +> +<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>init 1</userinput> +</screen +></informalexample +> at the shell prompt and pressing <keycombo +> <keycap +>Control</keycap +> <keycap +>D</keycap +> </keycombo +> when asked for the root password. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file boot-new/mount-encrypted.xml --> + + <sect1 id="login"> + <title +>Log In</title> + +<para +>Once your system boots, you'll be presented with the login prompt. Log in using the personal login and password you selected during the installation process. Your system is now ready for use. </para +><para +>If you are a new user, you may want to explore the documentation which is already installed on your system as you start to use it. There are currently several documentation systems, work is proceeding on integrating the different types of documentation. Here are a few starting points. </para +><para +>Documentation accompanying programs you have installed can be found in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/</filename +>, under a subdirectory named after the program (or, more precise, the Debian package that contains the program). However, more extensive documentation is often packaged separately in special documentation packages that are mostly not installed by default. For example, documentation about the package management tool <command +>apt</command +> can be found in the packages <classname +>apt-doc</classname +> or <classname +>apt-howto</classname +>. </para +><para +>In addition, there are some special folders within the <filename +>/usr/share/doc/</filename +> hierarchy. Linux HOWTOs are installed in <emphasis +>.gz</emphasis +> (compressed) format, in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/</filename +>. After installing <classname +>dhelp</classname +>, you will find a browsable index of documentation in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/HTML/index.html</filename +>. </para +><para +>One easy way to view these documents using a text based browser is to enter the following commands: <informalexample +><screen +> +$ cd /usr/share/doc/ +$ w3m . +</screen +></informalexample +> The dot after the <command +>w3m</command +> command tells it to show the contents of the current directory. </para +><para +>If you have a graphical desktop environment installed, you can also use its web browser. Start the web browser from the application menu and enter <userinput +>/usr/share/doc/</userinput +> in the address bar. </para +><para +>You can also type <userinput +>info <replaceable +>command</replaceable +></userinput +> or <userinput +>man <replaceable +>command</replaceable +></userinput +> to see documentation on most commands available at the command prompt. Typing <userinput +>help</userinput +> will display help on shell commands. And typing a command followed by <userinput +>--help</userinput +> will usually display a short summary of the command's usage. If a command's results scroll past the top of the screen, type <userinput +>| more</userinput +> after the command to cause the results to pause before scrolling past the top of the screen. To see a list of all commands available which begin with a certain letter, type the letter and then two tabs. </para> + + </sect1> +</chapter> +<!-- End of file boot-new/boot-new.xml --> diff --git a/nb/hardware/hardware.xml b/nb/hardware/hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b6525e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/hardware/hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2534 @@ +<!-- Start of file hardware/hardware.xml --> +<!-- $Id: hardware.xml 56244 2008-10-03 16:05:55Z fjp $ --> + +<chapter id="hardware-req"> + <title +>System Requirements</title> + +<para +>This section contains information about what hardware you need to get started with Debian. You will also find links to further information about hardware supported by GNU and Linux. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file hardware/hardware-supported.xml --> +<!-- $Id: hardware-supported.xml 56439 2008-10-15 17:45:28Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="hardware-supported"> + <title +>Supported Hardware</title> +<para +>Debian does not impose hardware requirements beyond the requirements of the Linux kernel and the GNU tool-sets. Therefore, any architecture or platform to which the Linux kernel, libc, <command +>gcc</command +>, etc. have been ported, and for which a Debian port exists, can run Debian. Please refer to the Ports pages at <ulink url="&url-ports;" +></ulink +> for more details on &arch-title; architecture systems which have been tested with Debian. </para +><para +>Rather than attempting to describe all the different hardware configurations which are supported for &arch-title;, this section contains general information and pointers to where additional information can be found. </para> + + <sect2 +><title +>Supported Architectures</title> +<para +>Debian &release; supports eleven major architectures and several variations of each architecture known as <quote +>flavors</quote +>. </para +><para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Architecture</entry +><entry +>Debian Designation</entry> + <entry +>Subarchitecture</entry +><entry +>Flavor</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>Intel x86-based</entry> + <entry +>i386</entry> + <entry +></entry> + <entry +></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>AMD64 & Intel EM64T</entry> + <entry +>amd64</entry> + <entry +></entry> + <entry +></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>DEC Alpha</entry> + <entry +>alpha</entry> + <entry +></entry> + <entry +></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="4" +>ARM</entry> + <entry +>arm</entry> + <entry +>Netwinder and CATS</entry> + <entry +>netwinder</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>armel</entry> + <entry +>Versatile</entry> + <entry +>versatile</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry morerows="2" +>arm and armel</entry> + <entry +>Intel IOP32x</entry> + <entry +>iop32x</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Intel IXP4xx</entry> + <entry +>ixp4xx</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Marvell Orion</entry> + <entry +>orion5x</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>HP PA-RISC</entry> + <entry morerows="1" +>hppa</entry> + <entry +>PA-RISC 1.1</entry> + <entry +>32</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PA-RISC 2.0</entry> + <entry +>64</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Intel IA-64</entry> + <entry +>ia64</entry> + <entry +></entry> + <entry +></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="5" +>MIPS (big endian)</entry> + <entry morerows="5" +>mips</entry> + <entry +>SGI IP22 (Indy/Indigo 2)</entry> + <entry +>r4k-ip22</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>SGI IP32 (O2)</entry> + <entry +>r5k-ip32</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MIPS Malta (32 bit)</entry> + <entry +>4kc-malta</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MIPS Malta (64 bit)</entry> + <entry +>5kc-malta</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> + <entry +>sb1-bcm91250a</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur)</entry> + <entry +>sb1a-bcm91480b</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="4" +>MIPS (little endian)</entry> + <entry morerows="4" +>mipsel</entry> + <entry +>Cobalt</entry> + <entry +>cobalt</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MIPS Malta (32 bit)</entry> + <entry +>4kc-malta</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MIPS Malta (64 bit)</entry> + <entry +>5kc-malta</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> + <entry +>sb1-bcm91250a</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur)</entry> + <entry +>sb1a-bcm91480b</entry> +</row> + +<row arch="m68k"> + <entry morerows="5" +>Motorola 680x0</entry> + <entry morerows="5" +>m68k</entry> + <entry +>Atari</entry> + <entry +>atari</entry> +</row +><row arch="m68k"> + <entry +>Amiga</entry> + <entry +>amiga</entry> +</row +><row arch="m68k"> + <entry +>68k Macintosh</entry> + <entry +>mac</entry> +</row +><row arch="m68k"> + <entry morerows="2" +>VME</entry> + <entry +>bvme6000</entry> +</row +><row arch="m68k"> + <entry +>mvme147</entry> +</row +><row arch="m68k"> + <entry +>mvme16x</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>IBM/Motorola PowerPC</entry> + <entry morerows="1" +>powerpc</entry> + <entry +>PowerMac</entry> + <entry +>pmac</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PReP</entry> + <entry +>prep</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>Sun SPARC</entry> + <entry morerows="1" +>sparc</entry> + <entry +>sun4u</entry> + <entry morerows="1" +>sparc64</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>sun4v</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>IBM S/390</entry> + <entry morerows="1" +>s390</entry> + <entry +>IPL from VM-reader and DASD</entry> + <entry +>generic</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>IPL from tape</entry> + <entry +>tape</entry> +</row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para +><para +>This document covers installation for the <emphasis +>&arch-title;</emphasis +> architecture. If you are looking for information on any of the other Debian-supported architectures take a look at the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/" +>Debian-Ports</ulink +> pages. </para +><para condition="new-arch" +>This is the first official release of &debian; for the &arch-title; architecture. We feel that it has proven itself sufficiently to be released. However, because it has not had the exposure (and hence testing by users) that some other architectures have had, you may encounter a few bugs. Use our <ulink url="&url-bts;" +>Bug Tracking System</ulink +> to report any problems; make sure to mention the fact that the bug is on the &arch-title; platform. It can be necessary to use the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +>debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink +> as well. </para> + </sect2> + +<!-- supported cpu docs --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/alpha.xml --> +<!-- $Id: alpha.xml 28997 2005-07-07 21:09:22Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-cpus" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Complete information regarding supported DEC Alphas can be found at <ulink url="&url-alpha-howto;" +>Linux Alpha HOWTO</ulink +>. The purpose of this section is to describe the systems supported by the boot disks. </para +><para +>Alpha machines are subdivided into different system types because there are a number of generations of motherboard and supporting chipsets. Different systems (<quote +>sub-architectures</quote +>) often have radically different engineering and capabilities. Therefore, the process of installing and, more to the point, booting, can vary from system to system. </para +><para +>The following table lists the system types supported by the Debian installation system. The table also indicates the <emphasis +>code name</emphasis +> for these system types. You'll need to know this code name when you actually begin the installation process: </para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<colspec colname="c3"/> +<colspec colname="c4"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2" +>Hardware Type</entry> + <entry +>Aliases</entry +><entry +>MILO image</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>ALCOR</entry> + <entry +>AlphaStation 500 5/266.300</entry> + <entry +>Maverick</entry> + <entry +>alcor</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 500 5/333...500</entry> + <entry +>Bret</entry> + <entry +>alcor</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 600/266...300</entry> + <entry +>Alcor</entry> + <entry +>alcor</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 600/300...433</entry> + <entry +>XLT</entry> + <entry +>xlt</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>BOOK1</entry> + <entry +>AlphaBook1 (laptop)</entry> + <entry +>Alphabook1/Burns</entry> + <entry +>book1</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="7" +>AVANTI</entry> + <entry +>AlphaStation 200 4/100...166</entry> + <entry +>Mustang</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 200 4/233</entry> + <entry +>Mustang+</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 205 4/133...333</entry> + <entry +>LX3</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 250 4/300</entry> + <entry +>M3+</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 255 4/133...333</entry> + <entry +>LX3+</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 300 4/266</entry> + <entry +>Melmac</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 400 4/166</entry> + <entry +>Chinet</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 400 4/233...300</entry> + <entry +>Avanti</entry> + <entry +>avanti</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>EB164</entry> + <entry +>AlphaPC164</entry> + <entry +>PC164</entry> + <entry +>pc164</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaPC164-LX</entry> + <entry +>LX164</entry> + <entry +>lx164</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaPC164-SX</entry> + <entry +>SX164</entry> + <entry +>sx164</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>EB164</entry> + <entry +>EB164</entry> + <entry +>eb164</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="2" +>EB64+</entry> + <entry +>AlphaPC64</entry> + <entry +>Cabriolet</entry> + <entry +>cabriolet</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaPCI64</entry> + <entry +>Cabriolet</entry> + <entry +>cabriolet</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>EB64+</entry> + <entry +>EB64+</entry> + <entry +>eb64p</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>EB66</entry> + <entry +>EB66</entry> + <entry +>EB66</entry> + <entry +>eb66</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>EB66+</entry> + <entry +>EB66+</entry> + <entry +>eb66p</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="2" +>JENSEN</entry> + <entry +>DEC 2000 Model 300(S)</entry> + <entry +>Jensen</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DEC 2000 Model 500</entry> + <entry +>Culzen</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DECpc 150</entry> + <entry +>Jensen</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="7" +>MIATA</entry> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 433a</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 433au</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 466au</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 500a</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 500au</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 550au</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 600a</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Personal WorkStation 600au</entry> + <entry +>Miata</entry> + <entry +>miata</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>MIKASA</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000 4/200</entry> + <entry +>Mikasa</entry> + <entry +>mikasa</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000 4/233..266</entry> + <entry +>Mikasa+</entry> + <entry +>mikasa</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> + <entry +>Mikasa-Pinnacle</entry> + <entry +>mikasa</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> + <entry +>Mikasa-Primo</entry> + <entry +>mikasa</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>NAUTILUS</entry> + <entry +>UP1000</entry> + <entry +>Nautilus</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UP1100</entry> + <entry +>Galaxy-Train/Nautilus Jr.</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>NONAME</entry> + <entry +>AXPpci33</entry> + <entry +>Noname</entry> + <entry +>noname</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UDB</entry> + <entry +>Multia</entry> + <entry +>noname</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="6" +>NORITAKE</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000A 4/233...266</entry> + <entry +>Noritake</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000A 5/300</entry> + <entry +>Noritake-Pinnacle</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1000A 5/333...500</entry> + <entry +>Noritake-Primo</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 800 5/333...500</entry> + <entry +>Corelle</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaStation 600 A</entry> + <entry +>Alcor-Primo</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Digital Server 3300</entry> + <entry +>Corelle</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Digital Server 3300R</entry> + <entry +>Corelle</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>PLATFORM 2000</entry> + <entry +>P2K</entry> + <entry +>P2K</entry> + <entry +>p2k</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="4" +>RAWHIDE</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer 1200 5/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 4000 5/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Wrangler/Durango</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 4100 5/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Dodge</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Digital Server 5300</entry> + <entry +>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Digital Server 7300</entry> + <entry +>Dodge</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="5" +>RUFFIAN</entry> + <entry +>DeskStation AlphaPC164-UX</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DeskStation RPL164-2</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DeskStation RPL164-4</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DeskStation RPX164-2</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DeskStation RPX164-4</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Samsung AlphaPC164-BX</entry> + <entry +>Ruffian</entry> + <entry +>ruffian</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>SABLE</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer 2000 4/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Demi-Sable</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 2000 5/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Demi-Gamma-Sable</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 2100 4/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Sable</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer 2100 5/xxx</entry> + <entry +>Gamma-Sable</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>TAKARA</entry> + <entry +>21164 PICMG SBC</entry> + <entry +>Takara</entry> + <entry +>takara</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>TITAN</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS15</entry> + <entry +>HyperBrick2</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS25</entry> + <entry +>Granite</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer ES45</entry> + <entry +>Privateer</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry +>Yukon</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="12" +>TSUNAMI</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS10</entry> + <entry +>Webbrick</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS10L</entry> + <entry +>Slate</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS20</entry> + <entry +>Catamaran/Goldrush</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS20E</entry> + <entry +>Goldrack</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer DS20L</entry> + <entry +>Shark</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer ES40</entry> + <entry +>Clipper</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>DP264</entry> + <entry +>DP264</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>SMARTengine 21264 PCI/ISA SBC</entry> + <entry +>Eiger</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry +>Warhol</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry +>Windjammer</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>UP2000</entry> + <entry +>Swordfish</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>XP1000</entry> + <entry +>Monet/Brisbane</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>XP900</entry> + <entry +>Webbrick</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>WILDFIRE</entry> + <entry +>AlphaServer GS160</entry> + <entry +>Wildfire</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>AlphaServer GS320</entry> + <entry +>Wildfire</entry> + <entry +>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>XL</entry> + <entry +>XL-233...266</entry> + <entry +>XL</entry> + <entry +>xl</entry> +</row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<para +>It is believed that Debian &releasename; supports installing on all alpha sub-architectures with the exception of the ARC-only Ruffian and XL sub-architectures and the Titan subarchitecture, which requires a change to the kernel compile options. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/alpha.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/amd64.xml --> +<!-- $Id: i386.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="amd64" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at <ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink +>. This section merely outlines the basics. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>CPU</title> +<para +>Both AMD64 and Intel EM64T processors are supported. </para> + </sect3> + +<!-- Not sure if this is relevant for AMD64; AFAIK only PCI supported + <sect3 id="bus" +><title +>I/O Bus</title> +<para> + +The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to +communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer +must use the PCI bus. + +</para> + </sect3> +--> + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/amd64.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/arm.xml --> +<!-- $Id: arm.xml 55470 2008-08-31 16:25:05Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="arm" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> + +<para +>Each distinct ARM architecture requires its own kernel. Because of this the standard Debian distribution only supports installation on a number of the most common platforms. The Debian userland however may be used by <emphasis +>any</emphasis +> ARM CPU. </para> + +<para +>Most ARM CPUs may be run in either endian mode (big or little). However, the majority of current system implementation uses little-endian mode. Debian currently only supports little-endian ARM systems. </para> + +<para +>The supported platforms are: <variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Netwinder</term> +<listitem +><para +>This is actually the name for the group of machines based upon the StrongARM 110 CPU and Intel 21285 Northbridge (also known as Footbridge). It comprises of machines like: Netwinder (possibly one of the most common ARM boxes), CATS (also known as the EB110ATX), EBSA 285 and Compaq personal server (cps, aka skiff). </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>IOP32x</term> +<listitem +><para +>Intel's I/O Processor (IOP) line is found in a number of products related to data storage and processing. Debian currently supports the IOP32x platform, featuring the IOP 80219 and 32x chips commonly found in Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices. Debian explicitly supports two such devices: the <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-glantank;" +>GLAN Tank</ulink +> from IO-Data and the <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-n2100;" +>Thecus N2100</ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>IXP4xx</term> +<listitem +><para +>The IXP4xx platform is based on Intel's XScale ARM core. Currently, only one IXP4xx based system is supported, the Linksys NSLU2. The Linksys NSLU2 (Network Storage Link for USB 2.0 Disk Drives) is a small device which allows you to easily provide storage via the network. It comes with an Ethernet connection and two USB ports to which hard drives can be connected. There is an external site with <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-nslu2;" +>installation instructions</ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Orion5x</term> +<listitem +><para +>Orion is a system on a chip (SoC) from Marvell that integrates an ARM CPU, Ethernet, SATA, USB, and other functionality in one chip. There are many Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices on the market that are based on an Orion chip. We currently support the following Orion based devices: <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-kuroboxpro;" +>Buffalo Kurobox</ulink +>, <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-mv2120;" +>HP mv2120</ulink +>, <ulink url="&url-arm-cyrius-qnap;" +>QNAP Turbo Station</ulink +> (TS-109, TS-209 and TS-409). </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Versatile</term> +<listitem +><para +>The Versatile platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run Debian on ARM if you don't have the hardware. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + +</para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/arm.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/hppa.xml --> +<!-- $Id: hppa.xml 41452 2006-10-09 13:21:56Z cjwatson $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="hppa" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>There are two major support <emphasis +>&architecture;</emphasis +> flavors: PA-RISC 1.1 and PA-RISC 2.0. The PA-RISC 1.1 architecture is targeted at 32-bit processors whereas the 2.0 architecture is targeted to the 64-bit processors. Some systems are able to run either kernel. In both cases, the userland is 32-bit. There is the possibility of a 64-bit userland in the future. </para> + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/hppa.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/i386.xml --> +<!-- $Id: i386.xml 56248 2008-10-03 17:07:28Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="i386" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at <ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink +>. This section merely outlines the basics. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>CPU</title> +<para +>Nearly all x86-based (IA-32) processors still in use in personal computers are supported, including all varieties of Intel's "Pentium" series. This also includes 32-bit AMD and VIA (former Cyrix) processors, and processors like the Athlon XP and Intel P4 Xeon. </para +><para +>However, Debian GNU/Linux &releasename; will <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> run on 386 or earlier processors. Despite the architecture name "i386", support for actual 80386 processors (and their clones) was dropped with the Sarge (r3.1) release of Debian<footnote +> <para +> We have long tried to avoid this, but in the end it was necessary due a unfortunate series of issues with the compiler and the kernel, starting with an bug in the C++ ABI provided by GCC. You should still be able to run Debian GNU/Linux on actual 80386 processors if you compile your own kernel and compile all packages from source, but that is beyond the scope of this manual. </para +> </footnote +>. (No version of Linux has ever supported the 286 or earlier chips in the series.) All i486 and later processors are still supported<footnote +> <para +> Many Debian packages will actually run slightly faster on modern computers as a positive side effect of dropping support for these old chips. The i486, introduced in 1989, has three opcodes (bswap, cmpxchg, and xadd) which the i386, introduced in 1986, did not have. Previously, these could not be easily used by most Debian packages; now they can. </para +> </footnote +>. </para> +<note +><para +>If your system has a 64-bit processor from the AMD64 or Intel EM64T families, you will probably want to use the installer for the amd64 architecture instead of the installer for the (32-bit) i386 architecture. </para +></note> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="bus" +><title +>I/O Bus</title> +<para +>The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer must use the ISA, EISA, PCI, PCIe, or VESA Local Bus (VLB, sometimes called the VL bus). Essentially all personal computers sold in recent years use one of these. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/i386.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/ia64.xml --> +<!-- $Id: ia64.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/ia64.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 36732 2006-04-27 09:33:13Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Complete information concerning supported M68000 based (<emphasis +>&architecture;</emphasis +>) systems can be found at the <ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +>Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink +>. This section merely outlines the basics. </para +><para +>The &architecture; port of Linux runs on any 680x0 with a PMMU (Paged Memory Management Unit) and a FPU (floating-point unit). This includes the 68020 with an external 68851 PMMU, the 68030, and better, and excludes the <quote +>EC</quote +> line of 680x0 processors. See the <ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +>Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink +> for complete details. </para +><para +>There are four major supported <emphasis +>&architecture;</emphasis +> flavors: Amiga, Atari, Macintosh and VME machines. Amiga and Atari were the first two systems to which Linux was ported; in keeping, they are also the two most well-supported Debian ports. The Macintosh line is supported incompletely, both by Debian and by the Linux kernel; see <ulink url="&url-m68k-mac;" +>Linux m68k for Macintosh</ulink +> for project status and supported hardware. The BVM and Motorola single board VMEbus computers are the most recent addition to the list of machines supported by Debian. Ports to other &architecture; architectures, such as the Sun3 architecture and NeXT black box, are underway but not yet supported by Debian. </para> + </sect2> + + + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/m68k.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/mips.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mips.xml 55471 2008-08-31 16:30:54Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Debian on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> SGI IP22: this platform includes the SGI machines Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S. Since these machines are very similar, whenever this document refers to the SGI Indy, the Indigo 2 and Challenge S are meant as well. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> SGI IP32: this platform is generally known as SGI O2. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> MIPS Malta: this platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run Debian on MIPS if you don't have the hardware. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from Broadcom based on the dual-core SB1 1250 CPU. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from Broadcom based on the quad-core SB1A 1480 CPU. </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;" +>Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink +>. In the following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +> debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink +>. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>CPU</title> +<para +>On SGI IP22, SGI Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S with R4000, R4400, R4600 and R5000 processors are supported by the Debian installation system on big endian MIPS. On SGI IP32, currently only systems based on the R5000 are supported. The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1 1250 chip with two cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. Similarly, the BCM91480B evaluation board contains an SB1A 1480 chip with four cores which are supported in SMP mode. </para +><para +>Some MIPS machines can be operated in both big and little endian mode. For little endian MIPS, please read the documentation for the mipsel architecture. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/mips.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/mipsel.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mipsel.xml 55471 2008-08-31 16:30:54Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mipsel" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>Debian on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> Cobalt Microserver: only MIPS based Cobalt machines are covered here. This includes the Cobalt Qube 2700 (Qube1), RaQ, Qube2 and RaQ2, and the Gateway Microserver. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> MIPS Malta: this platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run Debian on MIPS if you don't have the hardware. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from Broadcom based on the dual-core SB1 1250 CPU. </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from Broadcom based on the quad-core SB1A 1480 CPU. </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;" +>Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink +>. In the following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;" +> debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink +>. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>CPU/Machine types</title> + +<para +>All MIPS based Cobalt machines are supported. </para +><para +>The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1 1250 chip with two cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. Similarly, the BCM91480B evaluation board contains an SB1A 1480 chip with four cores which are supported in SMP mode. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Supported console options</title> +<para +>Both Cobalt and Broadcom BCM91250A/BCM91480B use 115200 bps. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/mipsel.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 56248 2008-10-03 17:07:28Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para +>For &debian; &release; only the PMac (Power-Macintosh or PowerMac) and PreP subarchitectures are supported. </para> + + <sect3 +><title +>Kernel Flavours</title> + +<para +>There are two flavours of the powerpc kernel in Debian, based on the CPU type: <variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>powerpc</term> +<listitem +><para +>Most systems use this kernel flavour, which supports the PowerPC 601, 603, 604, 740, 750, and 7400 processors. All Apple PowerMac machines up to and including the one marketed as G4 use one of these processors. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>power64</term> +<listitem +><para +>The power64 kernel flavour supports the following CPUs: </para +><para +>The POWER3 processor is used in older IBM 64-bit server systems: known models include the IntelliStation POWER Model 265, the pSeries 610 and 640, and the RS/6000 7044-170, 7043-260, and 7044-270. </para +><para +>The POWER4 processor is used in more recent IBM 64-bit server systems: known models include the pSeries 615, 630, 650, 655, 670, and 690. </para +><para +>Systems using the Apple G5 (PPC970FX processor) are also based on the POWER4 architecture, and use this kernel flavour. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<!-- +<varlistentry> +<term +>prep</term> +<listitem +><para> + +This kernel flavour supports the PReP subarchitecture. + +</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>apus</term> +<listitem +><para> + +This kernel flavour supports the Amiga Power-UP System, though it is +currently disabled. + +</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +--> +</variablelist> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Power Macintosh (pmac) subarchitecture</title> + +<para +>Apple (and briefly a few other manufacturers — Power Computing, for example) made a series of Macintosh computers based on the PowerPC processor. For purposes of architecture support, they are categorized as NuBus (not supported by Debian), OldWorld, and NewWorld. </para +><para +>OldWorld systems are most Power Macintoshes with a floppy drive and a PCI bus. Most 603, 603e, 604, and 604e based Power Macintoshes are OldWorld machines. Those pre-iMac PowerPC models from Apple use a four digit naming scheme, except for the beige colored G3 systems, which are also OldWorld. </para +><para +>The so called NewWorld PowerMacs are any PowerMacs in translucent colored plastic cases and later models. That includes all iMacs, iBooks, G4 systems, blue colored G3 systems, and most PowerBooks manufactured in and after 1999. The NewWorld PowerMacs are also known for using the <quote +>ROM in RAM</quote +> system for MacOS, and were manufactured from mid-1998 onwards. </para +><para +>Specifications for Apple hardware are available at <ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.html" +>AppleSpec</ulink +>, and, for older hardware, <ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.legacy/index.html" +>AppleSpec Legacy</ulink +>. </para +><para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="3"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<colspec colname="c3"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2" +>Model Name/Number</entry> + <entry +>Generation</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="27" +>Apple</entry> + <entry +>iMac Bondi Blue, 5 Flavors, Slot Loading</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>iMac Summer 2000, Early 2001</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>iMac G5</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>iBook, iBook SE, iBook Dual USB</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>iBook2</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>iBook G4</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh Blue and White (B&W) G3</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh G4 PCI, AGP, Cube</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh G4 Gigabit Ethernet</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh G4 Digital Audio, Quicksilver</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh G5</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook G3 FireWire Pismo (2000)</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook G3 Lombard (1999)</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook G4 Titanium</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook G4 Aluminum</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Xserve G5</entry> + <entry +>NewWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Performa 4400, 54xx, 5500</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Performa 6360, 6400, 6500</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh 4400, 5400</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh 7200, 7300, 7500, 7600</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh 8200, 8500, 8600</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh 9500, 9600</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh (Beige) G3 Minitower</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power Macintosh (Beige) Desktop, All-in-One</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook 2400, 3400, 3500</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerBook G3 Wallstreet (1998)</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Twentieth Anniversary Macintosh</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Workgroup Server 7250, 7350, 8550, 9650, G3</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1" +>Power Computing</entry> + <entry +>PowerBase, PowerTower / Pro, PowerWave</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>PowerCenter / Pro, PowerCurve</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>UMAX</entry> + <entry +>C500, C600, J700, S900</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>APS</entry> + <entry +>APS Tech M*Power 604e/2000</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>Motorola</entry> + <entry +>Starmax 3000, 4000, 5000, 5500</entry> + <entry +>OldWorld</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>PReP subarchitecture</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2" +>Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="4" +>Motorola</entry> + <entry +>Firepower, PowerStack Series E, PowerStack II</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MPC 7xx, 8xx</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MTX, MTX+</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MVME2300(SC)/24xx/26xx/27xx/36xx/46xx</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>MCP(N)750</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3" +>IBM RS/6000</entry> + <entry +>40P, 43P</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Power 830/850/860 (6070, 6050)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>6030, 7025, 7043</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>p640</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>CHRP subarchitecture (unsupported)</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2" +>Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>IBM RS/6000</entry> + <entry +>B50, 43P-150, 44P</entry> +</row> +<row> + <entry +>Genesi</entry> + <entry +>Pegasos I, Pegasos II</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>APUS subarchitecture (unsupported)</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2" +>Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>Amiga Power-UP Systems (APUS)</entry> + <entry +>A1200, A3000, A4000</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Nubus PowerMac subarchitecture (unsupported)</title> + +<para +>NuBus systems are not currently supported by Debian/powerpc. The monolithic Linux/PPC kernel architecture does not have support for these machines; instead, one must use the MkLinux Mach microkernel, which Debian does not yet support. These include the following: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> Power Macintosh 6100, 7100, 8100 </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Performa 5200, 6200, 6300 </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Powerbook 1400, 2300, and 5300 </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Workgroup Server 6150, 8150, 9150 </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> A linux kernel for these machines and limited support is available at <ulink url="http://nubus-pmac.sourceforge.net/" +></ulink +>. </para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Non-PowerPC Macs</title> + +<para +>Macintosh computers using the 680x0 series of processors are <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> in the PowerPC family but are instead m68k machines. Those models start with <quote +>Mac II</quote +> series, go on to the <quote +>LC</quote +> family, then the Centris series, and culminate in the Quadras and Performas. These models usually have a Roman numeral or 3-digit model number such as Mac IIcx, LCIII or Quadra 950. </para +><para +>This model range started with the Mac II (Mac II, IIx, IIcx, IIci, IIsi, IIvi, IIvx, IIfx), then the LC (LC, LCII, III, III+, 475, 520, 550, 575, 580, 630), then the Mac TV, then the Centris (610, 650, 660AV), the Quadra (605, 610, 630, 650, 660AV, 700, 800, 840AV, 900, 950), and finally the Performa 200-640CD. </para +><para +>In laptops, it started with the Mac Portable, then the PowerBook 100-190cs and the PowerBook Duo 210-550c (excluding PowerBook 500 which is Nubus, please see the section above). </para> + + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/powerpc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/s390.xml --> +<!-- $Id: s390.xml 39895 2006-08-16 20:28:37Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="s390" +><title +>S/390 and zSeries machine types</title> +<para +>Complete information regarding supported S/390 and zSeries machines can be found in IBM's Redbook <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf" +> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink +> in chapter 2.1 or at the <ulink url="http://www-128.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/index.html" +>zSeries page at the developerWorks</ulink +>. In short, G5, Multiprise 3000, G6 and all zSeries are fully supported; Multiprise 2000, G3 and G4 machines are supported with IEEE floating point emulation and thus degraded performance. </para> + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/s390.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported/sparc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sparc.xml 49849 2007-10-21 12:12:33Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="sparc-cpus"> + <title +>CPU and Main Boards Support</title> +<para +>Sparc-based hardware is divided into a number of different subarchitectures, identified by one of the following names: sun4, sun4c, sun4d, sun4m, sun4u or sun4v. The following list describes what machines they include and what level of support may be expected for each of them. </para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>sun4, sun4c, sun4d, sun4m</term> + +<listitem +><para +>None of these 32-bit sparc subarchitectures (sparc32) is supported. For a complete list of machines belonging to these subarchitectures, please consult the <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SPARCstation" +>Wikipedia SPARCstation page</ulink +>. </para +><para +>The last Debian release to support sparc32 was Etch, but even then only for sun4m systems. Support for the other 32-bits subarchitectures had already been discontinued after earlier releases. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>sun4u</term> + +<listitem +><para +>This subarchitecture includes all 64-bit machines (sparc64) based on the UltraSparc processor and its clones. Most of the machines are well supported, even though for some you may experience problems booting from CD due to firmware or bootloader bugs (this problem may be worked around by using netbooting). Use the sparc64 or sparc64-smp kernel in UP and SMP configurations respectively. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>sun4v</term> + +<listitem +><para +>This is the newest addition to the Sparc family, which includes machines based on the Niagara multi-core CPUs. At the moment such CPUs are only available in T1000 and T2000 servers by Sun, and are well supported. Use the sparc64-smp kernel. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para +>Note that Fujitsu's SPARC64 CPUs used in PRIMEPOWER family of servers are not supported due to lack of support in the Linux kernel. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported/sparc.xml --> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="laptops" +><title +>Laptops</title> +<para +>Laptops are also supported and nowadays most laptops work out of the box. In case a laptop contains specialized or proprietary hardware, some specific functions may not be supported. To see if your particular laptop works well with GNU/Linux, see for example the <ulink url="&url-x86-laptop;" +>Linux Laptop pages</ulink +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="defaults-smp"> + <title +>Multiple Processors</title> +<para +>Multiprocessor support — also called <quote +>symmetric multiprocessing</quote +> or SMP — is available for this architecture. The standard Debian &release; kernel image has been compiled with SMP support. The standard kernel is also usable on non-SMP systems, but has a slight overhead which will cause a small reduction in performance. For normal system use this will hardly be noticable. </para +><para +>In order to optimize the kernel for single CPU systems, you'll have to replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you disable SMP is to deselect <quote +>&smp-config-option;</quote +> in the <quote +>&smp-config-section;</quote +> section of the kernel config. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="smp-alternatives"> +<title +>Multiple Processors</title> + +<para +>Multiprocessor support — also called <quote +>symmetric multiprocessing</quote +> or SMP — is available for this architecture. The standard Debian &release; kernel image has been compiled with <firstterm +>SMP-alternatives</firstterm +> support. This means that the kernel will detect the number of processors (or processor cores) and will automatically deactivate SMP on uniprocessor systems. </para +><para arch="i386" +>The 486 flavour of the Debian kernel image packages for &arch-title; is not compiled with SMP support. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-smp"> + <title +>Multiple Processors</title> +<para +>Multiprocessor support — also called <quote +>symmetric multiprocessing</quote +> or SMP — is available for this architecture. However, the standard Debian &release; kernel image does not support SMP. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use the first CPU. </para +><para +>In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you'll have to replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select <quote +>&smp-config-option;</quote +> in the <quote +>&smp-config-section;</quote +> section of the kernel config. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-smp-sometimes"> + <title +>Multiple Processors</title> +<para +>Multiprocessor support — also called <quote +>symmetric multiprocessing</quote +> or SMP — is available for this architecture, and is supported by a precompiled Debian kernel image. Depending on your install media, this SMP-capable kernel may or may not be installed by default. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use the first CPU. </para +><para +>In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you should check to see if a kernel package that supports SMP is installed, and if not, choose an appropriate kernel package. </para +><para +>You can also build your own customized kernel to support SMP. You can find a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select <quote +>&smp-config-option;</quote +> in the <quote +>&smp-config-section;</quote +> section of the kernel config. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="gfx" arch="not-s390" +><title +>Graphics Card Support</title> +<para arch="x86" +>You should be using a VGA-compatible display interface for the console terminal. Nearly every modern display card is compatible with VGA. Ancient standards such CGA, MDA, or HGA should also work, assuming you do not require X11 support. Note that X11 is not used during the installation process described in this document. </para +><para +>Debian's support for graphical interfaces is determined by the underlying support found in X.Org's X11 system. Most AGP, PCI and PCIe video cards work under X.Org. Details on supported graphics buses, cards, monitors, and pointing devices can be found at <ulink url="&url-xorg;" +></ulink +>. Debian &release; ships with X.Org version &x11ver;. </para +><para arch="mips" +>The X.Org X Window System is only supported on the SGI Indy and the O2. The Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards have standard 3.3v PCI slots and support VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;" +>compatibility listing</ulink +> for Broadcom evaluation boards is available. </para +><para arch="mipsel" +>The Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards have standard 3.3v PCI slots and support VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;" +>compatibility listing</ulink +> for Broadcom evaluation boards is available. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>Most graphics options commonly found on Sparc-based machines are supported. X.org graphics drivers are available for sunbw2, suncg14, suncg3, suncg6, sunleo and suntcx framebuffers, Creator3D and Elite3D cards (sunffb driver), PGX24/PGX64 ATI-based video cards (ati driver), and PermediaII-based cards (glint driver). To use an Elite3D card with X.org you additionally need to install the <classname +>afbinit</classname +> package, and read the documentation included with it on how to activate the card. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>It is not uncommon for a Sparc machine to have two graphics cards in a default configuration. In such a case there is a possibility that the Linux kernel will not direct its output to the card initially used by the firmware. The lack of output on the graphical console may then be mistaken for a hang (usually the last message seen on console is 'Booting Linux...'). One possible solution is to physically remove one of the video cards; another option is to disable one of the cards using a kernel boot parameter. Also, if graphical output is not required or desired, serial console may be used as an alternative. On some systems use of serial console can be activated automatically by disconnecting the keyboard before booting the system. </para> + </sect2> + + +<!-- Start of file hardware/network-cards.xml --> +<!-- $Id: network-cards.xml 56450 2008-10-17 09:58:39Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 id="network-cards"> + <title +>Network Connectivity Hardware</title> +<para +>Almost any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should also be supported by the installation system; modular drivers should normally be loaded automatically. <phrase arch="x86" +>This includes most PCI and PCMCIA cards.</phrase +> <phrase arch="i386" +>Many older ISA cards are supported as well.</phrase +> <phrase arch="m68k" +>Again, see <ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +></ulink +> for complete details.</phrase +> </para +><para arch="sparc" +>This includes a lot of generic PCI cards (for systems that have PCI) and the following NICs from Sun: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Sun LANCE </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Sun Happy Meal </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Sun BigMAC </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Sun QuadEthernet </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>MyriCOM Gigabit Ethernet </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para arch="s390" +>The list of supported network devices is: <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +>Channel to Channel (CTC) and ESCON connection (real or emulated) </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>OSA-2 Token Ring/Ethernet and OSA-Express Fast Ethernet (non-QDIO) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>OSA-Express in QDIO mode, HiperSockets and Guest-LANs </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + +<para arch="arm" +>On &arch-title;, most built-in Ethernet devices are supported and modules for additional PCI and USB devices are provided. The major exception is the IXP4xx platform (featuring devices such as the Linksys NSLU2) which needs a proprietary microcode for the operation of its built-in Ethernet device. Unofficial images for Linksys NSLU2 with this proprietary microcode can be obtained from the <ulink url="&url-slug-firmware;" +>Slug-Firmware site</ulink +>. </para +><para arch="x86" +>ISDN is supported, but not during the installation. </para> + + <sect3 condition="supports-wireless" id="nics-wireless"> + <title +>Wireless Network Cards</title> +<para +>Wireless networking is in general supported as well and a growing number of wireless adapters is supported by the official Linux kernel, although many of them do require firmware to be loaded. Wireless NICs that are not supported by the official Linux kernel can generally be made to work under &debian;, but are not supported during the installation. </para +><para +>The use of wireless networking during installation is still under development and whether it will work depends on the type of adaptor and the configuration of your wireless access point. If there is no other NIC you can use during the installation, it is still possible to install &debian; using a full CD-ROM or DVD image. Select the option to not configure a network and install using only the packages available from the CD/DVD. You can then install the driver and firmware you need after the installation is completed (after the reboot) and configure your network manually. </para +><para +>In some cases the driver you need may not be available as a Debian package. You will then have to look if there is source code available in the internet and compile the driver yourself. How to do this is outside the scope of this manual. <phrase arch="x86" +>If no Linux driver is available, your last resort is to use the <classname +>ndiswrapper</classname +> package, which allows you to use a Windows driver.</phrase +> </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="sparc" id="nics-sparc-trouble"> + <title +>Known Issues for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>There are a couple of issues with specific network cards that are worth mentioning here. </para> + + <sect4 +><title +>Conflict between tulip and dfme drivers</title> +<!-- BTS: #334104; may also affect other arches, but most common on sparc --> +<para +>There are various PCI network cards that have the same PCI identification, but are supported by related, but different drivers. Some cards work with the <literal +>tulip</literal +> driver, others with the <literal +>dfme</literal +> driver. Because they have the same identification, the kernel cannot distinguish between them and it is not certain which driver will be loaded. If this happens to be the wrong one, the NIC may not work, or work badly. </para +><para +>This is a common problem on Netra systems with a Davicom (DEC-Tulip compatible) NIC. In that case the <literal +>tulip</literal +> driver is probably the correct one. You can prevent this issue by blacklisting the wrong driver module as described in <xref linkend="module-blacklist"/>. </para +><para +>An alternative solution during the installation is to switch to a shell and unload the wrong driver module using <userinput +>modprobe -r <replaceable +>module</replaceable +></userinput +> (or both, if they are both loaded). After that you can load the correct module using <userinput +>modprobe <replaceable +>module</replaceable +></userinput +>. Note that the wrong module may then still be loaded when the system is rebooted. </para> + </sect4> + + <sect4 +><title +>Sun B100 blade</title> +<!-- BTS: #384549; should be checked for kernels +>2.6.18 --> +<para +>The <literal +>cassini</literal +> network driver does not work with Sun B100 blade systems. </para> + </sect4> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/network-cards.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/supported-peripherals.xml --> +<!-- $Id: supported-peripherals.xml 56244 2008-10-03 16:05:55Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 id="supported-peripherals"> + <title +>Peripherals and Other Hardware</title> +<para arch="not-s390" +>Linux supports a large variety of hardware devices such as mice, printers, scanners, PCMCIA and USB devices. However, most of these devices are not required while installing the system. </para +><para arch="x86" +>USB hardware generally works fine, only some USB keyboards may require additional configuration (see <xref linkend="hardware-issues"/>). </para +><para arch="x86" +>Again, see the <ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink +> to determine whether your specific hardware is supported by Linux. </para +><para arch="s390" +>Package installations from XPRAM and tape are not supported by this system. All packages that you want to install need to be available on a DASD or over the network using NFS, HTTP or FTP. </para +><para arch="mips" +>The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation board features four 64 bit PCI slots. </para +><para arch="mipsel" +>The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation board features four 64 bit PCI slots. The Cobalt RaQ has no support for additional devices but the Qube has one PCI slot. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file hardware/supported-peripherals.xml --> + + </sect1> + + <sect1 arch="not-s390" id="hardware-firmware"> + <title +>Devices Requiring Firmware</title> +<para +>Besides the availability of a device driver, some hardware also requires so-called <firstterm +>firmware</firstterm +> or <firstterm +>microcode</firstterm +> to be loaded into the device before it can become operational. This is most common for network interface cards (especially wireless NICs), but for example some USB devices and even some hard disk controllers also require firmware. </para +><para +>In most cases firmware is non-free according to the criteria used by the &debian; project and thus cannot be included in the main distribution or in the installation system. If the device driver itself is included in the distribution and if &debian; legally can distribute the firmware, it will often be available as a separate package from the non-free section of the archive. </para +><para +>However, this does not mean that such hardware cannot be used during an installation. Starting with &debian; 5.0, &d-i; supports loading firmware files or packages containing firmware from a removable medium, such as a floppy disk or USB stick. See <xref linkend="loading-firmware"/> for detailed information on how to load firmware files or packages during the installation. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file hardware/hardware-supported.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/buying-hardware.xml --> +<!-- $Id: buying-hardware.xml 56244 2008-10-03 16:05:55Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 arch="not-s390" +><title +>Purchasing Hardware Specifically for GNU/Linux</title> + +<para +>There are several vendors, who ship systems with Debian or other distributions of GNU/Linux <ulink url="&url-pre-installed;" +>pre-installed</ulink +>. You might pay more for the privilege, but it does buy a level of peace of mind, since you can be sure that the hardware is well-supported by GNU/Linux. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>Unfortunately, it's quite rare to find any vendor shipping new &arch-title; machines at all. </para +><para arch="x86" +>If you do have to buy a machine with Windows bundled, carefully read the software license that comes with Windows; you may be able to reject the license and obtain a rebate from your vendor. Searching the Internet for <quote +>windows refund</quote +> may get you some useful information to help with that. </para +><para +>Whether or not you are purchasing a system with Linux bundled, or even a used system, it is still important to check that your hardware is supported by the Linux kernel. Check if your hardware is listed in the references found above. Let your salesperson (if any) know that you're shopping for a Linux system. Support Linux-friendly hardware vendors. </para> + + <sect2 +><title +>Avoid Proprietary or Closed Hardware</title> +<para +>Some hardware manufacturers simply won't tell us how to write drivers for their hardware. Others won't allow us access to the documentation without a non-disclosure agreement that would prevent us from releasing the Linux source code. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>Another example is the proprietary hardware in the older Macintosh line. In fact, no specifications or documentation have ever been released for any Macintosh hardware, most notably the ADB controller (used by the mouse and keyboard), the floppy controller, and all acceleration and CLUT manipulation of the video hardware (though we do now support CLUT manipulation on nearly all internal video chips). In a nutshell, this explains why the Macintosh Linux port lags behind other Linux ports. </para +><para +>Since we haven't been granted access to the documentation on these devices, they simply won't work under Linux. You can help by asking the manufacturers of such hardware to release the documentation. If enough people ask, they will realize that the free software community is an important market. </para> +</sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="x86" +><title +>Windows-specific Hardware</title> +<para +>A disturbing trend is the proliferation of Windows-specific modems and printers. In some cases these are specially designed to be operated by the Microsoft Windows operating system and bear the legend <quote +>WinModem</quote +> or <quote +>Made especially for Windows-based computers</quote +>. This is generally done by removing the embedded processors of the hardware and shifting the work they do over to a Windows driver that is run by your computer's main CPU. This strategy makes the hardware less expensive, but the savings are often <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> passed on to the user and this hardware may even be more expensive than equivalent devices that retain their embedded intelligence. </para +><para +>You should avoid Windows-specific hardware for two reasons. The first is that the manufacturers do not generally make the resources available to write a Linux driver. Generally, the hardware and software interface to the device is proprietary, and documentation is not available without a non-disclosure agreement, if it is available at all. This precludes it being used for free software, since free software writers disclose the source code of their programs. The second reason is that when devices like these have had their embedded processors removed, the operating system must perform the work of the embedded processors, often at <emphasis +>real-time</emphasis +> priority, and thus the CPU is not available to run your programs while it is driving these devices. Since the typical Windows user does not multi-process as intensively as a Linux user, the manufacturers hope that the Windows user simply won't notice the burden this hardware places on their CPU. However, any multi-processing operating system, even Windows 2000 or XP, suffers from degraded performance when peripheral manufacturers skimp on the embedded processing power of their hardware. </para +><para +>You can help improve this situation by encouraging these manufacturers to release the documentation and other resources necessary for us to program their hardware, but the best strategy is simply to avoid this sort of hardware until it is listed as working in the <ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink +>. </para> +</sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file hardware/buying-hardware.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/installation-media.xml --> +<!-- $Id: installation-media.xml 56150 2008-09-26 10:48:26Z lunar $ --> + + <sect1 id="installation-media"> + <title +>Installation Media</title> + +<para +>This section will help you determine which different media types you can use to install Debian. For example, if you have a floppy disk drive on your machine, it can be used to install Debian. There is a whole chapter devoted to media, <xref linkend="install-methods"/>, which lists the advantages and disadvantages of each media type. You may want to refer back to this page once you reach that section. </para> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" +><title +>Floppies</title> +<para +>In some cases, you'll have to do your first boot from floppy disks. Generally, all you will need is a high-density (1440 kilobytes) 3.5 inch floppy drive. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>For CHRP, floppy support is currently broken. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>CD-ROM/DVD-ROM</title> + +<note +><para +>Whenever you see <quote +>CD-ROM</quote +> in this manual, it applies to both CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs, because both technologies are really the same from the operating system's point of view, except for some very old nonstandard CD-ROM drives which are neither SCSI nor IDE/ATAPI. </para +></note +><para +>CD-ROM based installation is supported for some architectures. On machines which support bootable CD-ROMs, you should be able to do a completely <phrase arch="not-s390" +>floppy-less</phrase +> <phrase arch="s390" +>tape-less</phrase +> installation. Even if your system doesn't support booting from a CD-ROM, you can use the CD-ROM in conjunction with the other techniques to install your system, once you've booted up by other means; see <xref linkend="boot-installer"/>. </para +><para arch="x86" +>SCSI, SATA and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported. The <ulink url="&url-cd-howto;" +>Linux CD-ROM HOWTO</ulink +> contains in-depth information on using CD-ROMs with Linux. </para +><para arch="x86" +>USB CD-ROM drives are also supported, as are FireWire devices that are supported by the ohci1394 and sbp2 drivers. </para +><para arch="alpha" +>Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on &arch-title;, as long as the controller is supported by the SRM console. This rules out many add-on controller cards, but most integrated IDE and SCSI chips and controller cards that were provided by the manufacturer can be expected to work. To find out whether your device is supported from the SRM console, see the <ulink url="&url-srm-howto;" +>SRM HOWTO</ulink +>. </para +><para arch="arm" +>IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on all ARM machines. </para +><para arch="mips" +>On SGI machines, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the SCSI CD-ROM drives sold on the PC market do not have this capability. If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled <quote +>Unix/PC</quote +> or <quote +>512/2048</quote +>, place it in the <quote +>Unix</quote +> or <quote +>512</quote +> position. To start the install, simply choose the <quote +>System installation</quote +> entry in the firmware. The Broadcom BCM91250A supports standard IDE devices, including CD-ROM drives, but CD images for this platform are currently not provided because the firmware doesn't recognize CD drives. In order to install Debian on an Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation board, you need an PCI IDE, SATA or SCSI card. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Hard Disk</title> + +<para +>Booting the installation system directly from a hard disk is another option for many architectures. This will require some other operating system to load the installer onto the hard disk. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>In fact, installation from your local disk is the preferred installation technique for most &architecture; machines. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>Although the &arch-title; does not allow booting from SunOS (Solaris), you can install from a SunOS partition (UFS slices). </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" +><title +>USB Memory Stick</title> + +<para +>Many Debian boxes need their floppy and/or CD-ROM drives only for setting up the system and for rescue purposes. If you operate some servers, you will probably already have thought about omitting those drives and using an USB memory stick for installing and (when necessary) for recovering the system. This is also useful for small systems which have no room for unnecessary drives. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Network</title> + +<para +>The network can be used during the installation to retrieve files needed for the installation. Whether the network is used or not depends on the installation method you choose and your answers to certain questions that will be asked during the installation. The installation system supports most types of network connections (including PPPoE, but not ISDN or PPP), via either HTTP or FTP. After the installation is completed, you can also configure your system to use ISDN and PPP. </para +><para condition="supports-tftp" +>You can also <emphasis +>boot</emphasis +> the installation system over the network. <phrase arch="mips" +>This is the preferred installation technique for &arch-title;.</phrase +> </para +><para condition="supports-nfsroot" +>Diskless installation, using network booting from a local area network and NFS-mounting of all local filesystems, is another option. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Un*x or GNU system</title> + +<para +>If you are running another Unix-like system, you could use it to install &debian; without using the &d-i; described in the rest of this manual. This kind of install may be useful for users with otherwise unsupported hardware or on hosts which can't afford downtime. If you are interested in this technique, skip to the <xref linkend="linux-upgrade"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Supported Storage Systems</title> + +<para +>The Debian boot disks contain a kernel which is built to maximize the number of systems it runs on. Unfortunately, this makes for a larger kernel, which includes many drivers that won't be used for your machine (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/> to learn how to build your own kernel). Support for the widest possible range of devices is desirable in general, to ensure that Debian can be installed on the widest array of hardware. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Generally, the Debian installation system includes support for floppies, IDE (also known as PATA) drives, IDE floppies, parallel port IDE devices, SATA and SCSI controllers and drives, USB, and FireWire. The supported file systems include FAT, Win-32 FAT extensions (VFAT) and NTFS. </para +><para arch="i386" +>Disk interfaces that emulate the <quote +>AT</quote +> hard disk interface — often called MFM, RLL, IDE, or PATA — are supported. SATA and SCSI disk controllers from many different manufacturers are supported. See the <ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink +> for more details. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>Pretty much all storage systems supported by the Linux kernel are supported by the Debian installation system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support floppies on the Macintosh at all, and the Debian installation system doesn't support floppies for Amigas. Also supported on the Atari is the Macintosh HFS system, and AFFS as a module. Macs support the Atari (FAT) file system. Amigas support the FAT file system, and HFS as a module. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. The following SCSI drivers are supported in the default kernel: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> Sparc ESP </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> PTI Qlogic,ISP </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> Adaptec AIC7xxx </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> NCR and Symbios 53C8XX </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> IDE systems (such as the UltraSPARC 5) are also supported. See <ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;" +>Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink +> for more information on SPARC hardware supported by the Linux kernel. </para +><para arch="alpha" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. This includes both SCSI and IDE disks. Note, however, that on many systems, the SRM console is unable to boot from IDE drives, and the Jensen is unable to boot from floppies. (see <ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;" +></ulink +> for more information on booting the Jensen) </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support floppies on CHRP systems at all. </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support the floppy drive. </para +><para arch="mips" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. </para +><para arch="s390" +>Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. This means that FBA and ECKD DASDs are supported with the old Linux disk layout (ldl) and the new common S/390 disk layout (cdl). </para> + + </sect2> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file hardware/installation-media.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml --> +<!-- $Id: memory-disk-requirements.xml 52960 2008-04-30 06:22:01Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="memory-disk-requirements"> + <title +>Memory and Disk Space Requirements</title> + +<para +>You must have at least &minimum-memory; of memory and &minimum-fs-size; of hard disk space to perform a normal installation. Note that these are fairly minimal numbers. For more realistic figures, see <xref linkend="minimum-hardware-reqts"/>. </para +><para +>Installation on systems with less memory<footnote condition="gtk" +> <para +> Installation images that support the graphical installer require more memory than images that support only the textual installer and should not be used on systems with less than &minimum-memory; of memory. If there is a choice between booting the regular and the graphical installer, the former should be selected. </para +> </footnote +> or disk space available may be possible but is only advised for experienced users. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>On the Amiga the size of FastRAM is relevant towards the total memory requirements. Also, using Zorro cards with 16-bit RAM is not supported; you'll need 32-bit RAM. The <command +>amiboot</command +> program can be used to disable 16-bit RAM; see the <ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +>Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink +>. Recent kernels should disable 16-bit RAM automatically. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>On the Atari, both ST-RAM and Fast RAM (TT-RAM) are used by Linux. Many users have reported problems running the kernel itself in Fast RAM, so the Atari bootstrap will place the kernel in ST-RAM. The minimum requirement for ST-RAM is 2 MB. You will need an additional 12 MB or more of TT-RAM. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>On the Macintosh, care should be taken on machines with RAM-based video (RBV). The RAM segment at physical address 0 is used as screen memory, making the default load position for the kernel unavailable. The alternate RAM segment used for kernel and RAMdisk must be at least 4 MB. </para +><para arch="m68k"> + +<emphasis condition="FIXME" +>FIXME: is this still true?</emphasis> + +</para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file hardware/hardware.xml --> diff --git a/nb/howto/installation-howto.xml b/nb/howto/installation-howto.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef7970a21 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/howto/installation-howto.xml @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ +<!-- Start of file howto/installation-howto.xml --> +<!-- $Id: installation-howto.xml 56151 2008-09-26 10:49:04Z lunar $ --> + +<appendix id="installation-howto"> +<title +>Installation Howto</title> + +<para +>This document describes how to install &debian; &releasename; for the &arch-title; (<quote +>&architecture;</quote +>) with the new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed explanations in other parts of this document. </para> + + <sect1 id="howto-preliminaries"> + <title +>Preliminaries</title> +<para +><phrase condition="unofficial-build" +> The debian-installer is still in a beta state. </phrase +> If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to <xref linkend="submit-bug"/> for instructions on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on IRC (#debian-boot on the OFTC network). </para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-getting-images"> + <title +>Booting the installer</title> +<para +><phrase condition="unofficial-build" +> For some quick links to CD images, check out the <ulink url="&url-d-i;" +> &d-i; home page</ulink +>. </phrase +> The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the <ulink url="&url-debian-cd;" +>Debian CD page</ulink +>. For more information on where to get CDs, see <xref linkend="official-cdrom"/>. </para +><para +>Some installation methods require other images than CD images. <phrase condition="unofficial-build" +> The <ulink url="&url-d-i;" +>&d-i; home page</ulink +> has links to other images. </phrase +> <xref linkend="where-files"/> explains how to find images on Debian mirrors. </para +><para +>The subsections below will give the details about which images you should get for each possible means of installation. </para> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-cdrom"> + <title +>CDROM</title> + +<para +>There are two different netinst CD images which can be used to install &releasename; with the &d-i;. These images are intended to boot from CD and install additional packages over a network, hence the name 'netinst'. The difference between the two images is that on the full netinst image the base packages are included, whereas you have to download these from the web if you are using the business card image. If you'd rather, you can get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You only need the first CD of the set. </para +><para +>Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. <phrase arch="x86" +>To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS configuration, as explained in <xref linkend="bios-setup"/>.</phrase +> <phrase arch="powerpc" +> To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the <keycap +>c</keycap +> key while booting. See <xref linkend="boot-cd"/> for other ways to boot from CD. </phrase +> </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="howto-getting-images-floppy"> + <title +>Floppy</title> +<para +>If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install Debian. You need the <filename +>floppy/boot.img</filename +>, the <filename +>floppy/root.img</filename +> and one or more of the driver disks. </para +><para +>The boot floppy is the one with <filename +>boot.img</filename +> on it. This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — use the one with <filename +>root.img</filename +> on it. </para +><para +>If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need the <filename +>floppy/net-drivers-1.img</filename +>. For PCMCIA or USB networking, and some less common network cards, you will also need a second driver floppy, <filename +>floppy/net-drivers-2.img</filename +>. </para +><para +>If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use <filename +>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename +> on a driver disk to complete the install using the CD. </para +><para +>Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for lots of bad disks (see <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies"/>). Each <filename +>.img</filename +> file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means (see <xref linkend="create-floppy"/> for details). Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" id="howto-getting-images-usb"> + <title +>USB memory stick</title> +<para +>It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For example a USB keychain can make a handy Debian install medium that you can take with you anywhere. </para +><para +>The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download <filename +>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename +>, and use gunzip to extract the 256 MB image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which must be at least 256 mb in size. Of course this will destroy anything already on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT filesystem on it. Next, download a Debian netinst CD image, and copy that file to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in <literal +>.iso</literal +>. </para +><para +>There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory sticks. For details, see <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot from a <quote +>removable drive</quote +> or even a <quote +>USB-ZIP</quote +> to get it to boot from the USB device. For helpful hints and details, see <xref linkend="usb-boot"/>. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Booting Macintosh systems from USB storage devices involves manual use of Open Firmware. For directions, see <xref linkend="usb-boot"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-netboot"> + <title +>Booting from network</title> +<para +>It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. The files in <filename +>netboot/</filename +> can be used to netboot &d-i;. </para +><para arch="x86" +>The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the file <filename +>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename +> into <filename +>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename +> or wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass filename <filename +>/pxelinux.0</filename +> to clients, and with luck everything will just work. For detailed instructions, see <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-hard-disk"> + <title +>Booting from hard disk</title> +<para +>It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download <filename +>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename +>, <filename +>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename +>, and a Debian CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure that the CD image has a filename ending in <literal +>.iso</literal +>. Now it's just a matter of booting linux with the initrd. <phrase arch="x86" +> <xref linkend="boot-initrd"/> explains one way to do it. </phrase +> </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation"> +<title +>Installation</title> +<para +>Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press &enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot methods and parameters (see <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>). </para +><para +>After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to select your country, with the choices including countries where your language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the countries in the world is available. </para +><para +>You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless you know better. </para +><para +>Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc. </para +><para +>Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually. </para +><para +>The next step is setting up your clock and time zone. The installer will try to contact a time server on the Internet to ensure the clock is set correctly. The time zone is based on the country selected earlier and the installer will only ask to select one if a country has multiple zones. </para +><para +>Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or available free space on a drive (see <xref linkend="partman-auto"/>). This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry. If you do not want to autopartition, choose <guimenuitem +>Manual</guimenuitem +> from the menu. </para +><para arch="x86" +>If you have an existing DOS or Windows partition that you want to preserve, be very careful with automatic partitioning. If you choose manual partitioning, you can use the installer to resize existing FAT or NTFS partitions to create room for the Debian install: simply select the partition and specify its new size. </para +><para +>On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be able to choose <guimenuitem +>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem +> from the menu to use what it set up. Remember to assign at least one partition for swap space and to mount a partition on <filename +>/</filename +>. For more detailed information on how to use the partitioner, please refer to <xref linkend="di-partition"/>; the appendix <xref linkend="partitioning"/> has more general information about partitioning. </para +><para +>Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel. </para +><para +>The base system that was installed earlier is a working, but very minimal installation. To make the system more functional the next step allows you to install additional packages by selecting tasks. Before packages can be installed <classname +>apt</classname +> needs to be configured as that defines from where the packages will be retrieved. The <quote +>Standard system</quote +> task will be selected by default and should normally be installed. Select the <quote +>Desktop environment</quote +> task if you would like to have a graphical desktop after the installation. See <xref linkend="pkgsel"/> for additional information about this step. </para +><para +>Installation of the base system is followed by setting up user accounts. By default you will need to provide a password for the <quote +>root</quote +> (administrator) account and information necessary to create one regular user account. </para +><para +>The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu and let you know. <phrase arch="x86" +>By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. </phrase +> </para +><para +>&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the newly installed system and allow you to log in. This is explained in <xref linkend="boot-new"/>. </para +><para +>If you need more information on the install process, see <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. </para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation-report"> + <title +>Send us an installation report</title> +<para +>If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, please take time to provide us with a report. The simplest way to do so is to install the reportbug package (<command +>aptitude install reportbug</command +>), configure <classname +>reportbug</classname +> as explained in <xref linkend="mail-outgoing"/>, and run <command +>reportbug installation-reports</command +>. </para +><para +>If you did not complete the install, you probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; if the install completely fails, see <xref linkend="problem-report"/>. </para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation-finally"> + <title +>And finally…</title> +<para +>We hope that your Debian installation is pleasant and that you find Debian useful. You might want to read <xref linkend="post-install"/>. </para> + </sect1> +</appendix> +<!-- End of file howto/installation-howto.xml --> diff --git a/nb/install-methods/install-methods.xml b/nb/install-methods/install-methods.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3662a4b86 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/install-methods/install-methods.xml @@ -0,0 +1,1753 @@ +<!-- Start of file install-methods/install-methods.xml --> +<!-- $Id: install-methods.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<chapter id="install-methods"> + <title +>Obtaining System Installation Media</title> + + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/official-cdrom.xml --> +<!-- $Id: official-cdrom.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="official-cdrom"> + <title +>Official &debian; CD-ROM Sets</title> +<para +>By far the easiest way to install &debian; is from an Official Debian CD-ROM Set. You can buy a set from a vendor (see the <ulink url="&url-debian-cd-vendors;" +>CD vendors page</ulink +>). You may also download the CD-ROM images from a Debian mirror and make your own set, if you have a fast network connection and a CD burner (see the <ulink url="&url-debian-cd;" +>Debian CD page</ulink +> for detailed instructions). If you have a Debian CD set and CDs are bootable on your machine, you can skip right to <xref linkend="boot-installer"/>; much effort has been expended to ensure the files most people need are there on the CD. Although a full set of binary packages requires several CDs, it is unlikely you will need packages on the third CD and above. You may also consider using the DVD version, which saves a lot of space on your shelf and you avoid the CD shuffling marathon. </para +><para +>If your machine doesn't support CD booting, but you do have a CD set, you can use an alternative strategy such as <phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot" +>floppy disk,</phrase +> <phrase arch="s390" +>tape, emulated tape,</phrase +> <phrase condition="bootable-disk" +>hard disk,</phrase +> <phrase condition="bootable-usb" +>usb stick,</phrase +> <phrase condition="supports-tftp" +>net boot,</phrase +> or manually loading the kernel from the CD to initially boot the system installer. The files you need for booting by another means are also on the CD; the Debian network archive and CD folder organization are identical. So when archive file paths are given below for particular files you need for booting, look for those files in the same directories and subdirectories on your CD. </para +><para +>Once the installer is booted, it will be able to obtain all the other files it needs from the CD. </para +><para +>If you don't have a CD set, then you will need to download the installer system files and place them on the <phrase arch="s390" +>installation tape</phrase +> <phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot" +>floppy disk or</phrase +> <phrase condition="bootable-disk" +>hard disk or</phrase +> <phrase condition="bootable-usb" +>usb stick or</phrase +> <phrase condition="supports-tftp" +>a connected computer</phrase +> so they can be used to boot the installer. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/official-cdrom.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/downloading-files.xml --> +<!-- $Id: downloading-files.xml 56139 2008-09-26 10:44:32Z lunar $ --> + + <sect1 id="downloading-files"> + <title +>Downloading Files from Debian Mirrors</title> + +<para +>To find the nearest (and thus probably the fastest) mirror, see the <ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;" +>list of Debian mirrors</ulink +>. </para +><para +>When downloading files from a Debian mirror using FTP, be sure to download the files in <emphasis +>binary</emphasis +> mode, not text or automatic mode. </para> + + <sect2 id="where-files"> + <title +>Where to Find Installation Images</title> + +<para +>The installation images are located on each Debian mirror in the directory <ulink url="&url-debian-installer;images" +>debian/dists/&releasename;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/</ulink +> — the <ulink url="&url-debian-installer;images/MANIFEST" +>MANIFEST</ulink +> lists each image and its purpose. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/download/alpha.xml --> +<!-- $Id: alpha.xml 28997 2005-07-07 21:09:22Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect3 arch="alpha" +><title +>Alpha Installation Files</title> +<para +>If you choose to boot from ARC console firmware using <command +>MILO</command +>, you will also need to prepare a disk containing <command +>MILO</command +> and <command +>LINLOAD.EXE</command +> from the provided disk images. See <xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/> for more information on Alpha firmware and boot loaders. The floppy images can be found in the <filename +>MILO</filename +> directory as <filename +>milo_<replaceable +>subarchitecture</replaceable +>.bin</filename +>. </para +><para +>Unfortunately, these <command +>MILO</command +> images could not be tested and might not work for all subarchitectures. If you find it doesn't work for you, try copying the appropriate <command +>MILO</command +> binary onto the floppy (<ulink url="&disturlftp;main/disks-alpha/current/MILO/" +></ulink +>). Note that those <command +>MILO</command +>s don't support ext2 <quote +>sparse superblocks</quote +>, so you can't use them to load kernels from newly generated ext2 file systems. As a workaround, you can put your kernel onto the FAT partition next to the <command +>MILO</command +>. </para +><para +><command +>MILO</command +> binaries are platform-specific. See <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> to determine the appropriate <command +>MILO</command +> image for your Alpha platform. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file install-methods/download/alpha.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/download/arm.xml --> +<!-- $Id: arm.xml 55541 2008-09-03 15:16:19Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="netwinder-install-files"> + <title +>Netwinder Installation Files</title> +<para +>The easiest way to boot a Netwinder is over the network, using the supplied TFTP image &netwinder-boot-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="cats-install-files"> + <title +>CATS Installation Files</title> +<para +>CATS can be booted either via the network or from CD-ROM. The kernel and initrd can be obtained from &cats-boot-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="nslu2-install-files"> + <title +>NSLU2 Installation Files</title> +<para +>A firmware image is provided for the Linksys NSLU2 which will automatically boot <classname +>debian-installer</classname +>. This image can be uploaded via the Linksys web frontend or with upslug2. This firmware image can be obtained from &nslu2-firmware-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="n2100-install-files"> + <title +>Thecus N2100 Installation Files</title> +<para +>A firmware image is provided for the Thecus N2100 which will automatically boot <classname +>debian-installer</classname +>. This image can be installed using the Thecus firmware upgrade process. This firmware image can be obtained from &n2100-firmware-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="glantank-install-files"> + <title +>GLAN Tank Installation Files</title> +<para +>The GLAN Tank requires a kernel and ramdisk on an ext2 partition on the disk on which you intend to install Debian. These images can be obtained from &glantank-firmware-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="kuroboxpro-install-files"> + <title +>Kurobox Pro Installation Files</title> +<para +>The Kurobox Pro requires a kernel and ramdisk on an ext2 partition on the disk on which you intend to install Debian. These images can be obtained from &kuroboxpro-firmware-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="mv2120-install-files"> + <title +>HP mv2120 Installation Files</title> +<para +>A firmware image is provided for the HP mv2120 which will automatically boot <classname +>debian-installer</classname +>. This image can be installed with uphpmvault on Linux and other systems and with the HP Media Vault Firmware Recovery Utility on Windows. The firmware image can be obtained from &mv2120-firmware-img;. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="qnap-install-files"> + <title +>QNAP Turbo Station Installation Files</title> +<para +>The QNAP Turbo Station (TS-109, TS-209 and TS-409) requires a kernel and ramdisk which can be obtained from &qnap-firmware-img;. A script is provided to write these images to flash. </para> + </sect3> + +<!-- End of file install-methods/download/arm.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/download/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- commented out as it seems out of date and the links are broken + + <sect3 arch="powerpc" id="newworld-install-files"> + <title +>NewWorld MacOS Installation Files </title> +<para> + +For floppy-less installation on NewWorld Macs, it may be most +convenient to obtain all the necessary files packaged into one Stuffit +archive from +<ulink url="&url-powerpc-of;" +></ulink +> (separate instructions are +included in the archive). Otherwise, obtain the normal installation +files listed above. Retrieve the files to an HFS (not HFS+) partition +on your system. You will also need the <filename +>yaboot</filename +> and +<filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> files from the +<ulink url="&downloadable-file;new-powermac/" +>new-powermac</ulink +> or +<ulink url="&downloadable-file;powermac/" +>powermac</ulink +> archive folder. +However, the newest G4 PowerMacs, and those that work without MacOS 9, +need the newest version of <command +>yaboot</command +>; the one in the +archive will not work. Obtain the newest version from +<ulink url="http://penguinppc.org/projects/yaboot/" +></ulink +>. + +</para> + </sect3> + +--> +<!-- End of file install-methods/download/powerpc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/download/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect3 arch="m68k" id="kernel-22"> + <title +>Choosing a Kernel</title> + +<para +>Some m68k subarchs have a choice of kernels to install. In general we recommend trying the most recent version first. If your subarch or machine needs to use a 2.2.x kernel, make sure you choose one of the images that supports 2.2.x kernels (see the <ulink url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST" +>MANIFEST</ulink +>). </para> +<para +>All of the m68k images for use with 2.2.x kernels, require the kernel parameter &ramdisksize;. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file install-methods/download/m68k.xml --> + + </sect2> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/downloading-files.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/ipl-tape.xml --> +<!-- $Id: ipl-tape.xml 36841 2006-04-30 23:34:32Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 arch="s390" id="ipl-tape"> + <title +>Creating an IPL tape</title> + +<para +>If you can't boot (IPL) from the CD-ROM and you are not using VM you need to create an IPL tape first. This is described in section 3.4.3 in the <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf" +> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink +> Redbook. The files you need to write to the tape are (in this order): <filename +>kernel.debian</filename +>, <filename +>parmfile.debian</filename +> and <filename +>initrd.debian</filename +>. The files can be downloaded from the <filename +>tape</filename +> sub-directory, see <xref linkend="where-files"/>. </para> + </sect1> + +<!-- End of file install-methods/ipl-tape.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/create-floppy.xml --> +<!-- $Id: create-floppy.xml 45453 2007-02-27 12:58:15Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="create-floppy"> + <title +>Creating Floppies from Disk Images</title> +<para +>Bootable floppy disks are generally used as a last resort to boot the installer on hardware that cannot boot from CD or by other means. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Booting the installer from floppy disk reportedly fails on Mac USB floppy drives. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>Booting the installer from floppy disk is not supported on Amigas or 68k Macs. </para +><para +>Disk images are files containing the complete contents of a floppy disk in <emphasis +>raw</emphasis +> form. Disk images, such as <filename +>boot.img</filename +>, cannot simply be copied to floppy drives. A special program is used to write the image files to floppy disk in <emphasis +>raw</emphasis +> mode. This is required because these images are raw representations of the disk; it is required to do a <emphasis +>sector copy</emphasis +> of the data from the file onto the floppy. </para +><para +>There are different techniques for creating floppies from disk images. This section describes how to create floppies from disk images on different platforms. </para +><para +>Before you can create the floppies, you will first need to download them from one of the Debian mirrors, as explained in <xref linkend="downloading-files"/>. <phrase arch="i386" +>If you already have an installation CD-ROM or DVD, the floppy images may also be included on the CD/DVD.</phrase +> </para +><para +>No matter which method you use to create your floppies, you should remember to flip the write-protect tab on the floppies once you have written them, to ensure they are not damaged unintentionally. </para> + + <sect2 +><title +>Writing Disk Images From a Linux or Unix System</title> +<para +>To write the floppy disk image files to the floppy disks, you will probably need root access to the system. Place a good, blank floppy in the floppy drive. Next, use the command <informalexample +><screen +> +$ dd if=<replaceable>filename</replaceable> of=/dev/fd0 bs=1024 conv=sync ; sync +</screen +></informalexample +> where <replaceable +>filename</replaceable +> is one of the floppy disk image files. <filename +>/dev/fd0</filename +> is a commonly used name of the floppy disk device, it may be different on your workstation<phrase arch="sparc" +> (on Solaris, it is <filename +>/dev/fd/0</filename +>)</phrase +>. The command may return to the prompt before Unix has finished writing the floppy disk, so look for the disk-in-use light on the floppy drive and be sure that the light is out and the disk has stopped revolving before you remove it from the drive. On some systems, you'll have to run a command to eject the floppy from the drive <phrase arch="sparc" +> (on Solaris, use <command +>eject</command +>, see the manual page)</phrase +>. </para +><para +>Some systems attempt to automatically mount a floppy disk when you place it in the drive. You might have to disable this feature before the workstation will allow you to write a floppy in <emphasis +>raw mode</emphasis +>. Unfortunately, how to accomplish this will vary based on your operating system. <phrase arch="sparc" +> On Solaris, you can work around volume management to get raw access to the floppy. First, make sure that the floppy is auto-mounted (using <command +>volcheck</command +> or the equivalent command in the file manager). Then use a <command +>dd</command +> command of the form given above, just replace <filename +>/dev/fd0</filename +> with <filename +>/vol/rdsk/<replaceable +>floppy_name</replaceable +></filename +>, where <replaceable +>floppy_name</replaceable +> is the name the floppy disk was given when it was formatted (unnamed floppies default to the name <filename +>unnamed_floppy</filename +>). On other systems, ask your system administrator. </phrase +> </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>If writing a floppy on powerpc Linux, you will need to eject it. The <command +>eject</command +> program handles this nicely; you might need to install it. </para> + + </sect2> + + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/floppy/i386.xml --> +<!-- $Id: i386.xml 39870 2006-08-16 00:35:08Z fjp $ --> + + +<!-- This is not set off for i386 only, because many people will have --> +<!-- access to a PC in order to make a floppy for other arches. --> + + <sect2 +><title +>Writing Disk Images From DOS, Windows, or OS/2</title> + +<para +>If you have access to an i386 or amd64 machine, you can use one of the following programs to copy images to floppies. </para +><para +>The <command +>rawrite1</command +> and <command +>rawrite2</command +> programs can be used under MS-DOS. To use these programs, first make sure that you are booted into DOS. Trying to use these programs from within a DOS box in Windows, or double-clicking on these programs from the Windows Explorer is <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> expected to work. </para +><para +>The <command +>rwwrtwin</command +> program runs on Windows 95, NT, 98, 2000, ME, XP and probably later versions. To use it you will need to unpack diskio.dll in the same directory. </para +><para +>These tools can be found on the Official Debian CD-ROMs under the <filename +>/tools</filename +> directory. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods/floppy/i386.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 45433 2007-02-26 18:10:28Z wouter $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Writing Disk Images on Atari Systems</title> +<para +>You'll find the &rawwrite.ttp; program in the same directory as the floppy disk images. Start the program by double clicking on the program icon, and type in the name of the floppy image file you want written to the floppy at the TOS program command line dialog box. </para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Writing Disk Images on Macintosh Systems</title> +<para +>Since the current release does not yet support booting from floppies to start the installation, there would be no point in doing this on Macintosh Systems. However, these files are needed for the installation of the operating system and modules, later in the process. </para> + + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 28997 2005-07-07 21:09:22Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>Writing Disk Images From MacOS</title> +<para +>An AppleScript, <application +>Make Debian Floppy</application +>, is available for burning floppies from the provided disk image files. It can be downloaded from <ulink url="ftp://ftp2.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/d/de/debian-imac/MakeDebianFloppy.sit" +></ulink +>. To use it, just unstuff it on your desktop, and then drag any floppy image file to it. You must have Applescript installed and enabled in your extensions manager. Disk Copy will ask you to confirm that you wish to erase the floppy and proceed to write the file image to it. </para +><para +>You can also use the MacOS utility <command +>Disk Copy</command +> directly, or the freeware utility <command +>suntar</command +>. The <filename +>root.bin</filename +> file is an example of a floppy image. Use one of the following methods to create a floppy from the floppy image with these utilities. </para> + + <sect3> + <title +>Writing Disk Images with <command +>Disk Copy</command +></title> +<para +>If you are creating the floppy image from files which were originally on the official &debian; CD, then the Type and Creator are already set correctly. The following <command +>Creator-Changer</command +> steps are only necessary if you downloaded the image files from a Debian mirror. </para> +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Obtain <ulink url="&url-powerpc-creator-changer;" +>Creator-Changer</ulink +> and use it to open the <filename +>root.bin</filename +> file. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Change the Creator to <userinput +>ddsk</userinput +> (Disk Copy), and the Type to <userinput +>DDim</userinput +> (binary floppy image). The case is sensitive for these fields. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><emphasis +>Important:</emphasis +> In the Finder, use <userinput +>Get Info</userinput +> to display the Finder information about the floppy image, and <quote +>X</quote +> the <userinput +>File Locked</userinput +> check box so that MacOS will be unable to remove the boot blocks if the image is accidentally mounted. </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +>Obtain <command +>Disk Copy</command +>; if you have a MacOS system or CD it will very likely be there already, otherwise try <ulink url="&url-powerpc-diskcopy;" +></ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Run <command +>Disk Copy</command +>, and select <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>Utilities</guimenu +> <guimenuitem +>Make a Floppy</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +>, then select the <emphasis +>locked</emphasis +> image file from the resulting dialog. It will ask you to insert a floppy, then ask if you really want to erase it. When done it should eject the floppy. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title +>Writing Disk Images with <command +>suntar</command +></title> +<para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Obtain <command +>suntar</command +> from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-suntar;" +> </ulink +>. Start the <command +>suntar</command +> program and select <quote +>Overwrite Sectors...</quote +> from the <userinput +>Special</userinput +> menu. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Insert the floppy disk as requested, then hit &enterkey; (start at sector 0). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Select the <filename +>root.bin</filename +> file in the file-opening dialog. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>After the floppy has been created successfully, select <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> <guimenuitem +>Eject</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +>. If there are any errors writing the floppy, simply toss that floppy and try another. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> +Before using the floppy you created, <emphasis +>set the write protect tab</emphasis +>! Otherwise if you accidentally mount it in MacOS, MacOS will helpfully ruin it. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml --> + + </sect1> + +<!-- End of file install-methods/create-floppy.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml --> +<!-- $Id: boot-usb-files.xml 57590 2009-02-16 22:01:04Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 condition="bootable-usb" id="boot-usb-files"> + <title +>Preparing Files for USB Memory Stick Booting</title> + +<para +>There are two installation methods possible when booting from USB stick. The first is to install completely from the network. The second is to also copy a CD image onto the USB stick and use that as a source for packages, possibly in combination with a mirror. This second method is the more common. </para +><para +>For the first installation method you'll need to download an installer image from the <filename +>netboot</filename +> directory (at the location mentioned in <xref linkend="where-files"/>) and use the <quote +>flexible way</quote +> explained below to copy the files to the USB stick. </para +><para +>Installation images for the second installation method can be found in the <filename +>hd-media</filename +> directory and either the <quote +>easy way</quote +> or the <quote +>flexible way</quote +> can be used to copy the image to the USB stick. For this installation method you will also need to download a CD image. The installation image and the CD image must be based on the same release of &d-i;. If they do not match you are likely to get errors<footnote +> <para +> The error message that is most likely to be displayed is that no kernel modules can be found. This means that the version of the kernel module udebs included on the CD image is different from the version of the running kernel. </para +> </footnote +> during the installation. </para +><para +>To prepare the USB stick, you will need a system where GNU/Linux is already running and where USB is supported. With current GNU/Linux systems the USB stick should be automatically recognized when you insert it. If it is not you should check that the usb-storage kernel module is loaded. When the USB stick is inserted, it will be mapped to a device named <filename +>/dev/sdX</filename +>, where the <quote +>X</quote +> is a letter in the range a-z. You should be able to see to which device the USB stick was mapped by running the command <command +>dmesg</command +> after inserting it. To write to your stick, you may have to turn off its write protection switch. </para> +<warning +><para +>The procedures described in this section will destroy anything already on the device! Make very sure that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. If you use the wrong device the result could be that all information on for example a hard disk could be lost. </para +></warning> +<para +>Note that the USB stick should be at least 256 MB in size (smaller setups are possible if you follow <xref linkend="usb-copy-flexible"/>). </para> + + <sect2 id="usb-copy-easy"> + <title +>Copying the files — the easy way</title> +<para +>There is an all-in-one file <filename +>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename +> which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) <phrase arch="x86" +>as well as <classname +>syslinux</classname +> and its configuration file.</phrase +> <phrase arch="powerpc" +>as well as <classname +>yaboot</classname +> and its configuration file.</phrase +> </para +><para +>Note that, although convenient, this method does have one major disadvantage: the logical size of the device will be limited to 256 MB, even if the capacity of the USB stick is larger. You will need to repartition the USB stick and create new file systems to get its full capacity back if you ever want to use it for some different purpose. A second disadvantage is that you cannot copy a full CD image onto the USB stick, but only the smaller businesscard or netinst CD images. </para +><para arch="x86" +>To use this image simply extract it directly to your USB stick: <informalexample +><screen +># zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Create a partition of type "Apple_Bootstrap" on your USB stick using <command +>mac-fdisk</command +>'s <userinput +>C</userinput +> command and extract the image directly to that: <informalexample +><screen +># zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>After that, mount the USB memory stick <phrase arch="x86" +>(<userinput +>mount /dev/<replaceable +>sdX</replaceable +> /mnt</userinput +>),</phrase +> <phrase arch="powerpc" +>(<userinput +>mount /dev/<replaceable +>sdX2</replaceable +> /mnt</userinput +>),</phrase +> which will now have <phrase arch="x86" +>a FAT filesystem</phrase +> <phrase arch="powerpc" +>an HFS filesystem</phrase +> on it, and copy a Debian netinst or businesscard ISO image to it. Unmount the stick (<userinput +>umount /mnt</userinput +>) and you are done. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="usb-copy-flexible"> + <title +>Copying the files — the flexible way</title> +<para +>If you like more flexibility or just want to know what's going on, you should use the following method to put the files on your stick. One advantage of using this method is that — if the capacity of your USB stick is large enough — you have the option of copying a full CD ISO image to it. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/usb-setup/x86.xml --> +<!-- $Id: x86.xml 56442 2008-10-15 18:10:38Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="x86"> + <title +>Partitioning the USB stick</title> +<para +>We will show how to set up the memory stick to use the first partition, instead of the entire device. </para +><note +><para +>Since most USB sticks come pre-configured with a single FAT16 partition, you probably won't have to repartition or reformat the stick. If you have to do that anyway, use <command +>cfdisk</command +> or any other partitioning tool to create a FAT16 partition, and then create the filesystem using: <informalexample +><screen +> +# mkdosfs /dev/<replaceable>sdX1</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The <command +>mkdosfs</command +> command is contained in the <classname +>dosfstools</classname +> Debian package. </para +></note +><para +>In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will put a boot loader on the stick. Although any boot loader (e.g. <classname +>lilo</classname +>) should work, it's convenient to use <classname +>syslinux</classname +>, since it uses a FAT16 partition and can be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the FAT file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot loader. </para +><para +>To put <classname +>syslinux</classname +> on the FAT16 partition on your USB stick, install the <classname +>syslinux</classname +> and <classname +>mtools</classname +> packages on your system, and do: <informalexample +><screen +> +# syslinux /dev/<replaceable>sdX1</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition must not be mounted when starting <command +>syslinux</command +>. This procedure writes a boot sector to the partition and creates the file <filename +>ldlinux.sys</filename +> which contains the boot loader code. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="x86"> + <title +>Adding the installer image</title> +<para +>Mount the partition (<userinput +>mount /dev/<replaceable +>sdX1</replaceable +> /mnt</userinput +>) and copy the following installer image files to the stick: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>vmlinuz</filename +> (kernel binary) </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>initrd.gz</filename +> (initial ramdisk image) </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> You can choose between either the regular version or the graphical version of the installer. The latter can be found in the <filename +>gtk</filename +> subdirectory. If you want to rename the files, please note that <classname +>syslinux</classname +> can only process DOS (8.3) file names. </para +><para +>Next you should create a <filename +>syslinux.cfg</filename +> configuration file, which at a bare minimum should contain the following two lines: <informalexample +><screen +> +default vmlinuz +append initrd=initrd.gz +</screen +></informalexample +> For the graphical installer you should add <userinput +>video=vesa:ywrap,mtrr vga=788</userinput +> to the second line. </para +><para +>If you used an <filename +>hd-media</filename +> image, you should now copy a Debian ISO image (businesscard, netinst or full CD image; be sure to select one that fits) onto the stick. When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (<userinput +>umount /mnt</userinput +>). </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file install-methods/usb-setup/x86.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 56442 2008-10-15 18:10:38Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title +>Partitioning the USB stick</title> +<para +>Most USB sticks do not come pre-configured in such a way that Open Firmware can boot from them, so you will need to repartition the stick. On Mac systems, run <userinput +>mac-fdisk /dev/<replaceable +>sdX</replaceable +></userinput +>, initialise a new partition map using the <userinput +>i</userinput +> command, and create a new partition of type Apple_Bootstrap using the <userinput +>C</userinput +> command. (Note that the first "partition" will always be the partition map itself.) Then type <informalexample +><screen +> +$ hformat /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The <command +>hformat</command +> command is contained in the <classname +>hfsutils</classname +> Debian package. </para +><para +>In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will put a boot loader on the stick. The <command +>yaboot</command +> boot loader can be installed on an HFS filesystem and can be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the HFS file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot loader. </para +><para +>The normal <command +>ybin</command +> tool that comes with <command +>yaboot</command +> does not yet understand USB storage devices, so you will have to install <command +>yaboot</command +> by hand using the <classname +>hfsutils</classname +> tools. Type <informalexample +><screen +> +$ hmount /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> +$ hcopy -r /usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot : +$ hattrib -c UNIX -t tbxi :yaboot +$ hattrib -b : +$ humount +</screen +></informalexample +> Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition must not be otherwise mounted during this procedure. This procedure writes the boot loader to the partition, and uses the HFS utilities to mark it in such a way that Open Firmware will boot it. Having done this, the rest of the USB stick may be prepared using the normal Unix utilities. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title +>Adding the installer image</title> +<para +>Mount the partition (<userinput +>mount /dev/<replaceable +>sdX2</replaceable +> /mnt</userinput +>) and copy the following installer image files to the stick: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>vmlinux</filename +> (kernel binary) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>initrd.gz</filename +> (initial ramdisk image) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> (yaboot configuration file) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>boot.msg</filename +> (optional boot message) </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>The <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +> configuration file should contain the following lines: <informalexample +><screen +> +default=install +root=/dev/ram + +message=/boot.msg + +image=/vmlinux + label=install + initrd=/initrd.gz + initrd-size=10000 + read-only +</screen +></informalexample +> Please note that the <userinput +>initrd-size</userinput +> parameter may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. </para +><para +>If you used an <filename +>hd-media</filename +> image, you should now copy a Debian ISO image (businesscard, netinst or full CD image; be sure to select one that fits) onto the stick. When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (<userinput +>umount /mnt</userinput +>). </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml --> + + </sect2> + + <!-- TODO: doesn't this section belong later? --> + <sect2 arch="x86"> + <title +>Booting the USB stick</title> +<warning +><para +>If your system refuses to boot from the memory stick, the stick may contain an invalid master boot record (MBR). To fix this, use the <command +>install-mbr</command +> command from the package <classname +>mbr</classname +>: <informalexample +><screen +># install-mbr /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +></warning> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml --> +<!-- $Id: boot-drive-files.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 condition="bootable-disk" id="boot-drive-files"> + <title +>Preparing Files for Hard Disk Booting</title> +<para +>The installer may be booted using boot files placed on an existing hard drive partition, either launched from another operating system or by invoking a boot loader directly from the BIOS. </para +><para +>A full, <quote +>pure network</quote +> installation can be achieved using this technique. This avoids all hassles of removable media, like finding and burning CD images or struggling with too numerous and unreliable floppy disks. </para +><para arch="x86" +>The installer cannot boot from files on an NTFS file system. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>The installer cannot boot from files on an HFS+ file system. MacOS System 8.1 and above may use HFS+ file systems; NewWorld PowerMacs all use HFS+. To determine whether your existing file system is HFS+, select <userinput +>Get Info</userinput +> for the volume in question. HFS file systems appear as <userinput +>Mac OS Standard</userinput +>, while HFS+ file systems say <userinput +>Mac OS Extended</userinput +>. You must have an HFS partition in order to exchange files between MacOS and Linux, in particular the installation files you download. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Different programs are used for hard disk installation system booting, depending on whether the system is a <quote +>NewWorld</quote +> or an <quote +>OldWorld</quote +> model. </para> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="files-lilo"> + <title +>Hard disk installer booting using <command +>LILO</command +> or <command +>GRUB</command +></title> +<para +>This section explains how to add to or even replace an existing linux installation using either <command +>LILO</command +> or <command +>GRUB</command +>. </para +><para +>At boot time, both bootloaders support loading in memory not only the kernel, but also a disk image. This RAM disk can be used as the root file-system by the kernel. </para +><para +>Copy the following files from the Debian archives to a convenient location on your hard drive, for instance to <filename +>/boot/newinstall/</filename +>. <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>vmlinuz</filename +> (kernel binary) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>initrd.gz</filename +> (ramdisk image) </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>Finally, to configure the bootloader proceed to <xref linkend="boot-initrd"/>. </para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-oldworld"> + <title +>Hard Disk Installer Booting for OldWorld Macs</title> +<para +>The <filename +>boot-floppy-hfs</filename +> floppy uses <application +>miBoot</application +> to launch Linux installation, but <application +>miBoot</application +> cannot easily be used for hard disk booting. <application +>BootX</application +>, launched from MacOS, supports booting from files placed on the hard disk. <application +>BootX</application +> can also be used to dual-boot MacOS and Linux after your Debian installation is complete. For the Performa 6360, it appears that <command +>quik</command +> cannot make the hard disk bootable. So <application +>BootX</application +> is required on that model. </para +><para +>Download and unstuff the <application +>BootX</application +> distribution, available from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-bootx;" +></ulink +>, or in the <filename +>dists/woody/main/disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename +> directory on Debian http/ftp mirrors and official Debian CDs. Use <application +>Stuffit Expander</application +> to extract it from its archive. Within the package, there is an empty folder called <filename +>Linux Kernels</filename +>. Download <filename +>linux.bin</filename +> and <filename +>ramdisk.image.gz</filename +> from the <filename +>disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename +> folder, and place them in the <filename +>Linux Kernels</filename +> folder. Then place the <filename +>Linux Kernels</filename +> folder in the active System Folder. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-newworld"> + <title +>Hard Disk Installer Booting for NewWorld Macs</title> +<para +>NewWorld PowerMacs support booting from a network or an ISO9660 CD-ROM, as well as loading ELF binaries directly from the hard disk. These machines will boot Linux directly via <command +>yaboot</command +>, which supports loading a kernel and RAMdisk directly from an ext2 partition, as well as dual-booting with MacOS. Hard disk booting of the installer is particularly appropriate for newer machines without floppy drives. <command +>BootX</command +> is not supported and must not be used on NewWorld PowerMacs. </para +><para +><emphasis +>Copy</emphasis +> (not move) the following four files which you downloaded earlier from the Debian archives, onto the root level of your hard drive (this can be accomplished by <keycap +>option</keycap +>-dragging each file to the hard drive icon). <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>vmlinux</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>initrd.gz</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>yaboot</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>yaboot.conf</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>Make a note of the partition number of the MacOS partition where you place these files. If you have the MacOS <command +>pdisk</command +> program, you can use the <command +>L</command +> command to check for the partition number. You will need this partition number for the command you type at the Open Firmware prompt when you boot the installer. </para +><para +>To boot the installer, proceed to <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/>. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/install-tftp.xml --> +<!-- $Id: install-tftp.xml 56425 2008-10-15 08:50:59Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 condition="supports-tftp" id="install-tftp"> + <title +>Preparing Files for TFTP Net Booting</title> +<para +>If your machine is connected to a local area network, you may be able to boot it over the network from another machine, using TFTP. If you intend to boot the installation system from another machine, the boot files will need to be placed in specific locations on that machine, and the machine configured to support booting of your specific machine. </para +><para +>You need to set up a TFTP server, and for many machines a DHCP server<phrase condition="supports-rarp" +>, or RARP server</phrase +><phrase condition="supports-bootp" +>, or BOOTP server</phrase +>. </para +><para +><phrase condition="supports-rarp" +>The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) is one way to tell your client what IP address to use for itself. Another way is to use the BOOTP protocol.</phrase +> <phrase condition="supports-bootp" +>BOOTP is an IP protocol that informs a computer of its IP address and where on the network to obtain a boot image.</phrase +> <phrase arch="m68k" +>Yet another alternative exists on VMEbus systems: the IP address can be manually configured in boot ROM.</phrase +> The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a more flexible, backwards-compatible extension of BOOTP. Some systems can only be configured via DHCP. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>For PowerPC, if you have a NewWorld Power Macintosh machine, it is a good idea to use DHCP instead of BOOTP. Some of the latest machines are unable to boot using BOOTP. </para +><para arch="alpha" +>Unlike the Open Firmware found on Sparc and PowerPC machines, the SRM console will <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> use RARP to obtain its IP address, and therefore you must use BOOTP for net booting your Alpha<footnote +> <para +> Alpha systems can also be net-booted using the DECNet MOP (Maintenance Operations Protocol), but this is not covered here. Presumably, your local OpenVMS operator will be happy to assist you should you have some burning need to use MOP to boot Linux on your Alpha. </para +> </footnote +>. You can also enter the IP configuration for network interfaces directly in the SRM console. </para +><para arch="hppa" +>Some older HPPA machines (e.g. 715/75) use RBOOTD rather than BOOTP. There is an <classname +>rbootd</classname +> package available in Debian. </para +><para +>The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used to serve the boot image to the client. Theoretically, any server, on any platform, which implements these protocols, may be used. In the examples in this section, we shall provide commands for SunOS 4.x, SunOS 5.x (a.k.a. Solaris), and GNU/Linux. <note arch="x86" +><para +>To use the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP booting, you will need a TFTP server with <userinput +>tsize</userinput +> support. On a &debian; server, the <classname +>atftpd</classname +> and <classname +>tftpd-hpa</classname +> packages qualify; we recommend <classname +>tftpd-hpa</classname +>. </para +></note> + +</para> + + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml --> +<!-- $Id: rarp.xml 39897 2006-08-16 20:36:24Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 condition="supports-rarp" id="tftp-rarp"> + <title +>Setting up RARP server</title> +<para +>To set up RARP, you need to know the Ethernet address (a.k.a. the MAC address) of the client computers to be installed. If you don't know this information, you can <phrase arch="sparc" +> pick it off the initial OpenPROM boot messages, use the OpenBoot <userinput +>.enet-addr</userinput +> command, or </phrase +> boot into <quote +>Rescue</quote +> mode (e.g., from the rescue floppy) and use the command <userinput +>/sbin/ifconfig eth0</userinput +>. </para +><para +>On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.4 or 2.6 kernel, or Solaris/SunOS, you use the <command +>rarpd</command +> program. You need to ensure that the Ethernet hardware address for the client is listed in the <quote +>ethers</quote +> database (either in the <filename +>/etc/ethers</filename +> file, or via NIS/NIS+) and in the <quote +>hosts</quote +> database. Then you need to start the RARP daemon. Issue the command (as root): <userinput +>/usr/sbin/rarpd -a</userinput +> on most Linux systems and SunOS 5 (Solaris 2), <userinput +>/usr/sbin/in.rarpd -a</userinput +> on some other Linux systems, or <userinput +>/usr/etc/rarpd -a</userinput +> in SunOS 4 (Solaris 1). </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml --> +<!-- $Id: bootp.xml 43558 2006-12-26 19:46:26Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 condition="supports-bootp" id="tftp-bootp"> + <title +>Setting up a BOOTP server</title> +<para +>There are two BOOTP servers available for GNU/Linux. The first is CMU <command +>bootpd</command +>. The other is actually a DHCP server: ISC <command +>dhcpd</command +>. In &debian; these are contained in the <classname +>bootp</classname +> and <classname +>dhcp3-server</classname +> packages respectively. </para +><para +>To use CMU <command +>bootpd</command +>, you must first uncomment (or add) the relevant line in <filename +>/etc/inetd.conf</filename +>. On &debian;, you can run <userinput +>update-inetd --enable bootps</userinput +>, then <userinput +>/etc/init.d/inetd reload</userinput +> to do so. Just in case your BOOTP server does not run Debian, the line in question should look like: <informalexample +><screen +> +bootps dgram udp wait root /usr/sbin/bootpd bootpd -i -t 120 +</screen +></informalexample +> Now, you must create an <filename +>/etc/bootptab</filename +> file. This has the same sort of familiar and cryptic format as the good old BSD <filename +>printcap</filename +>, <filename +>termcap</filename +>, and <filename +>disktab</filename +> files. See the <filename +>bootptab</filename +> manual page for more information. For CMU <command +>bootpd</command +>, you will need to know the hardware (MAC) address of the client. Here is an example <filename +>/etc/bootptab</filename +>: <informalexample +><screen +> +client:\ + hd=/tftpboot:\ + bf=tftpboot.img:\ + ip=192.168.1.90:\ + sm=255.255.255.0:\ + sa=192.168.1.1:\ + ha=0123456789AB: +</screen +></informalexample +> You will need to change at least the <quote +>ha</quote +> option, which specifies the hardware address of the client. The <quote +>bf</quote +> option specifies the file a client should retrieve via TFTP; see <xref linkend="tftp-images"/> for more details. <phrase arch="mips" +> On SGI machines you can just enter the command monitor and type <userinput +>printenv</userinput +>. The value of the <userinput +>eaddr</userinput +> variable is the machine's MAC address. </phrase +> </para +><para +>By contrast, setting up BOOTP with ISC <command +>dhcpd</command +> is really easy, because it treats BOOTP clients as a moderately special case of DHCP clients. Some architectures require a complex configuration for booting clients via BOOTP. If yours is one of those, read the section <xref linkend="dhcpd"/>. In that case, you will probably be able to get away with simply adding the <userinput +>allow bootp</userinput +> directive to the configuration block for the subnet containing the client, and restart <command +>dhcpd</command +> with <userinput +>/etc/init.d/dhcpd3-server restart</userinput +>. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods//tftp/dhcp.xml --> +<!-- $Id: dhcp.xml 43558 2006-12-26 19:46:26Z fjp $ --> + + <sect2 id="dhcpd"> + <title +>Setting up a DHCP server</title> +<para +>One free software DHCP server is ISC <command +>dhcpd</command +>. For &debian;, the <classname +>dhcp3-server</classname +> package is recommended. Here is a sample configuration file for it (see <filename +>/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf</filename +>): <informalexample +><screen +>option domain-name "example.com"; +option domain-name-servers ns1.example.com; +option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0; +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; +server-name "servername"; + +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option routers 192.168.1.1; +} + +host clientname { + filename "/tftpboot/tftpboot.img"; + server-name "servername"; + next-server servername; + hardware ethernet 01:23:45:67:89:AB; + fixed-address 192.168.1.90; +} +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>In this example, there is one server <replaceable +>servername</replaceable +> which performs all of the work of DHCP server, TFTP server, and network gateway. You will almost certainly need to change the domain-name options, as well as the server name and client hardware address. The <replaceable +>filename</replaceable +> option should be the name of the file which will be retrieved via TFTP. </para +><para +>After you have edited the <command +>dhcpd</command +> configuration file, restart it with <userinput +>/etc/init.d/dhcpd3-server restart</userinput +>. </para> + + <sect3 arch="x86"> + <title +>Enabling PXE Booting in the DHCP configuration</title> +<para +>Here is another example for a <filename +>dhcp.conf</filename +> using the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP. <informalexample +><screen +> +option domain-name "example.com"; + +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; + +allow booting; +allow bootp; + +# The next paragraph needs to be modified to fit your case +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255; +# the gateway address which can be different +# (access to the internet for instance) + option routers 192.168.1.1; +# indicate the dns you want to use + option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.3; +} + +group { + next-server 192.168.1.3; + host tftpclient { +# tftp client hardware address + hardware ethernet 00:10:DC:27:6C:15; + filename "pxelinux.0"; + } +} +</screen +></informalexample +> Note that for PXE booting, the client filename <filename +>pxelinux.0</filename +> is a boot loader, not a kernel image (see <xref linkend="tftp-images"/> below). </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file install-methods//tftp/dhcp.xml --> + + <sect2 id="tftpd"> + <title +>Enabling the TFTP Server</title> +<para +>To get the TFTP server ready to go, you should first make sure that <command +>tftpd</command +> is enabled. This is usually enabled by having something like the following line in <filename +>/etc/inetd.conf</filename +>: <informalexample +><screen +> +tftp dgram udp wait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.tftpd /tftpboot +</screen +></informalexample +> Debian packages will in general set this up correctly by default when they are installed. </para> +<note +><para +>Historically, TFTP servers used <filename +>/tftpboot</filename +> as directory to serve images from. However, &debian; packages may use other directories to comply with the <ulink url="&url-fhs-home;" +>Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink +>. For example, <classname +>tftpd-hpa</classname +> by default uses <filename +>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename +>. You may have to adjust the configuration examples in this section accordingly. </para +></note> +<para +>Look in <filename +>/etc/inetd.conf</filename +> and remember the directory which is used as the argument of <command +>in.tftpd</command +><footnote +> <para +> All <command +>in.tftpd</command +> alternatives available in Debian should log TFTP requests to the system logs by default. Some of them support a <userinput +>-v</userinput +> argument to increase verbosity. It is recommended to check these log messages in case of boot problems as they are a good starting point for diagnosing the cause of errors. </para +> </footnote +>; you'll need that below. If you've had to change <filename +>/etc/inetd.conf</filename +>, you'll have to notify the running <command +>inetd</command +> process that the file has changed. On a Debian machine, run <userinput +>/etc/init.d/inetd reload</userinput +>; on other machines, find out the process ID for <command +>inetd</command +>, and run <userinput +>kill -HUP <replaceable +>inetd-pid</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +><para arch="mips" +>If you intend to install Debian on an SGI machine and your TFTP server is a GNU/Linux box running Linux 2.4, you'll need to set the following on your server: <informalexample +><screen +> +# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_no_pmtu_disc +</screen +></informalexample +> to turn off Path MTU discovery, otherwise the SGI's PROM can't download the kernel. Furthermore, make sure TFTP packets are sent from a source port no greater than 32767, or the download will stall after the first packet. Again, it's Linux 2.4.X tripping this bug in the PROM, and you can avoid it by setting <informalexample +><screen +> +# echo "2048 32767" > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range +</screen +></informalexample +> to adjust the range of source ports the Linux TFTP server uses. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="tftp-images"> + <title +>Move TFTP Images Into Place</title> +<para +>Next, place the TFTP boot image you need, as found in <xref linkend="where-files"/>, in the <command +>tftpd</command +> boot image directory. You may have to make a link from that file to the file which <command +>tftpd</command +> will use for booting a particular client. Unfortunately, the file name is determined by the TFTP client, and there are no strong standards. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>On NewWorld Power Macintosh machines, you will need to set up the <command +>yaboot</command +> boot loader as the TFTP boot image. <command +>Yaboot</command +> will then retrieve the kernel and RAMdisk images via TFTP itself. You will need to download the following files from the <filename +>netboot/</filename +> directory: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>vmlinux</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>initrd.gz</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>yaboot</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>yaboot.conf</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +<filename +>boot.msg</filename> + +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para arch="x86" +>For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the <filename +>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename +> tarball. Simply extract this tarball into the <command +>tftpd</command +> boot image directory. Make sure your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename +>pxelinux.0</filename +> to <command +>tftpd</command +> as the filename to boot. </para +><para arch="ia64" +>For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the <filename +>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename +> tarball. Simply extract this tarball into the <command +>tftpd</command +> boot image directory. Make sure your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename +>/debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi</filename +> to <command +>tftpd</command +> as the filename to boot. </para> + + <sect3 arch="alpha"> + <title +>Alpha TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>On Alpha, you must specify the filename (as a relative path to the boot image directory) using the <userinput +>-file</userinput +> argument to the SRM <userinput +>boot</userinput +> command, or by setting the <userinput +>BOOT_FILE</userinput +> environment variable. Alternatively, the filename can be given via BOOTP (in ISC <command +>dhcpd</command +>, use the <userinput +>filename</userinput +> directive). Unlike Open Firmware, there is <emphasis +>no default filename</emphasis +> on SRM, so you <emphasis +>must</emphasis +> specify a filename by either one of these methods. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="sparc"> + <title +>SPARC TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>Some SPARC architectures add the subarchitecture names, such as <quote +>SUN4M</quote +> or <quote +>SUN4C</quote +>, to the filename. Thus, if your system's subarchitecture is a SUN4C, and its IP is 192.168.1.3, the filename would be <filename +>C0A80103.SUN4C</filename +>. However, there are also subarchitectures where the file the client looks for is just <filename +>client-ip-in-hex</filename +>. An easy way to determine the hexadecimal code for the IP address is to enter the following command in a shell (assuming the machine's intended IP is 10.0.0.4). <informalexample +><screen +> +$ printf '%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x\n' 10 0 0 4 +</screen +></informalexample +> To get to the correct filename, you will need to change all letters to uppercase and if necessary append the subarchitecture name. </para +><para +>If you've done all this correctly, giving the command <userinput +>boot net</userinput +> from the OpenPROM should load the image. If the image cannot be found, try checking the logs on your tftp server to see which image name is being requested. </para +><para +>You can also force some sparc systems to look for a specific file name by adding it to the end of the OpenPROM boot command, such as <userinput +>boot net my-sparc.image</userinput +>. This must still reside in the directory that the TFTP server looks in. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="m68k"> + <title +>BVM/Motorola TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>For BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems copy the files &bvme6000-tftp-files; to <filename +>/tftpboot/</filename +>. </para +><para +>Next, configure your boot ROMs or BOOTP server to initially load the <filename +>tftplilo.bvme</filename +> or <filename +>tftplilo.mvme</filename +> files from the TFTP server. Refer to the <filename +>tftplilo.txt</filename +> file for your subarchitecture for additional system-specific configuration information. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title +>SGI TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>On SGI machines you can rely on the <command +>bootpd</command +> to supply the name of the TFTP file. It is given either as the <userinput +>bf=</userinput +> in <filename +>/etc/bootptab</filename +> or as the <userinput +>filename=</userinput +> option in <filename +>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename +>. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title +>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> +<para +>You don't have to configure DHCP in a special way because you'll pass the full path of the file to be loaded to CFE. </para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + +<!-- FIXME: commented out since it seems too old to be usable and a current + way is not known + + <sect2 id="tftp-low-memory"> + <title +>TFTP Installation for Low-Memory Systems</title> +<para> + +On some systems, the standard installation RAMdisk, combined with the +memory requirements of the TFTP boot image, cannot fit in memory. In +this case, you can still install using TFTP, you'll just have to go +through the additional step of NFS mounting your root directory over +the network as well. This type of setup is also appropriate for +diskless or dataless clients. + +</para +><para> + +First, follow all the steps above in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +Copy the Linux kernel image on your TFTP server using the +<userinput +>a.out</userinput +> image for the architecture you are +booting. + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +Untar the root archive on your NFS server (can be the same system as +your TFTP server): + +<informalexample +><screen +> +# cd /tftpboot +# tar xvzf root.tar.gz +</screen +></informalexample> + +Be sure to use the GNU <command +>tar</command +> (other tar programs, like the +SunOS one, badly handle devices as plain files). + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +Export your <filename +>/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root</filename +> directory +with root access to your client. E.g., add the following line to +<filename +>/etc/exports</filename +> (GNU/Linux syntax, should be similar +for SunOS): + +<informalexample +><screen +> +/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root <replaceable>client</replaceable>(rw,no_root_squash) +</screen +></informalexample> + +NOTE: <replaceable +>client</replaceable +> is the host name or IP address recognized +by the server for the system you are booting. + +</para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para> + +Create a symbolic link from your client IP address in dotted notation +to <filename +>debian-sparc-root</filename +> in the +<filename +>/tftpboot</filename +> directory. For example, if the client +IP address is 192.168.1.3, do + +<informalexample +><screen +> +# ln -s debian-sparc-root 192.168.1.3 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-nfsroot"> + <title +>Installing with TFTP and NFS Root</title> +<para> + +Installing with TFTP and NFS Root is similar to +<xref linkend="tftp-low-memory"/> because you don't want to +load the RAMdisk anymore but boot from the newly created NFS-root file +system. You then need to replace the symlink to the tftpboot image by +a symlink to the kernel image (for example, +<filename +>linux-a.out</filename +>). + +</para +><para> + +RARP/TFTP requires all daemons to be running on the same server (the +workstation is sending a TFTP request back to the server that replied +to its previous RARP request). + +</para> + + + </sect2> +END FIXME --> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/install-tftp.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file install-methods/automatic-install.xml --> +<!-- $Id: automatic-install.xml 33725 2006-01-03 19:39:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="automatic-install"> + <title +>Automatic Installation</title> +<para +>For installing on multiple computers it's possible to do fully automatic installations. Debian packages intended for this include <classname +>fai</classname +> (which uses an install server), <classname +>replicator</classname +>, <classname +>systemimager</classname +>, <classname +>autoinstall</classname +>, and the Debian Installer itself. </para> + + <sect2 id="preseed"> + <title +>Automatic Installation Using the Debian Installer</title> +<para +>The Debian Installer supports automating installs via preconfiguration files. A preconfiguration file can be loaded from the network or from removable media, and used to fill in answers to questions asked during the installation process. </para +><para +>Full documentation on preseeding including a working example that you can edit is in <xref linkend="appendix-preseed"/>. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file install-methods/automatic-install.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file install-methods/install-methods.xml --> diff --git a/nb/partitioning/partitioning.xml b/nb/partitioning/partitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac17afcef --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/partitioning/partitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,898 @@ +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partitioning.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partitioning.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<appendix id="partitioning"> +<title +>Partitioning for Debian</title> + + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/sizing.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sizing.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + + + <sect1 id="partition-sizing"> + <title +>Deciding on Debian Partitions and Sizes</title> +<para +>At a bare minimum, GNU/Linux needs one partition for itself. You can have a single partition containing the entire operating system, applications, and your personal files. Most people feel that a separate swap partition is also a necessity, although it's not strictly true. <quote +>Swap</quote +> is scratch space for an operating system, which allows the system to use disk storage as <quote +>virtual memory</quote +>. By putting swap on a separate partition, Linux can make much more efficient use of it. It is possible to force Linux to use a regular file as swap, but it is not recommended. </para +><para +>Most people choose to give GNU/Linux more than the minimum number of partitions, however. There are two reasons you might want to break up the file system into a number of smaller partitions. The first is for safety. If something happens to corrupt the file system, generally only one partition is affected. Thus, you only have to replace (from the backups you've been carefully keeping) a portion of your system. At a bare minimum, you should consider creating what is commonly called a <quote +>root partition</quote +>. This contains the most essential components of the system. If any other partitions get corrupted, you can still boot into GNU/Linux to fix the system. This can save you the trouble of having to reinstall the system from scratch. </para +><para +>The second reason is generally more important in a business setting, but it really depends on your use of the machine. For example, a mail server getting spammed with e-mail can easily fill a partition. If you made <filename +>/var/mail</filename +> a separate partition on the mail server, most of the system will remain working even if you get spammed. </para +><para +>The only real drawback to using more partitions is that it is often difficult to know in advance what your needs will be. If you make a partition too small then you will either have to reinstall the system or you will be constantly moving things around to make room in the undersized partition. On the other hand, if you make the partition too big, you will be wasting space that could be used elsewhere. Disk space is cheap nowadays, but why throw your money away? </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file partitioning/sizing.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/tree.xml --> +<!-- $Id: tree.xml 39465 2006-07-30 15:03:12Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect1 id="directory-tree"> + <title +>The Directory Tree</title> +<para +>&debian; adheres to the <ulink url="&url-fhs-home;" +>Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink +> for directory and file naming. This standard allows users and software programs to predict the location of files and directories. The root level directory is represented simply by the slash <filename +>/</filename +>. At the root level, all Debian systems include these directories: <informaltable +> <tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Directory</entry +><entry +>Content</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +><filename +>bin</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Essential command binaries</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>boot</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Static files of the boot loader</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>dev</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Device files</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>etc</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Host-specific system configuration</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>home</filename +></entry> + <entry +>User home directories</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>lib</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Essential shared libraries and kernel modules</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>media</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Contains mount points for replaceable media</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>mnt</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Mount point for mounting a file system temporarily</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>proc</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Virtual directory for system information (2.4 and 2.6 kernels)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>root</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Home directory for the root user</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sbin</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Essential system binaries</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>sys</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Virtual directory for system information (2.6 kernels)</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>tmp</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Temporary files</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>usr</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Secondary hierarchy</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>var</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Variable data</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>srv</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Data for services provided by the system</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +><filename +>opt</filename +></entry> + <entry +>Add-on application software packages</entry> +</row> +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> +</para> + +<para +>The following is a list of important considerations regarding directories and partitions. Note that disk usage varies widely given system configuration and specific usage patterns. The recommendations here are general guidelines and provide a starting point for partitioning. </para> +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>The root partition <filename +>/</filename +> must always physically contain <filename +>/etc</filename +>, <filename +>/bin</filename +>, <filename +>/sbin</filename +>, <filename +>/lib</filename +> and <filename +>/dev</filename +>, otherwise you won't be able to boot. Typically 150–250MB is needed for the root partition. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>/usr</filename +>: contains all user programs (<filename +>/usr/bin</filename +>), libraries (<filename +>/usr/lib</filename +>), documentation (<filename +>/usr/share/doc</filename +>), etc. This is the part of the file system that generally takes up most space. You should provide at least 500MB of disk space. This amount should be increased depending on the number and type of packages you plan to install. A generous workstation or server installation should allow 4–6GB. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>/var</filename +>: variable data like news articles, e-mails, web sites, databases, the packaging system cache, etc. will be placed under this directory. The size of this directory depends greatly on the usage of your system, but for most people will be dictated by the package management tool's overhead. If you are going to do a full installation of just about everything Debian has to offer, all in one session, setting aside 2 or 3 GB of space for <filename +>/var</filename +> should be sufficient. If you are going to install in pieces (that is to say, install services and utilities, followed by text stuff, then X, ...), you can get away with 300–500 MB. If hard drive space is at a premium and you don't plan on doing major system updates, you can get by with as little as 30 or 40 MB. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>/tmp</filename +>: temporary data created by programs will most likely go in this directory. 40–100MB should usually be enough. Some applications — including archive manipulators, CD/DVD authoring tools, and multimedia software — may use <filename +>/tmp</filename +> to temporarily store image files. If you plan to use such applications, you should adjust the space available in <filename +>/tmp</filename +> accordingly. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><filename +>/home</filename +>: every user will put his personal data into a subdirectory of this directory. Its size depends on how many users will be using the system and what files are to be stored in their directories. Depending on your planned usage you should reserve about 100MB for each user, but adapt this value to your needs. Reserve a lot more space if you plan to save a lot of multimedia files (pictures, MP3, movies) in your home directory. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file partitioning/tree.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/schemes.xml --> +<!-- $Id: schemes.xml 39465 2006-07-30 15:03:12Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect1> + <title +>Recommended Partitioning Scheme</title> +<para +>For new users, personal Debian boxes, home systems, and other single-user setups, a single <filename +>/</filename +> partition (plus swap) is probably the easiest, simplest way to go. However, if your partition is larger than around 6GB, choose ext3 as your partition type. Ext2 partitions need periodic file system integrity checking, and this can cause delays during booting when the partition is large. </para +><para +>For multi-user systems or systems with lots of disk space, it's best to put <filename +>/usr</filename +>, <filename +>/var</filename +>, <filename +>/tmp</filename +>, and <filename +>/home</filename +> each on their own partitions separate from the <filename +>/</filename +> partition. </para +><para +>You might need a separate <filename +>/usr/local</filename +> partition if you plan to install many programs that are not part of the Debian distribution. If your machine will be a mail server, you might need to make <filename +>/var/mail</filename +> a separate partition. Often, putting <filename +>/tmp</filename +> on its own partition, for instance 20–50MB, is a good idea. If you are setting up a server with lots of user accounts, it's generally good to have a separate, large <filename +>/home</filename +> partition. In general, the partitioning situation varies from computer to computer depending on its uses. </para +><para +>For very complex systems, you should see the <ulink url="&url-multidisk-howto;" +> Multi Disk HOWTO</ulink +>. This contains in-depth information, mostly of interest to ISPs and people setting up servers. </para +><para +>With respect to the issue of swap partition size, there are many views. One rule of thumb which works well is to use as much swap as you have system memory. It also shouldn't be smaller than 16MB, in most cases. Of course, there are exceptions to these rules. If you are trying to solve 10000 simultaneous equations on a machine with 256MB of memory, you may need a gigabyte (or more) of swap. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>On the other hand, Atari Falcons and Macs feel pain when swapping, so instead of making a large swap partition, get as much RAM as possible. </para +><para +>On 32-bit architectures (i386, m68k, 32-bit SPARC, and PowerPC), the maximum size of a swap partition is 2GB. That should be enough for nearly any installation. However, if your swap requirements are this high, you should probably try to spread the swap across different disks (also called <quote +>spindles</quote +>) and, if possible, different SCSI or IDE channels. The kernel will balance swap usage between multiple swap partitions, giving better performance. </para +><para +>As an example, an older home machine might have 32MB of RAM and a 1.7GB IDE drive on <filename +>/dev/hda</filename +>. There might be a 500MB partition for another operating system on <filename +>/dev/hda1</filename +>, a 32MB swap partition on <filename +>/dev/hda3</filename +> and about 1.2GB on <filename +>/dev/hda2</filename +> as the Linux partition. </para +><para +>For an idea of the space taken by tasks you might be interested in adding after your system installation is complete, check <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/>. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file partitioning/schemes.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/device-names.xml --> +<!-- $Id: device-names.xml 56142 2008-09-26 10:45:40Z lunar $ --> + + + <sect1 id="device-names"> + <title +>Device Names in Linux</title> +<para +>Linux disks and partition names may be different from other operating systems. You need to know the names that Linux uses when you create and mount partitions. Here's the basic naming scheme: </para> +<itemizedlist arch="not-s390"> +<listitem +><para +>The first floppy drive is named <filename +>/dev/fd0</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The second floppy drive is named <filename +>/dev/fd1</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The first SCSI disk (SCSI ID address-wise) is named <filename +>/dev/sda</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The second SCSI disk (address-wise) is named <filename +>/dev/sdb</filename +>, and so on. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The first SCSI CD-ROM is named <filename +>/dev/scd0</filename +>, also known as <filename +>/dev/sr0</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The master disk on IDE primary controller is named <filename +>/dev/hda</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The slave disk on IDE primary controller is named <filename +>/dev/hdb</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The master and slave disks of the secondary controller can be called <filename +>/dev/hdc</filename +> and <filename +>/dev/hdd</filename +>, respectively. Newer IDE controllers can actually have two channels, effectively acting like two controllers. <phrase arch="m68k" +> The letters may differ from what shows in the mac program pdisk (i.e. what shows up as <filename +>/dev/hdc</filename +> on pdisk may show up as <filename +>/dev/hda</filename +> in Debian). </phrase +> </para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="m68k" +><para +>The first ACSI device is named <filename +>/dev/ada</filename +>, the second is named <filename +>/dev/adb</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<itemizedlist arch="s390"> +<listitem +><para +>The first DASD device is named <filename +>/dev/dasda</filename +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The second DASD device is named <filename +>/dev/dasdb</filename +>, and so on. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para arch="not-s390" +>The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal number to the disk name: <filename +>sda1</filename +> and <filename +>sda2</filename +> represent the first and second partitions of the first SCSI disk drive in your system. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>Here is a real-life example. Let's assume you have a system with 2 SCSI disks, one at SCSI address 2 and the other at SCSI address 4. The first disk (at address 2) is then named <filename +>sda</filename +>, and the second <filename +>sdb</filename +>. If the <filename +>sda</filename +> drive has 3 partitions on it, these will be named <filename +>sda1</filename +>, <filename +>sda2</filename +>, and <filename +>sda3</filename +>. The same applies to the <filename +>sdb</filename +> disk and its partitions. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>Note that if you have two SCSI host bus adapters (i.e., controllers), the order of the drives can get confusing. The best solution in this case is to watch the boot messages, assuming you know the drive models and/or capacities. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Linux represents the primary partitions as the drive name, plus the numbers 1 through 4. For example, the first primary partition on the first IDE drive is <filename +>/dev/hda1</filename +>. The logical partitions are numbered starting at 5, so the first logical partition on that same drive is <filename +>/dev/hda5</filename +>. Remember that the extended partition, that is, the primary partition holding the logical partitions, is not usable by itself. This applies to SCSI disks as well as IDE disks. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>VMEbus systems using the TEAC FC-1 SCSI floppy drive will see it as normal SCSI disk. To make identification of the drive simpler the installation software will create a symbolic link to the appropriate device and name it <filename +>/dev/sfd0</filename +>. </para +><para arch="sparc" +>Sun disk partitions allow for 8 separate partitions (or slices). The third partition is usually (and is preferred to have) the <quote +>Whole Disk</quote +> partition. This partition references all of the sectors of the disk, and is used by the boot loader (either SILO, or Sun's). </para +><para arch="s390" +>The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal number to the disk name: <filename +>dasda1</filename +> and <filename +>dasda2</filename +> represent the first and second partitions of the first DASD device in your system. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file partitioning/device-names.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition-programs.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partition-programs.xml 42302 2006-10-28 23:28:36Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="partition-programs"> + <title +>Debian Partitioning Programs</title> +<para +>Several varieties of partitioning programs have been adapted by Debian developers to work on various types of hard disks and computer architectures. Following is a list of the program(s) applicable for your architecture. </para> + +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><command +>partman</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Recommended partitioning tool in Debian. This Swiss army knife can also resize partitions, create filesystems <phrase arch="x86" +> (<quote +>format</quote +> in Windows speak)</phrase +> and assign them to the mountpoints. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="fdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>fdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>The original Linux disk partitioner, good for gurus. </para +><para +>Be careful if you have existing FreeBSD partitions on your machine. The installation kernels include support for these partitions, but the way that <command +>fdisk</command +> represents them (or not) can make the device names differ. See the <ulink url="&url-linux-freebsd;" +>Linux+FreeBSD HOWTO</ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="cfdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>cfdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>A simple-to-use, full-screen disk partitioner for the rest of us. </para +><para +>Note that <command +>cfdisk</command +> doesn't understand FreeBSD partitions at all, and, again, device names may differ as a result. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="atari-fdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>atari-fdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Atari-aware version of <command +>fdisk</command +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="amiga-fdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>amiga-fdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Amiga-aware version of <command +>fdisk</command +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="mac-fdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>mac-fdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>Mac-aware version of <command +>fdisk</command +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="pmac-fdisk.txt"> +<term +><command +>pmac-fdisk</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>PowerMac-aware version of <command +>fdisk</command +>, also used by BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="fdasd.txt"> +<term +><command +>fdasd</command +></term> +<listitem +><para +>&arch-title; version of <command +>fdisk</command +>; Please read the fdasd manual page or chapter 13 in <ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf" +> Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink +> for details. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para +>One of these programs will be run by default when you select <guimenuitem +>Partition disks</guimenuitem +> (or similar). It may be possible to use a different partitioning tool from the command line on VT2, but this is not recommended. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Remember to mark your boot partition as <quote +>Bootable</quote +>. </para +><para condition="mac-fdisk.txt" +>One key point when partitioning for Mac type disks is that the swap partition is identified by its name; it must be named <quote +>swap</quote +>. All Mac linux partitions are the same partition type, Apple_UNIX_SRV2. Please read the fine manual. We also suggest reading the <ulink url="&url-mac-fdisk-tutorial;" +>mac-fdisk Tutorial</ulink +>, which includes steps you should take if you are sharing your disk with MacOS. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/alpha.xml --> +<!-- $Id: alpha.xml 39920 2006-08-17 17:52:44Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>Booting Debian from the SRM console (the only disk boot method supported by &releasename;) requires you to have a BSD disk label, not a DOS partition table, on your boot disk. (Remember, the SRM boot block is incompatible with MS-DOS partition tables — see <xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/>.) As a result, <command +>partman</command +> creates BSD disk labels when running on &architecture;, but if your disk has an existing DOS partition table the existing partitions will need to be deleted before <command +>partman</command +> can convert it to use a disk label. </para +><para +>If you have chosen to use <command +>fdisk</command +> to partition your disk, and the disk that you have selected for partitioning does not already contain a BSD disk label, you must use the <quote +>b</quote +> command to enter disk label mode. </para +><para +>Unless you wish to use the disk you are partitioning from Tru64 Unix or one of the free 4.4BSD-Lite derived operating systems (FreeBSD, OpenBSD, or NetBSD), you should <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> create the third partition as a <quote +>whole disk</quote +> partition (i.e. with start and end sectors to span the whole disk), as this renders the disk incompatible with the tools used to make it bootable with aboot. This means that the disk configured by the installer for use as the Debian boot disk will be inaccessible to the operating systems mentioned earlier. </para +><para +>Also, because <command +>aboot</command +> is written to the first few sectors of the disk (currently it occupies about 70 kilobytes, or 150 sectors), you <emphasis +>must</emphasis +> leave enough empty space at the beginning of the disk for it. In the past, it was suggested that you make a small partition at the beginning of the disk, to be left unformatted. For the same reason mentioned above, we now suggest that you do not do this on disks that will only be used by GNU/Linux. When using <command +>partman</command +>, a small partition will still be created for <command +>aboot</command +> for convenience reasons. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>For ARC installations, you should make a small FAT partition at the beginning of the disk to contain <command +>MILO</command +> and <command +>linload.exe</command +> — 5 megabytes should be sufficient, see <xref linkend="non-debian-partitioning"/>. Unfortunately, making FAT file systems from the menu is not yet supported, so you'll have to do it manually from the shell using <command +>mkdosfs</command +> before attempting to install the boot loader. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/alpha.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/hppa.xml --> +<!-- $Id: hppa.xml 35595 2006-03-18 21:15:59Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="hppa" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>PALO, the HPPA boot loader, requires a partition of type <quote +>F0</quote +> somewhere in the first 2GB. This is where the boot loader and an optional kernel and RAMdisk will be stored, so make it big enough for that — at least 4Mb (I like 8–16MB). An additional requirement of the firmware is that the Linux kernel must reside within the first 2GB of the disk. This is typically achieved by making the root ext2 partition fit entirely within the first 2GB of the disk. Alternatively you can create a small ext2 partition near the start of the disk and mount that on <filename +>/boot</filename +>, since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. <filename +>/boot</filename +> needs to be big enough to hold whatever kernels (and backups) you might wish to load; 25–50MB is generally sufficient. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/hppa.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/x86.xml --> +<!-- $Id: x86.xml 42250 2006-10-26 15:29:36Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="x86" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>If you have an existing other operating system such as DOS or Windows and you want to preserve that operating system while installing Debian, you may need to resize its partition to free up space for the Debian installation. The installer supports resizing of both FAT and NTFS filesystems; when you get to the installer's partitioning step, select the option <guimenuitem +>Manual</guimenuitem +> and then simply select an existing partition and change its size. </para +><para +>The PC BIOS generally adds additional constraints for disk partitioning. There is a limit to how many <quote +>primary</quote +> and <quote +>logical</quote +> partitions a drive can contain. Additionally, with pre 1994–98 BIOSes, there are limits to where on the drive the BIOS can boot from. More information can be found in the <ulink url="&url-partition-howto;" +>Linux Partition HOWTO</ulink +> and the <ulink url="&url-phoenix-bios-faq-large-disk;" +>Phoenix BIOS FAQ</ulink +>, but this section will include a brief overview to help you plan most situations. </para +><para +><quote +>Primary</quote +> partitions are the original partitioning scheme for PC disks. However, there can only be four of them. To get past this limitation, <quote +>extended</quote +> and <quote +>logical</quote +> partitions were invented. By setting one of your primary partitions as an extended partition, you can subdivide all the space allocated to that partition into logical partitions. You can create up to 60 logical partitions per extended partition; however, you can only have one extended partition per drive. </para +><para +>Linux limits the partitions per drive to 15 partitions for SCSI disks (3 usable primary partitions, 12 logical partitions), and 63 partitions on an IDE drive (3 usable primary partitions, 60 logical partitions). However the normal &debian; system provides only 20 devices for partitions, so you may not install on partitions higher than 20 unless you first manually create devices for those partitions. </para +><para +>If you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, nor overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), then the boot partition (the partition containing your kernel image) must be placed within the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation). </para +><para +>This restriction doesn't apply if you have a BIOS newer than around 1995–98 (depending on the manufacturer) that supports the <quote +>Enhanced Disk Drive Support Specification</quote +>. Both Lilo, the Linux loader, and Debian's alternative <command +>mbr</command +> must use the BIOS to read the kernel from the disk into RAM. If the BIOS int 0x13 large disk access extensions are found to be present, they will be utilized. Otherwise, the legacy disk access interface is used as a fall-back, and it cannot be used to address any location on the disk higher than the 1023rd cylinder. Once Linux is booted, no matter what BIOS your computer has, these restrictions no longer apply, since Linux does not use the BIOS for disk access. </para +><para +>If you have a large disk, you might have to use cylinder translation techniques, which you can set from your BIOS setup program, such as LBA (Logical Block Addressing) or CHS translation mode (<quote +>Large</quote +>). More information about issues with large disks can be found in the <ulink url="&url-large-disk-howto;" +>Large Disk HOWTO</ulink +>. If you are using a cylinder translation scheme, and the BIOS does not support the large disk access extensions, then your boot partition has to fit within the <emphasis +>translated</emphasis +> representation of the 1024th cylinder. </para +><para +>The recommended way of accomplishing this is to create a small (25–50MB should suffice) partition at the beginning of the disk to be used as the boot partition, and then create whatever other partitions you wish to have, in the remaining area. This boot partition <emphasis +>must</emphasis +> be mounted on <filename +>/boot</filename +>, since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. This configuration will work on any system, regardless of whether LBA or large disk CHS translation is used, and regardless of whether your BIOS supports the large disk access extensions. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/x86.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/ia64.xml --> +<!-- $Id: ia64.xml 43254 2006-12-09 19:03:58Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="ia64" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>The <command +>partman</command +> disk partitioner is the default partitioning tool for the installer. It manages the set of partitions and their mount points to ensure that the disks and filesystems are properly configured for a successful installation. It actually uses <command +>parted</command +> to do the on-disk partitioning. </para> + + <note> + <title +>EFI Recognized Formats</title> +<para +>The IA-64 EFI firmware supports two partition table (or disk label) formats, GPT and MS-DOS. MS-DOS, the format typically used on i386 PCs, is no longer recommended for IA-64 systems. Although the installer also provides <command +>cfdisk</command +>, you should only use <ulink url="parted.txt" +> <command +>parted</command +></ulink +> because only it can manage both GPT and MS-DOS tables correctly. </para +></note> + +<para +>The automatic partitioning recipes for <command +>partman</command +> allocate an EFI partition as the first partition on the disk. You can also set up the partition under the <guimenuitem +>Guided partitioning</guimenuitem +> from the main menu in a manner similar to setting up a <emphasis +>swap</emphasis +> partition. </para +><para +>The <command +>partman</command +> partitioner will handle most disk layouts. For those rare cases where it is necessary to manually set up a disk, you can use the shell as described above and run the <command +>parted</command +> utility directly using its command line interface. Assuming that you want to erase your whole disk and create a GPT table and some partitions, then something similar to the following command sequence could be used: <informalexample +><screen +> + mklabel gpt + mkpartfs primary fat 0 50 + mkpartfs primary linux-swap 51 1000 + mkpartfs primary ext2 1001 3000 + set 1 boot on + print + quit +</screen +></informalexample +> This creates a new partition table, and three partitions to be used as an EFI boot partition, swap space, and a root file system. Finally it sets the boot flag on the EFI partition. Partitions are specified in Megabytes, with start and end offsets from the beginning of the disk. So, for example, above we created a 1999MB ext2 file system starting at offset 1001MB from the start of the disk. Note that formatting swap space with <command +>parted</command +> can take a few minutes to complete, as it scans the partition for bad blocks. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64" +><title +>Boot Loader Partition Requirements</title> +<para +>ELILO, the IA-64 boot loader, requires a partition containing a FAT file system with the <userinput +>boot</userinput +> flag set. The partition must be big enough to hold the boot loader and any kernels or RAMdisks you may wish to boot. A minimum size would be about 20MB, but if you expect to run with multiple kernels, then 128MB might be a better size. </para +><para +>The EFI Boot Manager and the EFI Shell fully support the GPT table so the boot partition does not necessarily have to be the first partition or even on the same disk. This is convenient if you should forget to allocate the partition and only find out after you have formatted the other partitions on your disk(s). The <command +>partman</command +> partitioner checks for an EFI partition at the same time it checks for a properly set up <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> partition. This gives you an opportunity to correct the disk layout before the package install begins. The easiest way to correct this omission is to shrink the last partition of the disk to make enough free space for adding an EFI partition. </para +><para +>It is strongly recommended that you allocate the EFI boot partition on the same disk as the <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> filesystem. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64" +><title +>EFI Diagnostic Partitions</title> +<para +>The EFI firmware is significantly more sophisticated than the usual BIOS seen on most x86 PCs. Some system vendors take advantage of the ability of the EFI to access files and run programs from a hard disk filesystem to store diagnostics and EFI based system management utilities on the hard disk. This is a separate FAT format filesystem on the system disk. Consult the system documentation and accessories that come with the system for details. The easiest time to set up a diagnostics partition is at the same time you set up the EFI boot partition. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/ia64.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/mips.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mips.xml 35613 2006-03-19 04:18:28Z tbm $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>SGI machines require an SGI disk label in order to make the system bootable from hard disk. It can be created in the fdisk expert menu. The thereby created volume header (partition number 9) should be at least 3MB large. If the volume header created is too small, you can simply delete partition number 9 and re-add it with a different size. Note that the volume header must start at sector 0. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/mips.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 48741 2007-07-27 00:59:02Z lunar $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>Partitioning Newer PowerMacs</title> +<para +>If you are installing onto a NewWorld PowerMac you must create a special bootstrap partition to hold the boot loader. The size of this partition must have at least 819200 bytes and its partition type must be <emphasis +>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis +>. If the bootstrap partition is not created with the <emphasis +>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis +> type your machine cannot be made bootable from the hard disk. This partition can easily be created by creating a new partition in <command +>partman</command +> and telling it to use it as a <quote +>NewWorld boot partition</quote +>, or in <command +>mac-fdisk</command +> using the <userinput +>b</userinput +> command. </para +><para +>The special partition type Apple_Bootstrap is required to prevent MacOS from mounting and damaging the bootstrap partition, as there are special modifications made to it in order for OpenFirmware to boot it automatically. </para +><para +>Note that the bootstrap partition is only meant to hold 3 very small files: the <command +>yaboot</command +> binary, its configuration <filename +>yaboot.conf</filename +>, and a first stage OpenFirmware loader <command +>ofboot.b</command +>. It need not and must not be mounted on your file system nor have kernels or anything else copied to it. The <command +>ybin</command +> and <command +>mkofboot</command +> utilities are used to manipulate this partition. </para +><para +>In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the bootstrap partition should appear before other boot partitions on the disk, especially MacOS boot partitions. The bootstrap partition should be the first one you create. However, if you add a bootstrap partition later, you can use <command +>mac-fdisk</command +>'s <userinput +>r</userinput +> command to reorder the partition map so the bootstrap partition comes right after the map (which is always partition 1). It's the logical map order, not the physical address order, that counts. </para +><para +>Apple disks normally have several small driver partitions. If you intend to dual boot your machine with MacOSX, you should retain these partitions and a small HFS partition (800k is the minimum size). That is because MacOSX, on every boot, offers to initialize any disks which do not have active MacOS partitions and driver partitions. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file partitioning/partition/sparc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sparc.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" +><title +>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para +>Make sure you create a <quote +>Sun disk label</quote +> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. The <keycap +>s</keycap +> key is used in <command +>fdisk</command +> to create Sun disk labels. </para +><para +>Furthermore, on &arch-title; disks, make sure your first partition on your boot disk starts at cylinder 0. While this is required, it also means that the first partition will contain the partition table and the boot block, which are the first two sectors of the disk. You must <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> put swap on the first partition of the boot drive, since swap partitions do not preserve the first few sectors of the partition. You can put Ext2 or UFS partitions there; these will leave the partition table and the boot block alone. </para +><para +>It is also advised that the third partition should be of type <quote +>Whole disk</quote +> (type 5), and contain the entire disk (from the first cylinder to the last). This is simply a convention of Sun disk labels, and helps the <command +>SILO</command +> boot loader keep its bearings. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition/sparc.xml --> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partition-programs.xml --> + +</appendix> +<!-- End of file partitioning/partitioning.xml --> diff --git a/nb/post-install/post-install.xml b/nb/post-install/post-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3410a3368 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/post-install/post-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,623 @@ +<!-- Start of file post-install/post-install.xml --> +<!-- $Id: post-install.xml 43623 2006-12-29 03:47:48Z fjp $ --> + +<chapter id="post-install"> + <title +>Next Steps and Where to Go From Here</title> + + +<!-- Start of file post-install/shutdown.xml --> +<!-- $Id: shutdown.xml 39942 2006-08-18 01:43:34Z nabetaro-guest $ --> + + + <sect1 id="shutdown"> + <title +>Shutting down the system</title> + +<para +>To shut down a running Linux system, you must not reboot with the reset switch on the front or back of your computer, or just turn off the computer. Linux should be shut down in a controlled manner, otherwise files might get lost and/or disk damage might occur. If you run a desktop environment, there is usually an option to <quote +>log out</quote +> available from the application menu that allows you to shutdown (or reboot) the system. </para +><para +>Alternatively you can press the key combination <keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +> <keycap +>Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>Del</keycap +> </keycombo +> <phrase arch="powerpc;m68k" +> or <keycombo +> <keycap +>Control</keycap +> <keycap +>Shift</keycap +> <keycap +>Power</keycap +> </keycombo +> on Macintosh systems</phrase +>. A last option is to log in as root and type one of the commands <command +>poweroff</command +>, <command +>halt</command +> or <command +>shutdown -h now</command +> if either of the key combinations do not work or you prefer to type commands; use <command +>reboot</command +> to reboot the system. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/shutdown.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/new-to-unix.xml --> +<!-- $Id: new-to-unix.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect1 id="unix-intro"> + <title +>If You Are New to Unix</title> +<para +>If you are new to Unix, you probably should go out and buy some books and do some reading. A lot of valuable information can also be found in the <ulink url="&url-debian-reference;" +>Debian Reference</ulink +>. This <ulink url="&url-unix-faq;" +>list of Unix FAQs</ulink +> contains a number of UseNet documents which provide a nice historical reference. </para +><para +>Linux is an implementation of Unix. The <ulink url="&url-ldp;" +>Linux Documentation Project (LDP)</ulink +> collects a number of HOWTOs and online books relating to Linux. Most of these documents can be installed locally; just install the <classname +>doc-linux-html</classname +> package (HTML versions) or the <classname +>doc-linux-text</classname +> package (ASCII versions), then look in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename +>. International versions of the LDP HOWTOs are also available as Debian packages. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/new-to-unix.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/orientation.xml --> +<!-- $Id: orientation.xml 43576 2006-12-27 03:35:13Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect1 id="debian-orientation" +><title +>Orienting Yourself to Debian</title> +<para +>Debian is a little different from other distributions. Even if you're familiar with Linux in other distributions, there are things you should know about Debian to help you to keep your system in a good, clean state. This chapter contains material to help you get oriented; it is not intended to be a tutorial for how to use Debian, but just a very brief glimpse of the system for the very rushed. </para> + + <sect2 +><title +>Debian Packaging System</title> +<para +>The most important concept to grasp is the Debian packaging system. In essence, large parts of your system should be considered under the control of the packaging system. These include: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>/usr</filename +> (excluding <filename +>/usr/local</filename +>) </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>/var</filename +> (you could make <filename +>/var/local</filename +> and be safe in there) </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>/bin</filename +> </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>/sbin</filename +> </para +></listitem +> <listitem +><para +> <filename +>/lib</filename +> </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> For instance, if you replace <filename +>/usr/bin/perl</filename +>, that will work, but then if you upgrade your <classname +>perl</classname +> package, the file you put there will be replaced. Experts can get around this by putting packages on <quote +>hold</quote +> in <command +>aptitude</command +>. </para +><para +>One of the best installation methods is apt. You can use the command line version <command +>apt-get</command +> or full-screen text version <application +>aptitude</application +>. Note apt will also let you merge main, contrib, and non-free so you can have export-restricted packages as well as standard versions. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Application Version Management</title> +<para +>Alternative versions of applications are managed by update-alternatives. If you are maintaining multiple versions of your applications, read the update-alternatives man page. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Cron Job Management</title> +<para +>Any jobs under the purview of the system administrator should be in <filename +>/etc</filename +>, since they are configuration files. If you have a root cron job for daily, weekly, or monthly runs, put them in <filename +>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</filename +>. These are invoked from <filename +>/etc/crontab</filename +>, and will run in alphabetic order, which serializes them. </para +><para +>On the other hand, if you have a cron job that (a) needs to run as a special user, or (b) needs to run at a special time or frequency, you can use either <filename +>/etc/crontab</filename +>, or, better yet, <filename +>/etc/cron.d/whatever</filename +>. These particular files also have an extra field that allows you to stipulate the user account under which the cron job runs. </para +><para +>In either case, you just edit the files and cron will notice them automatically. There is no need to run a special command. For more information see cron(8), crontab(5), and <filename +>/usr/share/doc/cron/README.Debian</filename +>. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/orientation.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/further-reading.xml --> +<!-- $Id: further-reading.xml 30719 2005-09-21 21:05:48Z stappers $ --> + + <sect1 id="further-reading" +><title +>Further Reading and Information</title> +<para +>If you need information about a particular program, you should first try <userinput +>man <replaceable +>program</replaceable +></userinput +>, or <userinput +>info <replaceable +>program</replaceable +></userinput +>. </para +><para +>There is lots of useful documentation in <filename +>/usr/share/doc</filename +> as well. In particular, <filename +>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename +> and <filename +>/usr/share/doc/FAQ</filename +> contain lots of interesting information. To submit bugs, look at <filename +>/usr/share/doc/debian/bug*</filename +>. To read about Debian-specific issues for particular programs, look at <filename +>/usr/share/doc/(package name)/README.Debian</filename +>. </para +><para +>The <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/" +>Debian web site</ulink +> contains a large quantity of documentation about Debian. In particular, see the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/FAQ/" +>Debian GNU/Linux FAQ</ulink +> and the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/user-manuals#quick-reference" +>Debian Reference</ulink +>. An index of more Debian documentation is available from the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/ddp" +>Debian Documentation Project</ulink +>. The Debian community is self-supporting; to subscribe to one or more of the Debian mailing lists, see the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/MailingLists/subscribe" +> Mail List Subscription</ulink +> page. Last, but not least, the <ulink url="http://lists.debian.org/" +>Debian Mailing List Archives</ulink +> contain a wealth of information on Debian. </para +><para +>A general source of information on GNU/Linux is the <ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/" +>Linux Documentation Project</ulink +>. There you will find the HOWTOs and pointers to other very valuable information on parts of a GNU/Linux system. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/further-reading.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/mail-setup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mail-setup.xml 48595 2007-07-23 14:30:05Z cjwatson $ --> + + <sect1 id="mail-setup"> + <title +>Setting Up Your System To Use E-Mail</title> +<para +>Today, email is an important part of many people's life. As there are many options as to how to set it up, and as having it set up correctly is important for some Debian utilities, we will try to cover the basics in this section. </para +><para +>There are three main functions that make up an e-mail system. First there is the <firstterm +>Mail User Agent</firstterm +> (MUA) which is the program a user actually uses to compose and read mails. Then there is the <firstterm +>Mail Transfer Agent</firstterm +> (MTA) that takes care of transferring messages from one computer to another. And last there is the <firstterm +>Mail Delivery Agent</firstterm +> (MDA) that takes care of delivering incoming mail to the user's inbox. </para +><para +>These three functions can be performed by separate programs, but they can also be combined in one or two programs. It is also possible to have different programs handle these functions for different types of mail. </para +><para +>On Linux and Unix systems <command +>mutt</command +> is historically a very popular MUA. Like most traditional Linux programs it is text based. It is often used in combination with <command +>exim</command +> or <command +>sendmail</command +> as MTA and <command +>procmail</command +> as MDA. </para +><para +>With the increasing popularity of graphical desktop systems, the use of graphical e-mail programs like GNOME's <command +>evolution</command +>, KDE's <command +>kmail</command +> or Mozilla's <command +>thunderbird</command +> (in Debian available as <command +>icedove</command +><footnote +> <para +> The reason that <command +>thunderbird</command +> has been renamed to <command +>icedove</command +> in Debian has to do with licensing issues. Details are outside the scope of this manual. </para +> </footnote +>) is becoming more popular. These programs combine the function of a MUA, MTA and MDA, but can — and often are — also be used in combination with the traditional Linux tools. </para> + + <sect2 id="mail-default"> + <title +>Default E-Mail Configuration</title> +<para +>Even if you are planning to use a graphical mail program, it is important that a traditional MTA/MDA is also installed and correctly set up on your Linux system. Reason is that various utilities running on the system<footnote +> <para +> Examples are: <command +>cron</command +>, <command +>quota</command +>, <command +>logcheck</command +>, <command +>aide</command +>, … </para +> </footnote +> can send important notices by e-mail to inform the system administrator of (potential) problems or changes. </para +><para +>For this reason the packages <classname +>exim4</classname +> and <classname +>mutt</classname +> will be installed by default (provided you did not unselect the <quote +>standard</quote +> task during the installation). <classname +>exim4</classname +> is a combination MTA/MDA that is relatively small but very flexible. By default it will be configured to only handle e-mail local to the system itself and e-mails addressed to the system administrator (root account) will be delivered to the regular user account created during the installation<footnote +> <para +> The forwarding of mail for root to the regular user account is configured in <filename +>/etc/aliases</filename +>. If no regular user account was created, the mail will of course be delivered to the root account itself. </para +> </footnote +>. </para +><para +>When system e-mails are delivered they are added to a file in <filename +>/var/mail/<replaceable +>account_name</replaceable +></filename +>. The e-mails can be read using <command +>mutt</command +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="mail-outgoing"> + <title +>Sending E-Mails Outside The System</title> +<para +>As mentioned earlier, the installed Debian system is only set up to handle e-mail local to the system, not for sending mail to others nor for receiving mail from others. </para +><para +>If you would like <classname +>exim4</classname +> to handle external e-mail, please refer to the next subsection for the basic available configuration options. Make sure to test that mail can be sent and received correctly. </para +><para +>If you intend to use a graphical mail program and use a mail server of your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or your company, there is not really any need to configure <classname +>exim4</classname +> for handling external e-mail. Just configure your favorite graphical mail program to use the correct servers to send and receive e-mail (how is outside the scope of this manual). </para +><para +>However, in that case you may need to configure individual utilities to correctly send e-mails. One such utility is <command +>reportbug</command +>, a program that facilitates submitting bug reports against Debian packages. By default it expects to be able to use <classname +>exim4</classname +> to submit bug reports. </para +><para +>To correctly set up <command +>reportbug</command +> to use an external mail server, please run the command <command +>reportbug --configure</command +> and answer <quote +>no</quote +> to the question if an MTA is available. You will then be asked for the SMTP server to be used for submitting bug reports. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="config-mta"> + <title +>Configuring the Exim4 Mail Transport Agent</title> +<para +>If you would like your system to also handle external e-mail, you will need to reconfigure the <classname +>exim4</classname +> package<footnote +> <para +> You can of course also remove <classname +>exim4</classname +> and replace it with an alternative MTA/MDA. </para +> </footnote +>: <informalexample +><screen +># dpkg-reconfigure exim4-config +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para +><para +>After entering that command (as root), you will be asked if you want split the configuration into small files. If you are unsure, select the default option. </para +><para +>Next you will be presented with several common mail scenarios. Choose the one that most closely resembles your needs. </para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>internet site</term> +<listitem +><para +>Your system is connected to a network and your mail is sent and received directly using SMTP. On the following screens you will be asked a few basic questions, like your machine's mail name, or a list of domains for which you accept or relay mail. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>mail sent by smarthost</term> +<listitem +><para +>In this scenario your outgoing mail is forwarded to another machine, called a <quote +>smarthost</quote +>, which takes care of sending the message on to its destination. The smarthost also usually stores incoming mail addressed to your computer, so you don't need to be permanently online. That also means you have to download your mail from the smarthost via programs like fetchmail. </para +><para +>In a lot of cases the smarthost will be your ISP's mail server, which makes this option very suitable for dial-up users. It can also be a company mail server, or even another system on your own network. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>mail sent by smarthost; no local mail</term> +<listitem +><para +>This option is basically the same as the previous one except that the system will not be set up to handle mail for a local e-mail domain. Mail on the system itself (e.g. for the system administrator) will still be handled. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>local delivery only</term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the option your system is configured for by default. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>no configuration at this time</term> +<listitem +><para +>Choose this if you are absolutely convinced you know what you are doing. This will leave you with an unconfigured mail system — until you configure it, you won't be able to send or receive any mail and you may miss some important messages from your system utilities. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para +>If none of these scenarios suits your needs, or if you need a finer grained setup, you will need to edit configuration files under the <filename +>/etc/exim4</filename +> directory after the installation is complete. More information about <classname +>exim4</classname +> may be found under <filename +>/usr/share/doc/exim4</filename +>; the file <filename +>README.Debian.gz</filename +> has further details about configuring <classname +>exim4</classname +> and explains where to find additional documentation. </para +><para +>Note that sending mail directly to the Internet when you don't have an official domain name, can result in your mail being rejected because of anti-spam measures on receiving servers. Using your ISP's mail server is preferred. If you still do want to send out mail directly, you may want to use a different e-mail address than is generated by default. If you use <classname +>exim4</classname +> as your MTA, this is possible by adding an entry in <filename +>/etc/email-addresses</filename +>. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/mail-setup.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/kernel-baking.xml --> +<!-- $Id: kernel-baking.xml 40980 2006-09-26 00:27:16Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="kernel-baking" +><title +>Compiling a New Kernel</title> +<para +>Why would someone want to compile a new kernel? It is often not necessary since the default kernel shipped with Debian handles most configurations. Also, Debian often offers several alternative kernels. So you may want to check first if there is an alternative kernel image package that better corresponds to your hardware. However, it can be useful to compile a new kernel in order to: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>handle special hardware needs, or hardware conflicts with the pre-supplied kernels </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>use options of the kernel which are not supported in the pre-supplied kernels (such as high memory support) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>optimize the kernel by removing useless drivers to speed up boot time </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>create a monolithic instead of a modularized kernel </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>run an updated or development kernel </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>learn more about linux kernels </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + + <sect2 +><title +>Kernel Image Management</title> +<para +>Don't be afraid to try compiling the kernel. It's fun and profitable. </para +><para +>To compile a kernel the Debian way, you need some packages: <classname +>fakeroot</classname +>, <classname +>kernel-package</classname +>, <classname +>linux-source-2.6</classname +> and a few others which are probably already installed (see <filename +>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package/README.gz</filename +> for the complete list). </para +><para +>This method will make a .deb of your kernel source, and, if you have non-standard modules, make a synchronized dependent .deb of those too. It's a better way to manage kernel images; <filename +>/boot</filename +> will hold the kernel, the System.map, and a log of the active config file for the build. </para +><para +>Note that you don't <emphasis +>have</emphasis +> to compile your kernel the <quote +>Debian way</quote +>; but we find that using the packaging system to manage your kernel is actually safer and easier. In fact, you can get your kernel sources right from Linus instead of <classname +>linux-source-2.6</classname +>, yet still use the <classname +>kernel-package</classname +> compilation method. </para +><para +>Note that you'll find complete documentation on using <classname +>kernel-package</classname +> under <filename +>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename +>. This section just contains a brief tutorial. </para +><para +>Hereafter, we'll assume you have free rein over your machine and will extract your kernel source to somewhere in your home directory<footnote +> <para +> There are other locations where you can extract kernel sources and build your custom kernel, but this is easiest as it does not require special permissions. </para +> </footnote +>. We'll also assume that your kernel version is &kernelversion;. Make sure you are in the directory to where you want to unpack the kernel sources, extract them using <userinput +>tar xjf /usr/src/linux-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2</userinput +> and change to the directory <filename +>linux-source-&kernelversion;</filename +> that will have been created. </para +><para +>Now, you can configure your kernel. Run <userinput +>make xconfig</userinput +> if X11 is installed, configured and being run; run <userinput +>make menuconfig</userinput +> otherwise (you'll need <classname +>libncurses5-dev</classname +> installed). Take the time to read the online help and choose carefully. When in doubt, it is typically better to include the device driver (the software which manages hardware peripherals, such as Ethernet cards, SCSI controllers, and so on) you are unsure about. Be careful: other options, not related to a specific hardware, should be left at the default value if you do not understand them. Do not forget to select <quote +>Kernel module loader</quote +> in <quote +>Loadable module support</quote +> (it is not selected by default). If not included, your Debian installation will experience problems. </para +><para +>Clean the source tree and reset the <classname +>kernel-package</classname +> parameters. To do that, do <userinput +>make-kpkg clean</userinput +>. </para +><para +>Now, compile the kernel: <userinput +>fakeroot make-kpkg --initrd --revision=custom.1.0 kernel_image</userinput +>. The version number of <quote +>1.0</quote +> can be changed at will; this is just a version number that you will use to track your kernel builds. Likewise, you can put any word you like in place of <quote +>custom</quote +> (e.g., a host name). Kernel compilation may take quite a while, depending on the power of your machine. </para +><para +>Once the compilation is complete, you can install your custom kernel like any package. As root, do <userinput +>dpkg -i ../linux-image-&kernelversion;-<replaceable +>subarchitecture</replaceable +>_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb</userinput +>. The <replaceable +>subarchitecture</replaceable +> part is an optional sub-architecture, <phrase arch="i386" +> such as <quote +>686</quote +>, </phrase +> depending on what kernel options you set. <userinput +>dpkg -i</userinput +> will install the kernel, along with some other nice supporting files. For instance, the <filename +>System.map</filename +> will be properly installed (helpful for debugging kernel problems), and <filename +>/boot/config-&kernelversion;</filename +> will be installed, containing your current configuration set. Your new kernel package is also clever enough to automatically update your boot loader to use the new kernel. If you have created a modules package, you'll need to install that package as well. </para +><para +>It is time to reboot the system: read carefully any warning that the above step may have produced, then <userinput +>shutdown -r now</userinput +>. </para +><para +>For more information on Debian kernels and kernel compilation, see the <ulink url="&url-kernel-handbook;" +>Debian Linux Kernel Handbook</ulink +>. For more information on <classname +>kernel-package</classname +>, read the fine documentation in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename +>. </para> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/kernel-baking.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file post-install/rescue.xml --> +<!-- $Id: rescue.xml 39614 2006-08-07 15:50:11Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="rescue"> + <title +>Recovering a Broken System</title> +<para +>Sometimes, things go wrong, and the system you've carefully installed is no longer bootable. Perhaps the boot loader configuration broke while trying out a change, or perhaps a new kernel you installed won't boot, or perhaps cosmic rays hit your disk and flipped a bit in <filename +>/sbin/init</filename +>. Regardless of the cause, you'll need to have a system to work from while you fix it, and rescue mode can be useful for this. </para +><para +>To access rescue mode, type <userinput +>rescue</userinput +> at the <prompt +>boot:</prompt +> prompt, or boot with the <userinput +>rescue/enable=true</userinput +> boot parameter. You'll be shown the first few screens of the installer, with a note in the corner of the display to indicate that this is rescue mode, not a full installation. Don't worry, your system is not about to be overwritten! Rescue mode simply takes advantage of the hardware detection facilities available in the installer to ensure that your disks, network devices, and so on are available to you while repairing your system. </para +><para +>Instead of the partitioning tool, you should now be presented with a list of the partitions on your system, and asked to select one of them. Normally, you should select the partition containing the root file system that you need to repair. You may select partitions on RAID and LVM devices as well as those created directly on disks. </para +><para +>If possible, the installer will now present you with a shell prompt in the file system you selected, which you can use to perform any necessary repairs. <phrase arch="x86" +> For example, if you need to reinstall the GRUB boot loader into the master boot record of the first hard disk, you could enter the command <userinput +>grub-install '(hd0)'</userinput +> to do so. </phrase +> </para +><para +>If the installer cannot run a usable shell in the root file system you selected, perhaps because the file system is corrupt, then it will issue a warning and offer to give you a shell in the installer environment instead. You may not have as many tools available in this environment, but they will often be enough to repair your system anyway. The root file system you selected will be mounted on the <filename +>/target</filename +> directory. </para +><para +>In either case, after you exit the shell, the system will reboot. </para +><para +>Finally, note that repairing broken systems can be difficult, and this manual does not attempt to go into all the things that might have gone wrong or how to fix them. If you have problems, consult an expert. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file post-install/rescue.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file post-install/post-install.xml --> diff --git a/nb/preface.xml b/nb/preface.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbb18ddbc --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/preface.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<!-- Start of file preface.xml --> +<!-- $Id: preface.xml 24750 2005-01-04 15:33:41Z xenos-guest $ --> + +<preface> + <title +>Installasjon av &debian; &release; for &architecture;</title> +<para +>Vi er henrykt over at du har valgt å prøve Debian, og vi er sikre på at vil synes at utgaven av Debian GNU/Linux er unik. &debian; bringer sammen fri programvare av høy kvalitet fra hele verden og intergrer dem i en sammenhengende helhet. Vi er sikre på at du vil synes at resultatet er bedre enn summen av de enkelte delene. </para +><para +>Vi forstår at mange ønsker å installere Debian uten å først måtte lese denne installasjonshåndboken, Debian Installeren er lagd slik at nettopp det er mulig. Hvis du ikke har tid til å lese hele installasjonshåndboken akkurat nå, så anbefaler vi at du ihvertfall leser Installation Howto, den tar for seg de helt grunnlegende steg, og inneholder referanser til ytterligere informasjon, og hva du kan gjøre når noe går galt. Installation Howto finner du på <xref linkend="installation-howto"/>. </para +><para +>Når det er sagt, så håper vi at du senere får tid til å lese hele installasjonshåndboken, og at du gjennom å gjøre det får en mer vellykket og informativ installasjon. </para> +</preface> +<!-- End of file preface.xml --> diff --git a/nb/preparing/preparing.xml b/nb/preparing/preparing.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..25139ea0f --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/preparing/preparing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,1737 @@ +<!-- Start of file preparing/preparing.xml --> +<!-- $Id: preparing.xml 16467 2004-05-30 08:11:23Z mck-guest $ --> + +<chapter id="preparing"> + <title +>Before Installing &debian;</title> +<para +>This chapter deals with the preparation for installing Debian before you even boot the installer. This includes backing up your data, gathering information about your hardware, and locating any necessary information. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file preparing/install-overview.xml --> +<!-- $Id: install-overview.xml 56322 2008-10-06 13:20:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="install-overview"> + <title +>Overview of the Installation Process</title> +<para +>First, just a note about re-installations. With Debian, a circumstance that will require a complete re-installation of your system is very rare; perhaps mechanical failure of the hard disk would be the most common case. </para +><para +>Many common operating systems may require a complete installation to be performed when critical failures take place or for upgrades to new OS versions. Even if a completely new installation isn't required, often the programs you use must be re-installed to operate properly in the new OS. </para +><para +>Under &debian;, it is much more likely that your OS can be repaired rather than replaced if things go wrong. Upgrades never require a wholesale installation; you can always upgrade in-place. And the programs are almost always compatible with successive OS releases. If a new program version requires newer supporting software, the Debian packaging system ensures that all the necessary software is automatically identified and installed. The point is, much effort has been put into avoiding the need for re-installation, so think of it as your very last option. The installer is <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> designed to re-install over an existing system. </para +><para +>Here's a road map for the steps you will take during the installation process. </para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Back up any existing data or documents on the hard disk where you plan to install. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Gather information about your computer and any needed documentation, before starting the installation. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Create partitionable space for Debian on your hard disk. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Locate and/or download the installer software and any specialized driver files your machine requires (except Debian CD users). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Set up boot tapes/floppies/USB sticks, or place boot files (most Debian CD users can boot from one of the CDs). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Boot the installation system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem arch="not-s390" +><para +>Select the installation language. </para +></listitem> +<listitem arch="not-s390" +><para +>Activate the ethernet network connection, if available. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="s390" +><para +>Configure one network interface. </para +></listitem> +<listitem arch="s390" +><para +>Open an ssh connection to the new system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem arch="s390" +><para +>Attach one or more DASDs (Direct Access Storage Device). </para +></listitem> + +<listitem +><para +>Create and mount the partitions on which Debian will be installed. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Watch the automatic download/install/setup of the <firstterm +>base system</firstterm +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Install a <firstterm +>boot loader</firstterm +> which can start up &debian; and/or your existing system. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Load the newly installed system for the first time. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +<para condition="gtk" +>For &arch-title; you have the option of using <phrase arch="x86" +>a</phrase +> <phrase arch="powerpc" +>an experimental</phrase +> graphical version of the installation system. For more information about this graphical installer, see <xref linkend="graphical"/>. </para +><para +>If you have problems during the installation, it helps to know which packages are involved in which steps. Introducing the leading software actors in this installation drama: </para +><para +>The installer software, <classname +>debian-installer</classname +>, is the primary concern of this manual. It detects hardware and loads appropriate drivers, uses <classname +>dhcp-client</classname +> to set up the network connection, runs <classname +>debootstrap</classname +> to install the base system packages, and runs <classname +>tasksel</classname +> to allow you to install certain additional software. Many more actors play smaller parts in this process, but <classname +>debian-installer</classname +> has completed its task when you load the new system for the first time. </para +><para +>To tune the system to your needs, <classname +>tasksel</classname +> allows you to choose to install various predefined bundles of software like a Web server or a Desktop environment. </para +><para +>One important option during the installation is whether or not to install a graphical desktop environment, consisting of the X Window System and one of the available graphical desktop environments. If you choose not to select the <quote +>Desktop environment</quote +> task, you will only have a relatively basic, command line driven system. Installing the Desktop environment task is optional because it requires a fairly large amount of disk space, and because many &debian; systems are servers which don't really have any need for a graphical user interface to do their job. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>Just be aware that the X Window System is completely separate from <classname +>debian-installer</classname +>, and in fact is much more complicated. Installation and troubleshooting of the X Window System is not within the scope of this manual. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file preparing/install-overview.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/backup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: backup.xml 43730 2006-12-31 22:10:55Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="backup"> + <title +>Back Up Your Existing Data!</title> +<para +>Before you start, make sure to back up every file that is now on your system. If this is the first time a non-native operating system has been installed on your computer, it's quite likely you will need to re-partition your disk to make room for &debian;. Anytime you partition your disk, you run a risk of losing everything on the disk, no matter what program you use to do it. The programs used in installation are quite reliable and most have seen years of use; but they are also quite powerful and a false move can cost you. Even after backing up, be careful and think about your answers and actions. Two minutes of thinking can save hours of unnecessary work. </para +><para +>If you are creating a multi-boot system, make sure that you have the distribution media of any other present operating systems on hand. Especially if you repartition your boot drive, you might find that you have to reinstall your operating system's boot loader, or in many cases the whole operating system itself and all files on the affected partitions. </para> + +<para arch="m68k" +>With the exception of the BVM and Motorola VMEbus computers, the only supported installation method for m68k systems is booting from a local disk or floppy using an AmigaOS/TOS/MacOS-based bootstrap, for these machines you will need the original operating system in order to boot Linux. In order to boot Linux on the BVM and Motorola VMEbus machines you will need the <quote +>BVMBug</quote +> or <quote +>16xBug</quote +> boot ROMs. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file preparing/backup.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/needed-info.xml --> +<!-- $Id: needed-info.xml 56150 2008-09-26 10:48:26Z lunar $ --> + + <sect1 id="needed-info"> + <title +>Information You Will Need</title> + + <sect2> + <title +>Documentation</title> + + <sect3> + <title +>Installation Manual</title> + +<para condition="for_cd" +>This document you are now reading, in plain ASCII, HTML or PDF format. </para> + +<itemizedlist condition="for_cd" +>&list-install-manual-files; </itemizedlist> + +<para condition="for_wdo" +>The document you are now reading, which is the official version of the Installation Guide for the &releasename; release of Debian; available in <ulink url="&url-release-area;/installmanual" +>various formats and translations</ulink +>. </para> + +<para condition="for_alioth" +>The document you are now reading, which is a development version of the Installation Guide for the next release of Debian; available in <ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;" +>various formats and translations</ulink +>. </para> + +</sect3> + + + <sect3 +><title +>Hardware documentation</title> +<para +>Often contains useful information on configuring or using your hardware. </para> + + <!-- We need the arch dependence for the whole list to ensure proper xml + as long as not architectures have a paragraph --> + <itemizedlist arch="x86;m68k;alpha;sparc;mips;mipsel"> +<listitem arch="x86" +><para> + +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;" +>Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="m68k" +><para> + +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;" +>Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="alpha" +><para> + +<ulink url="&url-alpha-faq;" +>Linux/Alpha FAQ</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="sparc" +><para> + +<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;" +>Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="mips;mipsel" +><para> + +<ulink url="&url-linux-mips;" +>Linux/Mips website</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 arch="s390"> + <title +>&arch-title; Hardware References</title> +<para +>Installation instructions and device drivers (DASD, XPRAM, Console, tape, z90 crypto, chandev, network) for Linux on &arch-title; using kernel 2.4 </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf" +>Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>IBM Redbook describing how Linux can be combined with z/VM on zSeries and &arch-title; hardware. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf" +>Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>IBM Redbook describing the Linux distributions available for the mainframe. It has no chapter about Debian but the basic installation concepts are the same across all &arch-title; distributions. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para> + +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf" +>Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> + +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="fsohi"> + <title +>Finding Sources of Hardware Information</title> +<para +>In many cases, the installer will be able to automatically detect your hardware. But to be prepared, we do recommend familiarizing yourself with your hardware before the install. </para +><para +>Hardware information can be gathered from: </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>The manuals that come with each piece of hardware. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The BIOS setup screens of your computer. You can view these screens when you start your computer by pressing a combination of keys. Check your manual for the combination. Often, it is the <keycap +>Delete</keycap +> key. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The cases and boxes for each piece of hardware. </para +></listitem> + +<listitem arch="x86" +><para +>The System window in the Windows Control Panel. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>System commands or tools in another operating system, including file manager displays. This source is especially useful for information about RAM and hard drive memory. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Your system administrator or Internet Service Provider. These sources can tell you the settings you need to set up your networking and e-mail. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +<table> +<title +>Hardware Information Needed for an Install</title> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Hardware</entry +><entry +>Information You Might Need</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="5" +>Hard Drives</entry> + <entry +>How many you have.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Their order on the system.</entry +></row> +<!-- "not-m68k;not-s390" would really turn out to be everything... --> +<row arch="alpha;arm;hppa;x86;ia64;mips;mipsel;powerpc;sparc"> + <entry +>Whether IDE (also known as PATA), SATA or SCSI.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="m68k"> + <entry +>Whether IDE or SCSI (most m68k computers are SCSI).</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Available free space.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Partitions.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry +>Partitions where other operating systems are installed.</entry> +</row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="5" +>Monitor</entry> + <entry +>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Resolutions supported.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Horizontal refresh rate.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Vertical refresh rate.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry +>Color depth (number of colors) supported.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Screen size.</entry +></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="3" +>Mouse</entry> + <entry +>Type: serial, PS/2, or USB.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Port.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Manufacturer.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Number of buttons.</entry +></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="1" +>Network</entry> + <entry +>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Type of adapter.</entry +></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="1" +>Printer</entry> + <entry +>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Printing resolutions supported.</entry +></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="2" +>Video Card</entry> + <entry +>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390" +><entry +>Video RAM available.</entry +></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry +>Resolutions and color depths supported (these should be checked against your monitor's capabilities).</entry> +</row> + +<row arch="s390"> + <entry morerows="1" +>DASD</entry> + <entry +>Device number(s).</entry> +</row> +<row arch="s390" +><entry +>Available free space.</entry +></row> + +<row arch="s390"> + <entry morerows="2" +>Network</entry> + <entry +>Type of adapter.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="s390" +><entry +>Device numbers.</entry +></row> +<row arch="s390" +><entry +>Relative adapter number for OSA cards.</entry +></row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></table> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Hardware Compatibility</title> + +<para +>Many brand name products work without trouble on Linux. Moreover, hardware support in Linux is improving daily. However, Linux still does not run as many different types of hardware as some operating systems. </para +><para arch="x86" +>In particular, Linux usually cannot run hardware that requires a running version of Windows to work. </para +><para arch="x86" +>Although some Windows-specific hardware can be made to run on Linux, doing so usually requires extra effort. In addition, Linux drivers for Windows-specific hardware are usually specific to one Linux kernel. Therefore, they can quickly become obsolete. </para +><para arch="x86" +>So called win-modems are the most common type of this hardware. However, printers and other equipment may also be Windows-specific. </para +><para +>You can check hardware compatibility by: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Checking manufacturers' web sites for new drivers. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Looking at web sites or manuals for information about emulation. Lesser known brands can sometimes use the drivers or settings for better-known ones. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Checking hardware compatibility lists for Linux on web sites dedicated to your architecture. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Searching the Internet for other users' experiences. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title +>Network Settings</title> + +<para +>If your computer is connected to a network 24 hours a day (i.e., an Ethernet or equivalent connection — not a PPP connection), you should ask your network's system administrator for this information. <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Your host name (you may be able to decide this on your own). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Your domain name. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Your computer's IP address. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The netmask to use with your network. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The IP address of the default gateway system you should route to, if your network <emphasis +>has</emphasis +> a gateway. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The system on your network that you should use as a DNS (Domain Name Service) server. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>On the other hand, if your administrator tells you that a DHCP server is available and is recommended, then you don't need this information because the DHCP server will provide it directly to your computer during the installation process. </para +><para +>If you use a wireless network, you should also find out: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>ESSID of your wireless network. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>WEP security key (if applicable). </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect2> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file preparing/needed-info.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml --> +<!-- $Id: minimum-hardware-reqts.xml 48637 2007-07-24 08:09:08Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="minimum-hardware-reqts"> +<title +>Meeting Minimum Hardware Requirements</title> +<para +>Once you have gathered information about your computer's hardware, check that your hardware will let you do the type of installation that you want to do. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than some of the recommended hardware listed in the table below. However, most users risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions. </para +><para arch="x86" +>A Pentium 4, 1GHz system is the minimum recommended for a desktop system. </para +><para arch="m68k" +>A 68030 or better processor is recommended for m68k installs. You may get by with a little less drive space than shown. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>Any OldWorld or NewWorld PowerPC can serve well as a desktop system. </para> + +<table> +<title +>Recommended Minimum System Requirements</title> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Install Type</entry> + <entry +>RAM (minimal)</entry> + <entry +>RAM (recommended)</entry> + <entry +>Hard Drive</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>No desktop</entry> + <entry +>64 megabytes</entry> + <entry +>256 megabytes</entry> + <entry +>1 gigabyte</entry> +</row +><row arch="not-s390"> + <entry +>With Desktop</entry> + <entry +>64 megabytes</entry> + <entry +>512 megabytes</entry> + <entry +>5 gigabytes</entry> +</row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></table> + +<para +>The actual minimum memory requirements are a lot less then the numbers listed in this table. Depending on the architecture, it is possible to install Debian with as little as 20MB (for s390) to 48MB (for i386 and amd64). The same goes for the disk space requirements, especially if you pick and choose which applications to install; see <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/> for additional information on disk space requirements. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>It is possible to run a graphical desktop environment on older or low-end systems, but in that case it is recommended to install a window manager that is less resource-hungry than those of the GNOME or KDE desktop environments; alternatives include <classname +>xfce4</classname +>, <classname +>icewm</classname +> and <classname +>wmaker</classname +>, but there are others to choose from. </para +><para +>It is practically impossible to give general memory or disk space requirements for server installations as those very much depend on what the server is to be used for. </para +><para +>Remember that these sizes don't include all the other materials which are usually to be found, such as user files, mail, and data. It is always best to be generous when considering the space for your own files and data. </para +><para +>Disk space required for the smooth operation of the &debian; system itself is taken into account in these recommended system requirements. Notably, the <filename +>/var</filename +> partition contains a lot of state information specific to Debian in addition to its regular contents, like logfiles. The <command +>dpkg</command +> files (with information on all installed packages) can easily consume 40MB. Also, <command +>apt-get</command +> puts downloaded packages here before they are installed. You should usually allocate at least 200MB for <filename +>/var</filename +>, and a lot more if you install a graphical desktop environment. </para> + + </sect1> + +<!-- End of file preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml --> +<!-- $Id: non-debian-partitioning.xml 56322 2008-10-06 13:20:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="non-debian-partitioning"> + <title +>Pre-Partitioning for Multi-Boot Systems</title> +<para +>Partitioning your disk simply refers to the act of breaking up your disk into sections. Each section is then independent of the others. It's roughly equivalent to putting up walls inside a house; if you add furniture to one room it doesn't affect any other room. </para +><para arch="s390" +>Whenever this section talks about <quote +>disks</quote +> you should translate this into a DASD or VM minidisk in the &arch-title; world. Also a machine means an LPAR or VM guest in this case. </para +><para +>If you already have an operating system on your system <phrase arch="x86" +> (Windows 9x, Windows NT/2000/XP, OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, FreeBSD, …) </phrase +> <phrase arch="alpha" +> (Tru64 (Digital UNIX), OpenVMS, Windows NT, FreeBSD, …) </phrase +> <phrase arch="s390" +> (VM, z/OS, OS/390, …) </phrase +> <phrase arch="m68k" +> (Amiga OS, Atari TOS, Mac OS, …) </phrase +> and want to stick Linux on the same disk, you will need to repartition the disk. Debian requires its own hard disk partitions. It cannot be installed on Windows or MacOS partitions. It may be able to share some partitions with other Linux systems, but that's not covered here. At the very least you will need a dedicated partition for the Debian root. </para +><para +>You can find information about your current partition setup by using a partitioning tool for your current operating system<phrase arch="x86" +>, such as fdisk or PartitionMagic</phrase +><phrase arch="powerpc" +>, such as Drive Setup, HD Toolkit, or MacTools</phrase +><phrase arch="m68k" +>, such as HD SC Setup, HDToolBox, or SCSITool</phrase +><phrase arch="s390" +>, such as the VM diskmap</phrase +>. Partitioning tools always provide a way to show existing partitions without making changes. </para +><para +>In general, changing a partition with a file system already on it will destroy any information there. Thus you should always make backups before doing any repartitioning. Using the analogy of the house, you would probably want to move all the furniture out of the way before moving a wall or you risk destroying it. </para +><para arch="hppa" condition="FIXME"> + +<emphasis +>FIXME: write about HP-UX disks?</emphasis> + +</para +><para +>If your computer has more than one hard disk, you may want to dedicate one of the hard disks completely to Debian. If so, you don't need to partition that disk before booting the installation system; the installer's included partitioning program can handle the job nicely. </para +><para +>If your machine has only one hard disk, and you would like to completely replace the current operating system with &debian;, you also can wait to partition as part of the installation process (<xref linkend="di-partition"/>), after you have booted the installation system. However this only works if you plan to boot the installer system from tapes, CD-ROM or files on a connected machine. Consider: if you boot from files placed on the hard disk, and then partition that same hard disk within the installation system, thus erasing the boot files, you'd better hope the installation is successful the first time around. At the least in this case, you should have some alternate means of reviving your machine like the original system's installation tapes or CDs. </para +><para +>If your machine already has multiple partitions, and enough space can be provided by deleting and replacing one or more of them, then you too can wait and use the Debian installer's partitioning program. You should still read through the material below, because there may be special circumstances like the order of the existing partitions within the partition map, that force you to partition before installing anyway. </para +><para arch="x86" +>If your machine has a FAT or NTFS filesystem, as used by DOS and Windows, you can wait and use Debian installer's partitioning program to resize the filesystem. </para +><para +>If none of the above apply, you'll need to partition your hard disk before starting the installation to create partitionable space for Debian. If some of the partitions will be owned by other operating systems, you should create those partitions using native operating system partitioning programs. We recommend that you do <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> attempt to create partitions for &debian; using another operating system's tools. Instead, you should just create the native operating system's partitions you will want to retain. </para +><para +>If you are going to install more than one operating system on the same machine, you should install all other system(s) before proceeding with Linux installation. Windows and other OS installations may destroy your ability to start Linux, or encourage you to reformat non-native partitions. </para +><para +>You can recover from these actions or avoid them, but installing the native system first saves you trouble. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the Linux partitions should appear before all other partitions on the disk, especially MacOS boot partitions. This should be kept in mind when pre-partitioning; you should create a Linux placeholder partition to come <emphasis +>before</emphasis +> the other bootable partitions on the disk. (The small partitions dedicated to Apple disk drivers are not bootable.) You can delete the placeholder with the Linux partition tools later during the actual install, and replace it with Linux partitions. </para +><para +>If you currently have one hard disk with one partition (a common setup for desktop computers), and you want to multi-boot the native operating system and Debian, you will need to: <orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Back up everything on the computer. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Boot from the native operating system installer media such as CD-ROM or tapes. <phrase arch="powerpc" +>When booting from a MacOS CD, hold the <keycap +>c</keycap +> key while booting to force the CD to become the active MacOS system.</phrase +> </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Use the native partitioning tools to create native system partition(s). Leave either a place holder partition or free space for &debian;. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Install the native operating system on its new partition. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Boot back into the native system to verify everything's OK, and to download the Debian installer boot files. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Boot the Debian installer to continue installing Debian. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + + +<!-- Start of file preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml --> +<!-- $Id: alpha.xml 43576 2006-12-27 03:35:13Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" +><title +>Partitioning in Tru64 UNIX</title> +<para +>Tru64 UNIX, formerly known as Digital UNIX, which is in turn formerly known as OSF/1, uses the partitioning scheme similar to the BSD <quote +>disk label</quote +>, which allows for up to eight partitions per disk drive. The partitions are numbered <quote +>1</quote +> through to <quote +>8</quote +> in Linux and <quote +>lettered</quote +> <quote +>a</quote +> through to <quote +>h</quote +> in UNIX. Linux kernels 2.2 and higher always correspond <quote +>1</quote +> to <quote +>a</quote +>, <quote +>2</quote +> to <quote +>b</quote +> and so on. For example, <filename +>rz0e</filename +> in Tru64 UNIX would most likely be called <filename +>sda5</filename +> in Linux. </para +><para +>Partitions in a Tru64 disk label may overlap. Moreover, if this disk will be used from Tru64, the <quote +>c</quote +> partition is required to span the entire disk (thus overlapping all other non-empty partitions). Under Linux this makes <filename +>sda3</filename +> identical to <filename +>sda</filename +> (<filename +>sdb3</filename +> to <filename +>sdb</filename +>, if present, and so on). However, the partman partitioning tool used by &d-i; cannot handle overlapping partitions at present. As a result, it is currently not recommended to share disks between Tru64 and Debian. Partitions on Tru64 disks can be mounted under Debian after installation has been completed. </para +><para +>Another conventional requirement is for the <quote +>a</quote +> partition to start from the beginning of the disk, so that it always includes the boot block with the disk label. If you intend to boot Debian from that disk, you need to size it at least 2MB to fit aboot and perhaps a kernel. Note that this partition is only required for compatibility; you must not put a file system onto it, or you'll destroy data. </para +><para +>It is possible, and indeed quite reasonable, to share a swap partition between UNIX and Linux. In this case it will be needed to do a <command +>mkswap</command +> on that partition every time the system is rebooted from UNIX into Linux, as UNIX will damage the swap signature. You may want to run <command +>mkswap</command +> from the Linux start-up scripts before adding swap space with <command +>swapon -a</command +>. </para +><para +>If you want to mount UNIX partitions under Linux, note that Digital UNIX can use two different file system types, UFS and AdvFS, of which Linux only understands the former. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" +><title +>Partitioning in Windows NT</title> + +<para +>Windows NT uses the PC-style partition table. If you are manipulating existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is recommended that you use the native Windows NT tools (or, more conveniently, you can also repartition your disk from the AlphaBIOS setup menu). Otherwise, it is not really necessary to partition from Windows; the Linux partitioning tools will generally do a better job. Note that when you run NT, the Disk Administrator may offer to write a <quote +>harmless signature</quote +> on non-Windows disks if you have any. <emphasis +>Never</emphasis +> let it do that, as this signature will destroy the partition information. </para +><para +>If you plan to boot Linux from an ARC/AlphaBIOS/ARCSBIOS console, you will need a (small) FAT partition for MILO. 5 MB is quite sufficient. If Windows NT is installed, its 6 MB bootstrap partition can be employed for this purpose. Debian &releasename; does not support installing MILO. If you already have MILO installed on your system, or install MILO from other media, Debian can still be booted from ARC. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/nondeb-part/x86.xml --> +<!-- $Id: x86.xml 43576 2006-12-27 03:35:13Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="x86" +><title +>Partitioning From DOS or Windows</title> +<para +>If you are manipulating existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is recommended that you either use the scheme below or native Windows or DOS tools. Otherwise, it is not really necessary to partition from DOS or Windows; the Linux partitioning tools will generally do a better job. </para +><para +>But if you have a large IDE disk, and are not using LBA addressing, overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), or a new (post 1998) BIOS that supports large disk access extensions, then you must locate your Debian boot partition carefully. In this case, you will have to put the boot partition into the first 1024 cylinders of your hard disk (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation). This may require that you move an existing FAT or NTFS partition. </para> + + <sect3 id="lossless"> + <title +>Lossless Repartitioning When Starting From DOS, Win-32 or OS/2 </title> + +<para +>One of the most common installations is onto a system that already contains DOS (including Windows 3.1), Win32 (such as Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP), or OS/2, and it is desired to put Debian onto the same disk without destroying the previous system. Note that the installer supports resizing of FAT and NTFS filesystems as used by DOS and Windows. Simply start the installer and when you get to the partitioning step, select the option for <menuchoice +> <guimenuitem +>Manual</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +> partitioning, select the partition to resize, and specify its new size. So in most cases you should not need to use the method described below. </para +><para +>Before going any further, you should have decided how you will be dividing up the disk. The method in this section will only split a partition into two pieces. One will contain the original OS and the other will be used for Debian. During the installation of Debian, you will be given the opportunity to use the Debian portion of the disk as you see fit, i.e., as swap or as a file system. </para +><para +>The idea is to move all the data on the partition to the beginning, before changing the partition information, so that nothing will be lost. It is important that you do as little as possible between the data movement and repartitioning to minimize the chance of a file being written near the end of the partition as this will decrease the amount of space you can take from the partition. </para +><para +>The first thing needed is a copy of <command +>fips</command +> which is available in the <filename +>tools/</filename +> directory on your nearest Debian mirror. Unzip the archive and copy the files <filename +>RESTORRB.EXE</filename +>, <filename +>FIPS.EXE</filename +> and <filename +>ERRORS.TXT</filename +> to a bootable floppy. A bootable floppy can be created using the command <filename +>sys a:</filename +> under DOS. <command +>fips</command +> comes with very good documentation which you may want to read. You will definitely need to read the documentation if you use a disk compression driver or a disk manager. Create the disk and read the documentation <emphasis +>before</emphasis +> you defragment the disk. </para +><para +>The next thing needed is to move all the data to the beginning of the partition. <command +>defrag</command +>, which comes standard with DOS 6.0 and later, can easily do the job. See the <command +>fips</command +> documentation for a list of other software that may do the trick. Note that if you have Windows 9x, you must run <command +>defrag</command +> from there, since DOS doesn't understand VFAT, which is used to support for long filenames, used in Windows 95 and higher. </para +><para +>After running the defragmenter (which can take a while on a large disk), reboot with the <command +>fips</command +> disk you created in the floppy drive. Simply type <filename +>a:\fips</filename +> and follow the directions. </para +><para +>Note that there are many other partition managers out there, in case <command +>fips</command +> doesn't do the trick for you. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="partitioning-for-dos" +><title +>Partitioning for DOS</title> + +<para +>If you are partitioning for DOS drives, or changing the size of DOS partitions, using Linux tools, many people experience problems working with the resulting FAT partitions. For instance, some have reported slow performance, consistent problems with <command +>scandisk</command +>, or other weird errors in DOS or Windows. </para +><para +>Apparently, whenever you create or resize a partition for DOS use, it's a good idea to fill the first few sectors with zeros. You should do this prior to running DOS's <command +>format</command +> command by executing the following command from Linux: <informalexample +><screen +># dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hdXX bs=512 count=4 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/nondeb-part/x86.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 43576 2006-12-27 03:35:13Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Partitioning in AmigaOS</title> +<para +>If you are running AmigaOS, you can use the <command +>HDToolBox</command +> program to adjust your native partitions prior to installation. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Partitioning in Atari TOS</title> +<para +>Atari partition IDs are three ASCII characters, use <quote +>LNX</quote +> for data and <quote +>SWP</quote +> for swap partitions. If using the low memory installation method, a small Minix partition is also needed (about 2 MB), for which the partition ID is <quote +>MNX</quote +>. Failure to set the appropriate partition IDs not only prevents the Debian installation process from recognizing the partitions, but also results in TOS attempting to use the Linux partitions, which confuses the hard disk driver and renders the whole disk inaccessible. </para +><para +>There are a multitude of third party partitioning tools available (the Atari <command +>harddisk</command +> utility doesn't permit changing the partition ID); this manual cannot give detailed descriptions for all of them. The following description covers <command +>SCSITool</command +> (from Hard+Soft GmBH). <orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Start <command +>SCSITool</command +> and select the disk you want to partition (<guimenu +>Disk</guimenu +> menu, item <guimenuitem +>select</guimenuitem +>). </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>From the <guimenu +>Partition</guimenu +> menu, select either <guimenuitem +>New</guimenuitem +> to add new partitions or change the existing partition sizes, or <guimenuitem +>Change</guimenuitem +> to change one specific partition. Unless you have already created partitions with the right sizes and only want to change the partition ID, <guimenuitem +>New</guimenuitem +> is probably the best choice. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>For the <guimenuitem +>New</guimenuitem +> choice, select <guilabel +>existing</guilabel +> in the dialog box prompting the initial settings. The next window shows a list of existing partitions which you can adjust using the scroll buttons, or by clicking in the bar graphs. The first column in the partition list is the partition type; just click on the text field to edit it. When you are finished changing partition settings, save the changes by leaving the window with the <guibutton +>OK</guibutton +> button. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>For the <guimenuitem +>Change</guimenuitem +> option, select the partition to change in the selection list, and select <guilabel +>other systems</guilabel +> in the dialog box. The next window lists detailed information about the location of this partition, and lets you change the partition ID. Save changes by leaving the window with the <guibutton +>OK</guibutton +> button. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Write down the Linux names for each of the partitions you created or changed for use with Linux — see <xref linkend="device-names"/>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Quit <command +>SCSITool</command +> using the <guimenuitem +>Quit</guimenuitem +> item from the <guimenu +>File</guimenu +> menu. The computer will reboot to make sure the changed partition table is used by TOS. If you changed any TOS/GEM partitions, they will be invalidated and have to be reinitialized (we told you to back up everything on the disk, didn't we?). </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para +><para +>There is a partitioning tool for Linux/m68k called <command +>atari-fdisk</command +> in the installation system, but for now we recommend you partition your disk using a TOS partition editor or some disk tool. If your partition editor doesn't have an option to edit the partition type, you can do this crucial step at a later stage (from the booted temporary install RAMdisk). <command +>SCSITool</command +> is only one of the partition editors we know of which supports selection of arbitrary partition types. There may be others; select the tool that suits your needs. </para> +</sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" +><title +>Partitioning in MacOS</title> +<para +>Partitioning tools for Macintosh tested include <command +>pdisk</command +>, <command +>HD SC Setup</command +> 7.3.5 (Apple), <command +>HDT</command +> 1.8 (FWB), <command +>SilverLining</command +> (LaCie), and <command +>DiskTool</command +> (Tim Endres, GPL). Full versions are required for <command +>HDT</command +> and <command +>SilverLining</command +>. The Apple tool requires a patch in order to recognize third-party disks (a description on how to patch <command +>HD SC Setup</command +> using <command +>ResEdit</command +> can be found at <ulink url="http://www.euronet.nl/users/ernstoud/patch.html" +></ulink +>). </para +><para +>For IDE based Macs, you need to use <command +>Apple Drive Setup</command +> to create empty space for the Linux partitions, and complete the partitioning under Linux, or use the MacOS version of pdisk available for download from <ulink url="http://homepage.mac.com/alk/downloads/pdisk.sit.hqx" +>Alsoft</ulink +>. </para> +</sect2> + +<!-- End of file preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sparc.xml 43732 2007-01-01 08:16:06Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" +><title +>Partitioning from SunOS</title> + +<para +>It's perfectly fine to partition from SunOS; in fact, if you intend to run both SunOS and Debian on the same machine, it is recommended that you partition using SunOS prior to installing Debian. The Linux kernel understands Sun disk labels, so there are no problems there. SILO supports booting Linux and SunOS from any of EXT2 (Linux), UFS (SunOS), romfs or iso9660 (CDROM) partitions. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" +><title +>Partitioning from Linux or another OS</title> + +<para +>Whatever system you are using to partition, make sure you create a <quote +>Sun disk label</quote +> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. In <command +>fdisk</command +>, the <keycap +>s</keycap +> key is used to create Sun disk labels. You only need to do this on drives that do not already have a Sun disk label. If you are using a drive that was previously formatted using a PC (or other architecture) you must create a new disk label, or problems with the disk geometry will most likely occur. </para +><para +>You will probably be using <command +>SILO</command +> as your boot loader (the small program which runs the operating system kernel). <command +>SILO</command +> has certain requirements for partition sizes and location; see <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" +><title +>MacOS/OSX Partitioning</title> + +<para +>The <application +>Apple Drive Setup</application +> application can be found in the <filename +>Utilities</filename +> folder on the MacOS CD. It will not adjust existing partitions; it is limited to partitioning the entire disk at once. The disk driver partitions don't show up in <application +>Drive Setup</application +>. </para +><para +>Remember to create a placeholder partition for GNU/Linux, preferably positioned first in the disk layout. it doesn't matter what type it is, it will be deleted and replaced later inside the &debian; installer. </para +><para +>If you are planning to install both MacOS 9 and OS X, it is best to create separate partitions for OS 9 and OS X. If they are installed on the same partition, <application +>Startup Disk</application +> (and reboot) must be used to select between the two; the choice between the two systems can't be made at boot time. With separate partitions, separate options for OS 9 and OS X will appear when holding the <keycap +>option</keycap +> key at boot time, and separate options can be installed in the <application +>yaboot</application +> boot menu as well. Also, Startup Disk will de-bless all other mountable partitions, which can affect GNU/Linux booting. Both OS 9 and OS X partitions will be accessible from either OS 9 or OS X. </para +><para +>GNU/Linux is unable to access information on UFS partitions, but does support HFS+ (aka MacOS Extended) partitions. OS X requires one of these two types for its boot partition. MacOS 9 can be installed on either HFS (aka MacOS Standard) or HFS+. To share information between the MacOS and GNU/Linux systems, an exchange partition is handy. HFS, HFS+ and MS-DOS FAT partitions are supported by both MacOS and Linux. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml --> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: pre-install-bios-setup.xml 43696 2006-12-31 02:03:44Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="pre-install-bios-setup"> + <title +>Pre-Installation Hardware and Operating System Setup</title> +<para +>This section will walk you through pre-installation hardware setup, if any, that you will need to do prior to installing Debian. Generally, this involves checking and possibly changing firmware settings for your system. The <quote +>firmware</quote +> is the core software used by the hardware; it is most critically invoked during the bootstrap process (after power-up). Known hardware issues affecting the reliability of &debian; on your system are also highlighted. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml --> +<!-- $Id: i386.xml 56425 2008-10-15 08:50:59Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- This section is heavily outdated. It only really describes + older BIOSes and not the current situation. Most of it is not + really relevant for AMD64, but a general description would be. + File should be renamed to x86.xml if a more general text is + written. --> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="bios-setup" +><title +>Invoking the BIOS Set-Up Menu</title> + +<para +>BIOS provides the basic functions needed to boot your machine to allow your operating system to access your hardware. Your system probably provides a BIOS setup menu, which is used to configure the BIOS. Before installing, you <emphasis +>must</emphasis +> ensure that your BIOS is set up correctly; not doing so can lead to intermittent crashes or an inability to install Debian. </para +><para +>The rest of this section is lifted from the <ulink url="&url-pc-hw-faq;" +></ulink +>, answering the question, <quote +>How do I enter the CMOS configuration menu?</quote +>. How you access the BIOS (or <quote +>CMOS</quote +>) configuration menu depends on who wrote your BIOS software: </para> + +<!-- From: burnesa@cat.com (Shaun Burnet) --> +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> + <term +>AMI BIOS</term> + <listitem +><para +><keycap +>Delete</keycap +> key during the POST (power on self test) </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> + <term +>Award BIOS</term> + <listitem +><para +><keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>Alt</keycap +><keycap +>Esc</keycap +> </keycombo +>, or <keycap +>Delete</keycap +> key during the POST </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry +><term +>DTK BIOS</term> + <listitem +><para +><keycap +>Esc</keycap +> key during the POST </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry +><term +>IBM PS/2 BIOS</term> + <listitem +><para +><keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>Alt</keycap +><keycap +>Insert</keycap +> </keycombo +> after <keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>Alt</keycap +><keycap +>Delete</keycap +> </keycombo +> </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> + <term +>Phoenix BIOS</term> + <listitem +><para +><keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>Alt</keycap +><keycap +>Esc</keycap +> </keycombo +> or <keycombo +> <keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>Alt</keycap +><keycap +>S</keycap +> </keycombo +> or <keycap +>F1</keycap +> </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para +>Information on invoking other BIOS routines can be found in <ulink url="&url-invoking-bios-info;" +></ulink +>. </para +><para +>Some &arch-title; machines don't have a CMOS configuration menu in the BIOS. They require a software CMOS setup program. If you don't have the Installation and/or Diagnostics diskette for your machine, you can try using a shareware/freeware program. Try looking in <ulink url="&url-simtel;" +></ulink +>. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86" id="boot-dev-select" +><title +>Boot Device Selection</title> + +<para +>Many BIOS setup menus allow you to select the devices that will be used to bootstrap the system. Set this to look for a bootable operating system on <filename +>A:</filename +> (the first floppy disk), then optionally the first CD-ROM device (possibly appearing as <filename +>D:</filename +> or <filename +>E:</filename +>), and then from <filename +>C:</filename +> (the first hard disk). This setting enables you to boot from either a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, which are the two most common boot devices used to install Debian. </para +><para +>If you have a newer SCSI controller and you have a CD-ROM device attached to it, you are usually able to boot from the CD-ROM. All you have to do is enable booting from a CD-ROM in the SCSI-BIOS of your controller. </para +><para +>Another popular option is to boot from a USB storage device (also called a USB memory stick or USB key). Some BIOSes can boot directly from a USB storage device, but some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot from a <quote +>Removable drive</quote +> or even from <quote +>USB-ZIP</quote +> to get it to boot from the USB device. </para +><para +>Here are some details about how to set the boot order. Remember to reset the boot order after Linux is installed, so that you restart your machine from the hard drive. </para> + + <sect3 id="ctbooi"> + <title +>Changing the Boot Order on IDE Computers</title> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the BIOS utility. Often, it is the <keycap +>Delete</keycap +> key. However, consult the hardware documentation for the exact keystrokes. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Find the boot sequence in the setup utility. Its location depends on your BIOS, but you are looking for a field that lists drives. </para +><para +>Common entries on IDE machines are C, A, cdrom or A, C, cdrom. </para +><para +>C is the hard drive, and A is the floppy drive. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Change the boot sequence setting so that the CD-ROM or the floppy is first. Usually, the <keycap +>Page Up</keycap +> or <keycap +>Page Down</keycap +> keys cycle through the possible choices. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to save the changes on your computer. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="ctboos"> + <title +>Changing the Boot Order on SCSI Computers</title> +<para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the SCSI setup utility. </para +><para +>You can start the SCSI setup utility after the memory check and the message about how to start the BIOS utility displays when you start your computer. </para +><para +>The keystrokes you need depend on the utility. Often, it is <keycombo +><keycap +>Ctrl</keycap +><keycap +>F2</keycap +></keycombo +>. However, consult your hardware documentation for the exact keystrokes. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Find the utility for changing the boot order. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Set the utility so that the SCSI ID of the CD drive is first on the list. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to save the changes on your computer. Often, you must press <keycap +>F10</keycap +>. </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="x86"> + <title +>Miscellaneous BIOS Settings</title> + + <sect3 id="cd-settings" +><title +>CD-ROM Settings</title> +<para +>Some BIOS systems (such as Award BIOS) allow you to automatically set the CD speed. You should avoid that, and instead set it to, say, the lowest speed. If you get <userinput +>seek failed</userinput +> error messages, this may be your problem. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Extended vs. Expanded Memory</title> +<para +>If your system provides both ex<emphasis +>ten</emphasis +>ded and ex<emphasis +>pan</emphasis +>ded memory, set it so that there is as much extended and as little expanded memory as possible. Linux requires extended memory and cannot use expanded memory. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Virus Protection</title> +<para +>Disable any virus-warning features your BIOS may provide. If you have a virus-protection board or other special hardware, make sure it is disabled or physically removed while running GNU/Linux. These aren't compatible with GNU/Linux; moreover, due to the file system permissions and protected memory of the Linux kernel, viruses are almost unheard of<footnote +> <para +> After installation you can enable Boot Sector protection if you want. This offers no additional security in Linux but if you also run Windows it may prevent a catastrophe. There is no need to tamper with the Master Boot Record (MBR) after the boot manager has been set up. </para +> </footnote +>. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Shadow RAM</title> +<para +>Your motherboard may provide <emphasis +>shadow RAM</emphasis +> or BIOS caching. You may see settings for <quote +>Video BIOS Shadow</quote +>, <quote +>C800-CBFF Shadow</quote +>, etc. <emphasis +>Disable</emphasis +> all shadow RAM. Shadow RAM is used to accelerate access to the ROMs on your motherboard and on some of the controller cards. Linux does not use these ROMs once it has booted because it provides its own faster 32-bit software in place of the 16-bit programs in the ROMs. Disabling the shadow RAM may make some of it available for programs to use as normal memory. Leaving the shadow RAM enabled may interfere with Linux access to hardware devices. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 +><title +>Memory Hole</title> +<para +>If your BIOS offers something like <quote +>15–16 MB Memory Hole</quote +>, please disable that. Linux expects to find memory there if you have that much RAM. </para +><para +>We have a report of an Intel Endeavor motherboard on which there is an option called <quote +>LFB</quote +> or <quote +>Linear Frame Buffer</quote +>. This had two settings: <quote +>Disabled</quote +> and <quote +>1 Megabyte</quote +>. Set it to <quote +>1 Megabyte</quote +>. When disabled, the installation floppy was not read correctly, and the system eventually crashed. At this writing we don't understand what's going on with this particular device — it just worked with that setting and not without it. </para> + </sect3> + +<!-- no other platforms other than x86 provide this sort of thing, AFAIK --> + + <sect3 +><title +>Advanced Power Management</title> +<para +>If your motherboard provides Advanced Power Management (APM), configure it so that power management is controlled by APM. Disable the doze, standby, suspend, nap, and sleep modes, and disable the hard disk's power-down timer. Linux can take over control of these modes, and can do a better job of power-management than the BIOS. </para> + </sect3> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml --> +<!-- $Id: m68k.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="firmware-revs"> + <title +>Firmware Revisions and Existing OS Setup</title> + +<para +>&arch-title; machines are generally self-configuring and do not require firmware configuration. However, you should make sure that you have the appropriate ROM and system patches. On the Macintosh, MacOS version +>= 7.1 is recommended because version 7.0.1 contains a bug in the video drivers preventing the boot loader from deactivating the video interrupts, resulting in a boot hang. On the BVM VMEbus systems you should make sure you are using BVMBug revision G or higher boot ROMs. The BVMBug boot ROMs do not come as standard on the BVM systems but are available from BVM on request free of charge. </para> + + </sect2> + +<!-- End of file preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: powerpc.xml 54285 2008-07-13 12:09:54Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="invoking-openfirmware"> + <title +>Invoking OpenFirmware</title> +<para +>There is normally no need to set up the BIOS (called OpenFirmware) on &arch-title; systems. PReP and CHRP are equipped with OpenFirmware, but unfortunately, the means you use to invoke it vary from manufacturer to manufacturer. You'll have to consult the hardware documentation which came with your machine. </para +><para +>On &arch-title; Macintoshes, you invoke OpenFirmware with <keycombo +><keycap +>Command (cloverleaf/Apple)</keycap +><keycap +>Option</keycap +><keycap +>o</keycap +><keycap +>f</keycap +></keycombo +> while booting. Generally it will check for these keystrokes after the chime, but the exact timing varies from model to model. See <ulink url="&url-netbsd-powerpc-faq;" +></ulink +> for more hints. </para +><para +>The OpenFirmware prompt looks like this: <informalexample +><screen +> +ok +0 > +</screen +></informalexample +> Note that on older model &arch-title; Macs, the default and sometimes hardwired I/O for OpenFirmware user interaction is through the serial (modem) port. If you invoke OpenFirmware on one of these machines, you will just see a black screen. In that case, a terminal program running on another computer, connected to the modem port, is needed to interact with OpenFirmware. </para +><para +>The OpenFirmware on OldWorld Beige G3 machines, OF versions 2.0f1 and 2.4, is broken. These machines will most likely not be able to boot from the hard drive unless the firmware is patched. A firmware patch is included in the <application +>System Disk 2.3.1</application +> utility, available from Apple at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.apple.com/developer/macosxserver/utilities/SystemDisk2.3.1.smi.bin" +></ulink +>. After unpacking the utility in MacOS, and launching it, select the <guibutton +>Save</guibutton +> button to have the firmware patches installed to nvram. </para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: sparc.xml 43641 2006-12-29 05:23:38Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="invoking-openboot" +><title +>Invoking OpenBoot</title> + +<para +>OpenBoot provides the basic functions needed to boot the &arch-title; architecture. This is rather similar in function to the BIOS in the x86 architecture, although much nicer. The Sun boot PROMs have a built-in forth interpreter which lets you do quite a number of things with your machine, such as diagnostics and simple scripts. </para +><para +>To get to the boot prompt you need to hold down the <keycap +>Stop</keycap +> key (on older type 4 keyboards, use the <keycap +>L1</keycap +> key, if you have a PC keyboard adapter, use the <keycap +>Break</keycap +> key) and press the <keycap +>A</keycap +> key. The boot PROM will give you a prompt, either <userinput +>ok</userinput +> or <userinput +>></userinput +>. It is preferred to have the <userinput +>ok</userinput +> prompt. So if you get the old style prompt, hit the <keycap +>n</keycap +> key to get the new style prompt. </para +><para +>If you are using a serial console, send a break to the machine. With Minicom, use <keycap +>Ctrl-A F</keycap +>, with cu, hit <keycap +>Enter</keycap +>, then type <userinput +>%~break</userinput +>. Consult the documentation of your terminal emulator if you are using a different program. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-dev-select-sun"> + <title +>Boot Device Selection</title> + +<para +>You can use OpenBoot to boot from specific devices, and also to change your default boot device. However, you need to know some details about how OpenBoot names devices; it's considerably different from Linux device naming, described in <xref linkend="device-names"/>. Also, the command will vary a bit, depending on what version of OpenBoot you have. More information about OpenBoot can be found in the <ulink url="&url-openboot;" +>Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink +>. </para +><para +>Typically, with newer revisions, you can use OpenBoot devices such as <quote +>floppy</quote +>, <quote +>cdrom</quote +>, <quote +>net</quote +>, <quote +>disk</quote +>, or <quote +>disk2</quote +>. These have the obvious meanings; the <quote +>net</quote +> device is for booting from the network. Additionally, the device name can specify a particular partition of a disk, such as <quote +>disk2:a</quote +> to boot disk2, first partition. Full OpenBoot device names have the form: <informalexample +> <screen +> +<replaceable>driver-name</replaceable>@ +<replaceable>unit-address</replaceable>: +<replaceable>device-arguments</replaceable> +</screen +></informalexample +> In older revisions of OpenBoot, device naming is a bit different: the floppy device is called <quote +>/fd</quote +>, and SCSI disk devices are of the form <quote +>sd(<replaceable +>controller</replaceable +>, <replaceable +>disk-target-id</replaceable +>, <replaceable +>disk-lun</replaceable +>)</quote +>. The command <userinput +>show-devs</userinput +> in newer OpenBoot revisions is useful for viewing the currently configured devices. For full information, whatever your revision, see the <ulink url="&url-openboot;" +>Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink +>. </para +><para +>To boot from a specific device, use the command <userinput +>boot <replaceable +>device</replaceable +></userinput +>. You can set this behavior as the default using the <userinput +>setenv</userinput +> command. However, the name of the variable to set changed between OpenBoot revisions. In OpenBoot 1.x, use the command <userinput +>setenv boot-from <replaceable +>device</replaceable +></userinput +>. In later revisions of OpenBoot, use the command <userinput +>setenv boot-device <replaceable +>device</replaceable +></userinput +>. Note, this is also configurable using the <command +>eeprom</command +> command on Solaris, or modifying the appropriate files in <filename +>/proc/openprom/options/</filename +>, for example under Linux: <informalexample +><screen +> +# echo disk1:1 > /proc/openprom/options/boot-device +</screen +></informalexample +> and under Solaris: <informalexample +><screen +>eeprom boot-device=disk1:1 +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml --> +<!-- $Id: s390.xml 43655 2006-12-29 17:24:08Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect2 arch="s390" +><title +>BIOS Setup</title> +<para +>In order to install &debian; on a &arch-title; or zSeries machine you have first boot a kernel into the system. The boot mechanism of this platform is inherently different to other ones, especially from PC-like systems: there are no floppy devices available at all. You will notice another big difference while you work with this platform: most (if not all) of the time you will work remote, with the help of some client session software like telnet, or a browser. This is due to that special system architecture where the 3215/3270 console is line-based instead of character-based. </para +><para +>Linux on this platform runs either natively on the bare machine, in a so-called LPAR (Logical Partition) or in a virtual machine supplied by the VM system. You can use a boot tape on all of those systems; you may use some other boot media, too, but those may not be generally available. For example, you can use the virtual card reader of a virtual machine, or boot from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) of an LPAR if the HMC and this option is available for you. </para +><para +>Before you actually perform an installation, you have to go over some design and preparation steps. IBM has made documentation available about the whole process, e.g. how to prepare an installation medium and how actually to boot from that medium. Duplicating that information here is neither possible nor necessary. However, we will describe here which kind of Debian-specific data is needed and where to find it. Using both sources of information, you have to prepare your machine and the installation medium before you can perform a boot from it. When you see the welcome message in your client session, return to this document to go through the Debian-specific installation steps. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title +>Native and LPAR installations</title> +<para +>Please refer to chapter 5 of the <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf" +> Linux for &arch-title;</ulink +> Redbook and chapter 3.2 of the <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf" +> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink +> Redbook on how to set up an LPAR for Linux. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title +>Installation as a VM guest</title> + +<para +>Please refer to chapter 6 of the <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf" +> Linux for &arch-title;</ulink +> Redbook and chapter 3.1 of the <ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf" +> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink +> Redbook on how to set up a VM guest for running Linux. </para +><para +>You need to copy all the files from the <filename +>generic</filename +> sub-directory to your CMS disk. Be sure to transfer <filename +>kernel.debian</filename +> and <filename +>initrd.debian</filename +> in binary mode with a fixed record length of 80 characters. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title +>Setting up an installation server</title> + +<para +>If you don't have a connection to the Internet (either directly or via a web proxy) you need to create a local installation server that can be accessed from your S/390. This server keeps all the packages you want to install and must make them available using NFS, HTTP or FTP. </para +><para +>The installation server needs to copy the exact directory structure from any &debian; mirror, but only the s390 and architecture-independent files are required. You can also copy the contents of all installation CDs into such a directory tree. </para +><para condition="FIXME"> + +<emphasis +>FIXME: more information needed — from a Redbook?</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect2> +<!-- End of file preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml --> + + <sect2 arch="m68k;x86;powerpc" id="hardware-issues"> + <title +>Hardware Issues to Watch Out For</title> + +<para arch="m68k" +>Atari TT RAM boards are notorious for RAM problems under Linux; if you encounter any strange problems, try running at least the kernel in ST-RAM. Amiga users may need to exclude RAM using a booter memfile. <phrase condition="FIXME" +><emphasis +> FIXME: more description of this needed. </emphasis +></phrase +> </para> + + <formalpara arch="x86"> + <title +>USB BIOS support and keyboards</title> +<para +>If you have no AT-style keyboard and only a USB model, you may need to enable legacy AT keyboard emulation in your BIOS setup. Only do this if the installation system fails to use your keyboard in USB mode. Conversely, for some systems (especially laptops) you may need to disable legacy USB support if your keyboard does not respond. Consult your main board manual and look in the BIOS for <quote +>Legacy keyboard emulation</quote +> or <quote +>USB keyboard support</quote +> options. </para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara arch="powerpc"> + <title +>Display-visibility on OldWorld Powermacs</title> + +<para +>Some OldWorld Powermacs, most notably those with the <quote +>control</quote +> display driver, may not reliably produce a colormap under Linux when the display is configured for more than 256 colors. If you are experiencing such issues with your display after rebooting (you can sometimes see data on the monitor, but on other occasions cannot see anything) or, if the screen turns black after booting the installer instead of showing you the user interface, try changing your display settings under MacOS to use 256 colors instead of <quote +>thousands</quote +> or <quote +>millions</quote +>. </para> + </formalpara> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file preparing/preparing.xml --> diff --git a/nb/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml b/nb/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..07e336d92 --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2700 @@ +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/using-d-i.xml --> +<!-- $Id: using-d-i.xml 56428 2008-10-15 09:35:28Z fjp $ --> + + + <chapter id="d-i-intro" +><title +>Using the Debian Installer</title> + + <sect1 +><title +>How the Installer Works</title> +<para +>The Debian Installer consists of a number of special-purpose components to perform each installation task. Each component performs its task, asking the user questions as necessary to do its job. The questions themselves are given priorities, and the priority of questions to be asked is set when the installer is started. </para +><para +>When a default installation is performed, only essential (high priority) questions will be asked. This results in a highly automated installation process with little user interaction. Components are automatically run in sequence; which components are run depends mainly on the installation method you use and on your hardware. The installer will use default values for questions that are not asked. </para +><para +>If there is a problem, the user will see an error screen, and the installer menu may be shown in order to select some alternative action. If there are no problems, the user will never see the installer menu, but will simply answer questions for each component in turn. Serious error notifications are set to priority <quote +>critical</quote +> so the user will always be notified. </para +><para +>Some of the defaults that the installer uses can be influenced by passing boot arguments when &d-i; is started. If, for example, you wish to force static network configuration (DHCP is used by default if available), you could add the boot parameter <userinput +>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput +>. See <xref linkend="installer-args"/> for available options. </para +><para +>Power users may be more comfortable with a menu-driven interface, where each step is controlled by the user rather than the installer performing each step automatically in sequence. To use the installer in a manual, menu-driven way, add the boot argument <userinput +>priority=medium</userinput +>. </para +><para +>If your hardware requires you to pass options to kernel modules as they are installed, you will need to start the installer in <quote +>expert</quote +> mode. This can be done by either using the <command +>expert</command +> command to start the installer or by adding the boot argument <userinput +>priority=low</userinput +>. Expert mode gives you full control over &d-i;. </para +><para condition="gtk" +>For this architecture the &d-i; supports two different user interfaces: a character-based one and a graphical one. The character-based interface is used by default unless you selected the <quote +>Graphical install</quote +> option in the initial boot menu. For more information about the graphical installer, please refer to <xref linkend="graphical"/>. </para +><para condition="not-gtk" +>For this architecture the installer uses a character-based user interface. A graphical user interface is currently not available. </para +><para +>In the character-based environment the use of a mouse is not supported. Here are the keys you can use to navigate within the various dialogs. The <keycap +>Tab</keycap +> or <keycap +>right</keycap +> arrow keys move <quote +>forward</quote +>, and the <keycombo +> <keycap +>Shift</keycap +> <keycap +>Tab</keycap +> </keycombo +> or <keycap +>left</keycap +> arrow keys move <quote +>backward</quote +> between displayed buttons and selections. The <keycap +>up</keycap +> and <keycap +>down</keycap +> arrow select different items within a scrollable list, and also scroll the list itself. In addition, in long lists, you can type a letter to cause the list to scroll directly to the section with items starting with the letter you typed and use <keycap +>Pg-Up</keycap +> and <keycap +>Pg-Down</keycap +> to scroll the list in sections. The <keycap +>space bar</keycap +> selects an item such as a checkbox. Use &enterkey; to activate choices. </para +><para arch="s390" +>S/390 does not support virtual consoles. You may open a second and third ssh session to view the logs described below. </para +><para +>Error messages and logs are redirected to the fourth console. You can access this console by pressing <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +><keycap +>F4</keycap +></keycombo +> (hold the left <keycap +>Alt</keycap +> key while pressing the <keycap +>F4</keycap +> function key); get back to the main installer process with <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +><keycap +>F1</keycap +></keycombo +>. </para +><para +>These messages can also be found in <filename +>/var/log/syslog</filename +>. After installation, this log is copied to <filename +>/var/log/installer/syslog</filename +> on your new system. Other installation messages may be found in <filename +>/var/log/</filename +> during the installation, and <filename +>/var/log/installer/</filename +> after the computer has been booted into the installed system. </para> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="modules-list" +><title +>Components Introduction</title> +<para +>Here is a list of installer components with a brief description of each component's purpose. Details you might need to know about using a particular component are in <xref linkend="module-details"/>. </para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>main-menu</term +><listitem +><para +>Shows the list of components to the user during installer operation, and starts a component when it is selected. Main-menu's questions are set to priority medium, so if your priority is set to high or critical (high is the default), you will not see the menu. On the other hand, if there is an error which requires your intervention, the question priority may be downgraded temporarily to allow you to resolve the problem, and in that case the menu may appear. </para +><para +>You can get to the main menu by selecting the &BTN-GOBACK; button repeatedly to back all the way out of the currently running component. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>localechooser</term +><listitem +><para +>Allows the user to select localization options for the installation and the installed system: language, country and locales. The installer will display messages in the selected language, unless the translation for that language is not complete in which case some messages may be shown in English. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>kbd-chooser</term +><listitem +><para +>Shows a list of keyboards, from which the user chooses the model which matches his own. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>hw-detect</term +><listitem +><para +>Automatically detects most of the system's hardware, including network cards, disk drives, and PCMCIA. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>cdrom-detect</term +><listitem +><para +>Looks for and mounts a Debian installation CD. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>netcfg</term +><listitem +><para +>Configures the computer's network connections so it can communicate over the internet. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>iso-scan</term +><listitem +><para +>Searches for ISO images (<filename +>.iso</filename +> files) on hard drives. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>choose-mirror</term +><listitem +><para +>Presents a list of Debian archive mirrors. The user may choose the source of his installation packages. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>cdrom-checker</term +><listitem +><para +>Checks integrity of a CD-ROM. This way, the user may assure him/herself that the installation CD-ROM was not corrupted. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>lowmem</term +><listitem +><para +>Lowmem tries to detect systems with low memory and then does various tricks to remove unnecessary parts of &d-i; from the memory (at the cost of some features). </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>anna</term +><listitem +><para +>Anna's Not Nearly APT. Installs packages which have been retrieved from the chosen mirror or CD. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>clock-setup</term +><listitem +><para +>Updates the system clock and determines whether the clock is set to UTC or not. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>tzsetup</term +><listitem +><para +>Selects the time zone, based on the location selected earlier. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>partman</term +><listitem +><para +>Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system, create file systems on the selected partitions, and attach them to the mountpoints. Included are also interesting features like a fully automatic mode or LVM support. This is the preferred partitioning tool in Debian. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>partitioner</term +><listitem +><para +>Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system. A partitioning program appropriate to your computer's architecture is chosen. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>partconf</term +><listitem +><para +>Displays a list of partitions, and creates file systems on the selected partitions according to user instructions. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>lvmcfg</term +><listitem +><para +>Helps the user with the configuration of the <firstterm +>LVM</firstterm +> (Logical Volume Manager). </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>mdcfg</term +><listitem +><para +>Allows the user to set up Software <firstterm +>RAID</firstterm +> (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). This Software RAID is usually superior to the cheap IDE (pseudo hardware) RAID controllers found on newer motherboards. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>base-installer</term +><listitem +><para +>Installs the most basic set of packages which would allow the computer to operate under Linux when rebooted. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>user-setup</term +><listitem +><para +>Sets up the root password, and adds a non-root user. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>apt-setup</term +><listitem +><para +>Configures apt, mostly automatically, based on what media the installer is running from. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>pkgsel</term +><listitem +><para +>Uses <classname +>tasksel</classname +> to select and install additional software. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>os-prober</term +><listitem +><para +>Detects currently installed operating systems on the computer and passes this information to the bootloader-installer, which may offer you an ability to add discovered operating systems to the bootloader's start menu. This way the user could easily choose at the boot time which operating system to start. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>bootloader-installer</term +><listitem +><para +>The various bootloader installers each install a boot loader program on the hard disk, which is necessary for the computer to start up using Linux without using a floppy or CD-ROM. Many boot loaders allow the user to choose an alternate operating system each time the computer boots. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>shell</term +><listitem +><para +>Allows the user to execute a shell from the menu, or in the second console. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term +>save-logs</term +><listitem +><para +>Provides a way for the user to record information on a floppy disk, network, hard disk, or other media when trouble is encountered, in order to accurately report installer software problems to Debian developers later. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + </sect1> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/components.xml --> +<!-- $Id: components.xml 56257 2008-10-04 14:42:49Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="module-details"> + <title +>Using Individual Components</title> +<para +>In this section we will describe each installer component in detail. The components have been grouped into stages that should be recognizable for users. They are presented in the order they appear during the install. Note that not all modules will be used for every installation; which modules are actually used depends on the installation method you use and on your hardware. </para> + + <sect2 id="di-setup"> + <title +>Setting up Debian Installer and Hardware Configuration</title> +<para +>Let's assume the Debian Installer has booted and you are facing its first screen. At this time, the capabilities of &d-i; are still quite limited. It doesn't know much about your hardware, preferred language, or even the task it should perform. Don't worry. Because &d-i; is quite clever, it can automatically probe your hardware, locate the rest of its components and upgrade itself to a capable installation system. However, you still need to help &d-i; with some information it can't determine automatically (like selecting your preferred language, keyboard layout or desired network mirror). </para +><para +>You will notice that &d-i; performs <firstterm +>hardware detection</firstterm +> several times during this stage. The first time is targeted specifically at the hardware needed to load installer components (e.g. your CD-ROM or network card). As not all drivers may be available during this first run, hardware detection needs to be repeated later in the process. </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>During hardware detection &d-i; checks if any of the drivers for the hardware devices in your system require firmware to be loaded. If any firmware is requested but unavailable, a dialog will be displayed that allows the missing firmware to be loaded from a removable medium. See <xref linkend="loading-firmware"/> for further details. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml --> +<!-- $Id: lowmem.xml 49849 2007-10-21 12:12:33Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="lowmem"> + <title +>Check available memory / low memory mode</title> + +<para +>One of the first things &d-i; does, is to check available memory. If the available memory is limited, this component will make some changes in the installation process which hopefully will allow you to install &debian; on your system. </para +><para +>The first measure taken to reduce memory consumption by the installer is to disable translations, which means that the installation can only be done in English. Of course, you can still localize the installed system after the installation has completed. </para +><para +>If that is not sufficient, the installer will further reduce memory consumption by loading only those components essential to complete a basic installation. This reduces the functionality of the installation system. You will be given the opportunity to load additional components manually, but you should be aware that each component you select will use additional memory and thus may cause the installation to fail. </para +><para +>If the installer runs in low memory mode, it is recommended to create a relatively large swap partition (64–128MB). The swap partition will be used as virtual memory and thus increases the amount of memory available to the system. The installer will activate the swap partition as early as possible in the installation process. Note that heavy use of swap will reduce performance of your system and may lead to high disk activity. </para +><para +>Despite these measures, it is still possible that your system freezes, that unexpected errors occur or that processes are killed by the kernel because the system runs out of memory (which will result in <quote +>Out of memory</quote +> messages on VT4 and in the syslog). </para +><para +>For example, it has been reported that creating a big ext3 file system fails in low memory mode when there is insufficient swap space. If a larger swap doesn't help, try creating the file system as ext2 (which is an essential component of the installer) instead. It is possible to change an ext2 partition to ext3 after the installation. </para +><para +>It is possible to force the installer to use a higher lowmem level than the one based on available memory by using the boot parameter <quote +>lowmem</quote +> as described in <xref linkend="installer-args"/>. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml --> +<!-- $Id: localechooser.xml 56423 2008-10-15 08:23:57Z fjp $ --> + + + <sect3 id="localechooser"> + <title +>Selecting Localization Options</title> + +<para +>In most cases the first questions you will be asked concern the selection of localization options to be used both for the installation and for the installed system. The localization options consist of language, country and locales. </para +><para +>The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the installer will default to English. </para +><para +>The selected country will be used later in the installation process to pick the default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your geographic location. Language and country together will be used to set the default locale for your system and to help select your keyboard. </para +><para +>You will first be asked to select your preferred language. The language names are listed both in English (left side) and in the language itself (right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. At the top of the list is an extra option that allows you to select the <quote +>C</quote +> locale instead of a language. Choosing the <quote +>C</quote +> locale will result in the installation proceding in English; the installed system will have no localization support as the <classname +>locales</classname +> package will not be installed. </para +><para +>If you selected a language that is recognized as an official language for more than one country<footnote +> <para +> In technical terms: where multiple locales exist for that language with differing country codes. </para +> </footnote +>, you will be shown a list of only those countries. To select a country that is not in that list, choose <guimenuitem +>Other</guimenuitem +> (the last option). You will then be presented with a list of continents; selecting a continent will lead to a list of relevant countries on that continent. </para +><para +>If the language has only one country associated with it, that country will be selected automatically. In that case it is only possible to select a different country by first lowering the debconf priority to medium, followed by revisiting the language selection option in the main menu of the installer. </para +><para +>A default locale will be selected based on the selected language and country. If you are installing at medium or low priority, you will have the option of selecting a different default locale and of selecting additional locales to be generated for the installed system. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml --> +<!-- $Id: kbd-chooser.xml 53452 2008-05-20 20:00:16Z tbm $ --> + + <sect3 id="kbd-chooser"> + <title +>Choosing a Keyboard</title> + +<para +>Keyboards are often tailored to the characters used in a language. Select a layout that conforms to the keyboard you are using, or select something close if the keyboard layout you want isn't represented. Once the system installation is complete, you'll be able to select a keyboard layout from a wider range of choices (run <command +>kbdconfig</command +> as root after you have completed the installation). </para +><para +>Move the highlight to the keyboard selection you desire and press &enterkey;. Use the arrow keys to move the highlight — they are in the same place in all national language keyboard layouts, so they are independent of the keyboard configuration. An 'extended' keyboard is one with <keycap +>F1</keycap +> through <keycap +>F10</keycap +> keys along the top row. </para +><para arch="powerpc" +>There are two keyboard layouts for US keyboards; the qwerty/mac-usb-us (Apple USB) layout will place the Alt function on the <keycap +>Command/Apple</keycap +> key (in the keyboard position next to the <keycap +>space</keycap +> key similar to <keycap +>Alt</keycap +> on PC keyboards), while the qwerty/us (Standard) layout will place the Alt function on the <keycap +>Option</keycap +> key (engraved with 'alt' on most Mac keyboards). In other respects the two layouts are similar. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml --> +<!-- $Id: netdevice.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml --> +<!-- $Id: ddetect.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml --> +<!-- $Id: cdrom-detect.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml --> +<!-- $Id: iso-scan.xml 23058 2004-10-12 23:51:17Z cjwatson $ --> + + <sect3 id="iso-scan"> + <title +>Looking for the Debian Installer ISO Image</title> +<para +>When installing via the <emphasis +>hd-media</emphasis +> method, there will be a moment where you need to find and mount the Debian Installer iso image in order to get the rest of the installation files. The component <command +>iso-scan</command +> does exactly this. </para +><para +>At first, <command +>iso-scan</command +> automatically mounts all block devices (e.g. partitions) which have some known filesystem on them and sequentially searches for filenames ending with <filename +>.iso</filename +> (or <filename +>.ISO</filename +> for that matter). Beware that the first attempt scans only files in the root directory and in the first level of subdirectories (i.e. it finds <filename +>/<replaceable +>whatever</replaceable +>.iso</filename +>, <filename +>/data/<replaceable +>whatever</replaceable +>.iso</filename +>, but not <filename +>/data/tmp/<replaceable +>whatever</replaceable +>.iso</filename +>). After an iso image has been found, <command +>iso-scan</command +> checks its content to determine if the image is a valid Debian iso image or not. In the former case we are done, in the latter <command +>iso-scan</command +> seeks for another image. </para +><para +>In case the previous attempt to find an installer iso image fails, <command +>iso-scan</command +> will ask you whether you would like to perform a more thorough search. This pass doesn't just look into the topmost directories, but really traverses whole filesystem. </para +><para +>If <command +>iso-scan</command +> does not discover your installer iso image, reboot back to your original operating system and check if the image is named correctly (ending in <filename +>.iso</filename +>), if it is placed on a filesystem recognizable by &d-i;, and if it is not corrupted (verify the checksum). Experienced Unix users could do this without rebooting on the second console. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/anna.xml --> +<!-- $Id: anna.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/anna.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml --> +<!-- $Id: netcfg.xml 50619 2007-12-25 09:20:39Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="netcfg"> + <title +>Configuring the Network</title> + +<para +>As you enter this step, if the system detects that you have more than one network device, you'll be asked to choose which device will be your <emphasis +>primary</emphasis +> network interface, i.e. the one which you want to use for installation. The other interfaces won't be configured at this time. You may configure additional interfaces after installation is complete; see the <citerefentry +> <refentrytitle +>interfaces</refentrytitle +> <manvolnum +>5</manvolnum +> </citerefentry +> man page. </para +><para +>By default, &d-i; tries to configure your computer's network automatically via DHCP. If the DHCP probe succeeds, you are done. If the probe fails, it may be caused by many factors ranging from unplugged network cable, to a misconfigured DHCP setup. Or maybe you don't have a DHCP server in your local network at all. For further explanation, check the error messages on the fourth console. In any case, you will be asked if you want to retry, or if you want to perform a manual setup. DHCP servers are sometimes really slow in their responses, so if you are sure everything is in place, try again. </para +><para +>The manual network setup in turn asks you a number of questions about your network, notably <computeroutput +>IP address</computeroutput +>, <computeroutput +>Netmask</computeroutput +>, <computeroutput +>Gateway</computeroutput +>, <computeroutput +>Name server addresses</computeroutput +>, and a <computeroutput +>Hostname</computeroutput +>. Moreover, if you have a wireless network interface, you will be asked to provide your <computeroutput +>Wireless ESSID</computeroutput +> and a <computeroutput +>WEP key</computeroutput +>. Fill in the answers from <xref linkend="needed-info"/>. </para +><note +><para +>Some technical details you might, or might not, find handy: the program assumes the network IP address is the bitwise-AND of your system's IP address and your netmask. The default broadcast address is calculated as the bitwise OR of your system's IP address with the bitwise negation of the netmask. It will also guess your gateway. If you can't find any of these answers, use the offered defaults — if necessary, you can change them by editing <filename +>/etc/network/interfaces</filename +> once the system has been installed. </para +></note> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml --> +<!-- $Id: choose-mirror.xml 43658 2006-12-29 18:52:39Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- +Hmm. This really does need documenting :-/ + +- Component is only selected and executed if the installer needs to load + installer components or the base system from the network + (either local or the internet). +- This means you first have to configure a network interface. +- Mirror selection is delayed until apt-setup for CD-based installs (except + businesscard) +- A list of countries is displayed with the default based on the country you + selected earlier. +- Selection of a local mirror (at top of the list: manual selection). +- After selecting a country, a list of mirrors in the country will be shown. + (not for ftp) +- Forcing to ftp can be done using "protocol=ftp" +- Note that not all mirrors are equal (see http://www.nl.debian.org/mirror/list) + +- The selected mirror will be tested. +- How to handle problems with mirrors. +--> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml --> +<!-- tzsetup is included in clock-setup --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/clock-setup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: clock-setup.xml 50618 2007-12-25 09:18:06Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="clock-setup"> + <title +>Configuring the Clock</title> + +<para +>The installer will first attempt to connect to a time server on the Internet (using the <firstterm +>NTP</firstterm +> protocol) in order to correctly set the system time. If this does not succeed, the installer will assume the time and date obtained from the system clock when the installation system was booted are correct. It is not possible to manually set the system time during the installation process. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/tzsetup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: tzsetup.xml 50620 2007-12-25 09:22:03Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- As tzsetup is invoked from inside clock-setup, this is not a + separate section --> + +<para +>Depending on the location selected earlier in the installation process, you may be shown a list of timezones relevant for that location. If your location has only one time zone, you will not be asked anything and the system will assume that time zone. </para +><para +>If for some reason you wish to set a time zone for the installed system that does <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> match the selected location, there are two options. </para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem> + +<para +>The simplest option is to just select a different timezone after the installation has been completed and you've booted into the new system. The command to do this is: <informalexample +><screen +># dpkg-reconfigure tzdata +</screen +></informalexample> + +</para> + +</listitem +><listitem> + +<para +>Alternatively, the time zone can be set at the very start of the installation by passing the parameter <userinput +>time/zone=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +> when you boot the installation system. The value should of course be a valid time zone, for example <userinput +>Europe/London</userinput +> or <userinput +>UTC</userinput +>. </para> + +</listitem> +</orderedlist> + +<para +>For automated installations the time zone can also be set using preseeding. </para> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/tzsetup.xml --> + + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/clock-setup.xml --> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-partition"> + <title +>Partitioning and Mount Point Selection</title> +<para +>At this time, after hardware detection has been executed a final time, &d-i; should be at its full strength, customized for the user's needs and ready to do some real work. As the title of this section indicates, the main task of the next few components lies in partitioning your disks, creating filesystems, assigning mountpoints and optionally configuring closely related options like RAID, LVM or encrypted devices. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: dasd.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/partman.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partman.xml 56425 2008-10-15 08:50:59Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>If you are uncomfortable with partitioning, or just want to know more details, see <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. </para> +<warning arch="sparc" +><para +>If a hard disk has previously used under Solaris, the partitioner may not detect the size of the drive correctly. Creating a new partition table does not fix this issue. What does help, is to <quote +>zero</quote +> the first few sectors of the drive: <informalexample +><screen +> +# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=512 count=2; sync +</screen +></informalexample +> Note that this will make any existing data on that disk inaccessible. </para +></warning> +<para +>First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or available free space on a drive. This is also called <quote +>guided</quote +> partitioning. If you do not want to autopartition, choose <guimenuitem +>Manual</guimenuitem +> from the menu. </para> + + <sect3 id="partman-auto"> + <title +>Guided Partitioning</title> +<para +>If you choose guided partitioning, you may have three options: to create partitions directly on the hard disk (classic method), or to create them using Logical Volume Management (LVM), or to create them using encrypted LVM<footnote +> <para +> The installer will encrypt the LVM volume group using a 256 bit AES key and makes use of the kernel's <quote +>dm-crypt</quote +> support. </para +> </footnote +>. </para> +<note +><para +>The option to use (encrypted) LVM may not be available on all architectures. </para +></note> +<para +>When using LVM or encrypted LVM, the installer will create most partitions inside one big partition; the advantage of this method is that partitions inside this big partition can be resized relatively easily later. In the case of encrypted LVM the big partition will not be readable without knowing a special key phrase, thus providing extra security of your (personal) data. </para +><para +>When using encrypted LVM, the installer will also automatically erase the disk by writing random data to it. This further improves security (as it makes it impossible to tell which parts of the disk are in use and also makes sure that any traces of previous installations are erased), but may take some time depending on the size of your disk. </para> +<note +><para +>If you choose guided partitioning using LVM or encrypted LVM, some changes in the partition table will need to be written to the selected disk while LVM is being set up. These changes effectively erase all data that is currently on the selected hard disk and you will not be able to undo them later. However, the installer will ask you to confirm these changes before they are written to disk. </para +></note> +<para +>If you choose guided partitioning (either classic or using (encrypted) LVM) for a whole disk, you will first be asked to select the disk you want to use. Check that all your disks are listed and, if you have several disks, make sure you select the correct one. The order they are listed in may differ from what you are used to. The size of the disks may help to identify them. </para +><para +>Any data on the disk you select will eventually be lost, but you will always be asked to confirm any changes before they are written to the disk. If you have selected the classic method of partitioning, you will be able to undo any changes right until the end; when using (encrypted) LVM this is not possible. </para +><para +>Next, you will be able to choose from the schemes listed in the table below. All schemes have their pros and cons, some of which are discussed in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. If you are unsure, choose the first one. Bear in mind that guided partitioning needs a certain minimal amount of free space to operate with. If you don't give it at least about 1GB of space (depends on chosen scheme), guided partitioning will fail. </para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="3"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Partitioning scheme</entry> + <entry +>Minimum space</entry> + <entry +>Created partitions</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>All files in one partition</entry> + <entry +>600MB</entry> + <entry +><filename +>/</filename +>, swap</entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Separate /home partition</entry> + <entry +>500MB</entry> + <entry +><filename +>/</filename +>, <filename +>/home</filename +>, swap </entry> +</row +><row> + <entry +>Separate /home, /usr, /var and /tmp partitions</entry> + <entry +>1GB</entry> + <entry +><filename +>/</filename +>, <filename +>/home</filename +>, <filename +>/usr</filename +>, <filename +>/var</filename +>, <filename +>/tmp</filename +>, swap </entry> +</row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +<para +>If you choose guided partitioning using (encrypted) LVM, the installer will also create a separate <filename +>/boot</filename +> partition. The other partitions, including the swap partition, will be created inside the LVM partition. </para +><para arch="ia64" +>If you choose guided partitioning for your IA-64 system, there will be an additional partition, formatted as a FAT16 bootable filesystem, for the EFI boot loader. There is also an additional menu item in the formatting menu to manually set up a partition as an EFI boot partition. </para +><para arch="alpha" +>If you choose guided partitioning for your Alpha system, an additional, unformatted partition will be allocated at the beginning of your disk to reserve this space for the aboot boot loader. </para +><para +>After selecting a scheme, the next screen will show your new partition table, including information on whether and how partitions will be formatted and where they will be mounted. </para +><para +>The list of partitions might look like this: <informalexample +><screen +> + IDE1 master (hda) - 6.4 GB WDC AC36400L + #1 primary 16.4 MB B f ext2 /boot + #2 primary 551.0 MB swap swap + #3 primary 5.8 GB ntfs + pri/log 8.2 MB FREE SPACE + + IDE1 slave (hdb) - 80.0 GB ST380021A + #1 primary 15.9 MB ext3 + #2 primary 996.0 MB fat16 + #3 primary 3.9 GB xfs /home + #5 logical 6.0 GB f ext3 / + #6 logical 1.0 GB f ext3 /var + #7 logical 498.8 MB ext3 + #8 logical 551.5 MB swap swap + #9 logical 65.8 GB ext2 +</screen +></informalexample +> This example shows two IDE harddrives divided into several partitions; the first disk has some free space. Each partition line consists of the partition number, its type, size, optional flags, file system, and mountpoint (if any). Note: this particular setup cannot be created using guided partitioning but it does show possible variation that can be achieved using manual partitioning. </para +><para +>This concludes the guided partitioning. If you are satisfied with the generated partition table, you can choose <guimenuitem +>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem +> from the menu to implement the new partition table (as described at the end of this section). If you are not happy, you can choose to <guimenuitem +>Undo changes to partitions</guimenuitem +> and run guided partitioning again, or modify the proposed changes as described below for manual partitioning. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="partman-manual"> + <title +>Manual Partitioning</title> +<para +>A similar screen to the one shown just above will be displayed if you choose manual partitioning except that your existing partition table will be shown and without the mount points. How to manually set up your partition table and the usage of partitions by your new Debian system will be covered in the remainder of this section. </para +><para +>If you select a pristine disk which has neither partitions nor free space on it, you will be asked if a new partition table should be created (this is needed so you can create new partitions). After this, a new line entitled <quote +>FREE SPACE</quote +> should appear in the table under the selected disk. </para +><para +>If you select some free space, you will have the opportunity to create a new partition. You will have to answer a quick series of questions about its size, type (primary or logical), and location (beginning or end of the free space). After this, you will be presented with a detailed overview of your new partition. The main setting is <guimenuitem +>Use as:</guimenuitem +>, which determines if the partition will have a file system on it, or be used for swap, software RAID, LVM, an encrypted file system, or not be used at all. Other settings include mountpoint, mount options, and bootable flag; which settings are shown depends on how the partition is to be used. If you don't like the preselected defaults, feel free to change them to your liking. E.g. by selecting the option <guimenuitem +>Use as:</guimenuitem +>, you can choose a different filesystem for this partition, including options to use the partition for swap, software RAID, LVM, or not use it at all. Another nice feature is the ability to copy data from an existing partition onto this one. When you are satisfied with your new partition, select <guimenuitem +>Done setting up the partition</guimenuitem +> and you will return to <command +>partman</command +>'s main screen. </para +><para +>If you decide you want to change something about your partition, simply select the partition, which will bring you to the partition configuration menu. This is the same screen as is used when creating a new partition, so you can change the same settings. One thing that may not be very obvious at a first glance is that you can resize the partition by selecting the item displaying the size of the partition. Filesystems known to work are at least fat16, fat32, ext2, ext3 and swap. This menu also allows you to delete a partition. </para +><para +>Be sure to create at least two partitions: one for the <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> filesystem (which must be mounted as <filename +>/</filename +>) and one for <emphasis +>swap</emphasis +>. If you forget to mount the root filesystem, <command +>partman</command +> won't let you continue until you correct this issue. </para +><para arch="ia64" +>If you forget to select and format an EFI boot partition, <command +>partman</command +> will detect this and will not let you continue until you allocate one. </para +><para +>Capabilities of <command +>partman</command +> can be extended with installer modules, but are dependent on your system's architecture. So if you can't see all promised goodies, check if you have loaded all required modules (e.g. <filename +>partman-ext3</filename +>, <filename +>partman-xfs</filename +>, or <filename +>partman-lvm</filename +>). </para +><para +>After you are satisfied with partitioning, select <guimenuitem +>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem +> from the partitioning menu. You will be presented with a summary of changes made to the disks and asked to confirm that the filesystems should be created as requested. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/partman.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml --> +<!-- $Id: autopartkit.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partitioner.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> + +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partconf.xml 11648 2004-03-22 00:37:46Z joeyh $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml --> +<!-- $Id: mdcfg.xml 56427 2008-10-15 09:07:45Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="mdcfg"> + <title +>Configuring Multidisk Devices (Software RAID)</title> +<para +>If you have more than one harddrive<footnote +><para +> To be honest, you can construct an MD device even from partitions residing on single physical drive, but that won't give any benefits. </para +></footnote +> in your computer, you can use <command +>mdcfg</command +> to set up your drives for increased performance and/or better reliability of your data. The result is called <firstterm +>Multidisk Device</firstterm +> (or after its most famous variant <firstterm +>software RAID</firstterm +>). </para +><para +>MD is basically a bunch of partitions located on different disks and combined together to form a <emphasis +>logical</emphasis +> device. This device can then be used like an ordinary partition (i.e. in <command +>partman</command +> you can format it, assign a mountpoint, etc.). </para +><para +>What benefits this brings depends on the type of MD device you are creating. Currently supported are: <variablelist +> <varlistentry +> <term +>RAID0</term +><listitem +><para +> Is mainly aimed at performance. RAID0 splits all incoming data into <firstterm +>stripes</firstterm +> and distributes them equally over each disk in the array. This can increase the speed of read/write operations, but when one of the disks fails, you will lose <emphasis +>everything</emphasis +> (part of the information is still on the healthy disk(s), the other part <emphasis +>was</emphasis +> on the failed disk). </para +><para +> The typical use for RAID0 is a partition for video editing. </para +></listitem +> </varlistentry +> <varlistentry +> <term +>RAID1</term +><listitem +><para +> Is suitable for setups where reliability is the first concern. It consists of several (usually two) equally-sized partitions where every partition contains exactly the same data. This essentially means three things. First, if one of your disks fails, you still have the data mirrored on the remaining disks. Second, you can use only a fraction of the available capacity (more precisely, it is the size of the smallest partition in the RAID). Third, file-reads are load-balanced among the disks, which can improve performance on a server, such as a file server, that tends to be loaded with more disk reads than writes. </para +><para +> Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. </para +></listitem +> </varlistentry +> <varlistentry +> <term +>RAID5</term +><listitem +><para +> Is a good compromise between speed, reliability and data redundancy. RAID5 splits all incoming data into stripes and distributes them equally on all but one disk (similar to RAID0). Unlike RAID0, RAID5 also computes <firstterm +>parity</firstterm +> information, which gets written on the remaining disk. The parity disk is not static (that would be called RAID4), but is changing periodically, so the parity information is distributed equally on all disks. When one of the disks fails, the missing part of information can be computed from remaining data and its parity. RAID5 must consist of at least three active partitions. Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. </para +><para +> As you can see, RAID5 has a similar degree of reliability to RAID1 while achieving less redundancy. On the other hand, it might be a bit slower on write operations than RAID0 due to computation of parity information. </para +></listitem +> </varlistentry +> <varlistentry +> <term +>RAID6</term +><listitem +><para +> Is similar to RAID5 except that it uses two parity devices instead of one. </para +><para +> A RAID6 array can survive up to two disk failures. </para +></listitem +> </varlistentry +> <varlistentry +> <term +>RAID10</term +><listitem +><para +> RAID10 combines striping (as in RAID0) and mirroring (as in RAID1). It creates <replaceable +>n</replaceable +> copies of incoming data and distributes them across the partitions so that none of the copies of the same data are on the same device. The default value of <replaceable +>n</replaceable +> is 2, but it can be set to something else in expert mode. The number of partitions used must be at least <replaceable +>n</replaceable +>. RAID10 has different layouts for distributing the copies. The default is near copies. Near copies have all of the copies at about the same offset on all of the disks. Far copies have the copies at different offsets on the disks. Offset copies copy the stripe, not the individual copies. </para +><para +> RAID10 can be used to achieve reliability and redundancy without the drawback of having to calculate parity. </para +></listitem +> </varlistentry +> </variablelist +> To sum it up: <informaltable +> <tgroup cols="5"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry +>Type</entry> + <entry +>Minimum Devices</entry> + <entry +>Spare Device</entry> + <entry +>Survives disk failure?</entry> + <entry +>Available Space</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry +>RAID0</entry> + <entry +>2</entry> + <entry +>no</entry> + <entry +>no</entry> + <entry +>Size of the smallest partition multiplied by number of devices in RAID</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>RAID1</entry> + <entry +>2</entry> + <entry +>optional</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>Size of the smallest partition in RAID</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>RAID5</entry> + <entry +>3</entry> + <entry +>optional</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in RAID minus one) </entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>RAID6</entry> + <entry +>4</entry> + <entry +>optional</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in RAID minus two) </entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry +>RAID10</entry> + <entry +>2</entry> + <entry +>optional</entry> + <entry +>yes</entry> + <entry +>Total of all partitions divided by the number of chunk copies (defaults to two) </entry> +</row> + +</tbody +></tgroup +></informaltable> + +</para +><para +>If you want to know more about Software RAID, have a look at <ulink url="&url-software-raid-howto;" +>Software RAID HOWTO</ulink +>. </para +><para +>To create an MD device, you need to have the desired partitions it should consist of marked for use in a RAID. (This is done in <command +>partman</command +> in the <guimenu +>Partition settings</guimenu +> menu where you should select <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>Use as:</guimenu +> <guimenuitem +>physical volume for RAID</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +>.) </para +><note +><para +>Make sure that the system can be booted with the partitioning scheme you are planning. In general it will be necessary to create a separate file system for <filename +>/boot</filename +> when using RAID for the root (<filename +>/</filename +>) file system. Most boot loaders <phrase arch="x86" +>(including lilo and grub)</phrase +> do support mirrored (not striped!) RAID1, so using for example RAID5 for <filename +>/</filename +> and RAID1 for <filename +>/boot</filename +> can be an option. </para +></note> +<warning +><para +>Support for MD is a relatively new addition to the installer. You may experience problems for some RAID levels and in combination with some bootloaders if you try to use MD for the root (<filename +>/</filename +>) file system. For experienced users, it may be possible to work around some of these problems by executing some configuration or installation steps manually from a shell. </para +></warning +><para +>Next, you should choose <guimenuitem +>Configure software RAID</guimenuitem +> from the main <command +>partman</command +> menu. (The menu will only appear after you mark at least one partition for use as <guimenuitem +>physical volume for RAID</guimenuitem +>.) On the first screen of <command +>mdcfg</command +> simply select <guimenuitem +>Create MD device</guimenuitem +>. You will be presented with a list of supported types of MD devices, from which you should choose one (e.g. RAID1). What follows depends on the type of MD you selected. </para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>RAID0 is simple — you will be issued with the list of available RAID partitions and your only task is to select the partitions which will form the MD. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>RAID1 is a bit more tricky. First, you will be asked to enter the number of active devices and the number of spare devices which will form the MD. Next, you need to select from the list of available RAID partitions those that will be active and then those that will be spare. The count of selected partitions must be equal to the number provided earlier. Don't worry. If you make a mistake and select a different number of partitions, &d-i; won't let you continue until you correct the issue. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>RAID5 has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 with the exception that you need to use at least <emphasis +>three</emphasis +> active partitions. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>RAID6 also has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 except that at least <emphasis +>four</emphasis +> active partitions are required. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>RAID10 again has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 except in expert mode. In expert mode, &d-i; will ask you for the layout. The layout has two parts. The first part is the layout type. It is either <literal +>n</literal +> (for near copies), <literal +>f</literal +> (for far copies), or <literal +>o</literal +> (for offset copies). The second part is the number of copies to make of the data. There must be at least that many active devices so that all of the copies can be distributed onto different disks. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para +>It is perfectly possible to have several types of MD at once. For example, if you have three 200 GB hard drives dedicated to MD, each containing two 100 GB partitions, you can combine the first partitions on all three disks into the RAID0 (fast 300 GB video editing partition) and use the other three partitions (2 active and 1 spare) for RAID1 (quite reliable 100 GB partition for <filename +>/home</filename +>). </para +><para +>After you set up MD devices to your liking, you can <guimenuitem +>Finish</guimenuitem +> <command +>mdcfg</command +> to return back to the <command +>partman</command +> to create filesystems on your new MD devices and assign them the usual attributes like mountpoints. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/partman-lvm.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partman-lvm.xml 56326 2008-10-06 23:03:54Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="partman-lvm"> + <title +>Configuring the Logical Volume Manager (LVM)</title> +<para +>If you are working with computers at the level of system administrator or <quote +>advanced</quote +> user, you have surely seen the situation where some disk partition (usually the most important one) was short on space, while some other partition was grossly underused and you had to manage this situation by moving stuff around, symlinking, etc. </para +><para +>To avoid the described situation you can use Logical Volume Manager (LVM). Simply said, with LVM you can combine your partitions (<firstterm +>physical volumes</firstterm +> in LVM lingo) to form a virtual disk (so called <firstterm +>volume group</firstterm +>), which can then be divided into virtual partitions (<firstterm +>logical volumes</firstterm +>). The point is that logical volumes (and of course underlying volume groups) can span across several physical disks. </para +><para +>Now when you realize you need more space for your old 160GB <filename +>/home</filename +> partition, you can simply add a new 300GB disk to the computer, join it with your existing volume group and then resize the logical volume which holds your <filename +>/home</filename +> filesystem and voila — your users have some room again on their renewed 460GB partition. This example is of course a bit oversimplified. If you haven't read it yet, you should consult the <ulink url="&url-lvm-howto;" +>LVM HOWTO</ulink +>. </para +><para +>LVM setup in &d-i; is quite simple and completely supported inside <command +>partman</command +>. First, you have to mark the partition(s) to be used as physical volumes for LVM. This is done in the <guimenu +>Partition settings</guimenu +> menu where you should select <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>Use as:</guimenu +> <guimenuitem +>physical volume for LVM</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +>. </para +><para +>When you return to the main <command +>partman</command +> screen, you will see a new option <guimenuitem +>Configure the Logical Volume Manager</guimenuitem +>. When you select that, you will first be asked to confirm pending changes to the partition table (if any) and after that the LVM configuration menu will be shown. Above the menu a summary of the LVM configuration is shown. The menu itself is context sensitive and only shows valid actions. The possible actions are: <itemizedlist> + <listitem +><para +><guimenuitem +>Display configuration details</guimenuitem +>: shows LVM device structure, names and sizes of logical volumes and more </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Create volume group</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Create logical volume</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Delete volume group</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Delete logical volume</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Extend volume group</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para> + <guimenuitem +>Reduce volume group</guimenuitem> + </para +></listitem> + <listitem +><para +><guimenuitem +>Finish</guimenuitem +>: return to the main <command +>partman</command +> screen </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>Use the options in that menu to first create a volume group and then create your logical volumes inside it. </para +><para +>After you return to the main <command +>partman</command +> screen, any created logical volumes will be displayed in the same way as ordinary partitions (and you should treat them as such). </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/partman-lvm.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/partman-crypto.xml --> +<!-- $Id: partman-crypto.xml 56427 2008-10-15 09:07:45Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="partman-crypto"> + <title +>Configuring Encrypted Volumes</title> +<para +>&d-i; allows you to set up encrypted partitions. Every file you write to such a partition is immediately saved to the device in encrypted form. Access to the encrypted data is granted only after entering the <firstterm +>passphrase</firstterm +> used when the encrypted partition was originally created. This feature is useful to protect sensitive data in case your laptop or hard drive gets stolen. The thief might get physical access to the hard drive, but without knowing the right passphrase, the data on the hard drive will look like random characters. </para +><para +>The two most important partitions to encrypt are: the home partition, where your private data resides, and the swap partition, where sensitive data might be stored temporarily during operation. Of course, nothing prevents you from encrypting any other partitions that might be of interest. For example <filename +>/var</filename +> where database servers, mail servers or print servers store their data, or <filename +>/tmp</filename +> which is used by various programs to store potentially interesting temporary files. Some people may even want to encrypt their whole system. The only exception is the <filename +>/boot</filename +> partition which must remain unencrypted, because currently there is no way to load the kernel from an encrypted partition. </para +><note +><para +>Please note that the performance of encrypted partitions will be less than that of unencrypted ones because the data needs to be decrypted or encrypted for every read or write. The performance impact depends on your CPU speed, chosen cipher and a key length. </para +></note +><para +>To use encryption, you have to create a new partition by selecting some free space in the main partitioning menu. Another option is to choose an existing partition (e.g. a regular partition, an LVM logical volume or a RAID volume). In the <guimenu +>Partition settings</guimenu +> menu, you need to select <guimenuitem +>physical volume for encryption</guimenuitem +> at the <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>Use as:</guimenu +> </menuchoice +> option. The menu will then change to include several cryptographic options for the partition. </para +><para +>&d-i; supports several encryption methods. The default method is <firstterm +>dm-crypt</firstterm +> (included in newer Linux kernels, able to host LVM physical volumes), the other is <firstterm +>loop-AES</firstterm +> (older, maintained separately from the Linux kernel tree). Unless you have compelling reasons to do otherwise, it is recommended to use the default. </para +><para +>First, let's have a look at the options available when you select <userinput +>Device-mapper (dm-crypt)</userinput +> as the encryption method. As always: when in doubt, use the defaults, because they have been carefully chosen with security in mind. <variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Encryption: <userinput +>aes</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>This option lets you select the encryption algorithm (<firstterm +>cipher</firstterm +>) which will be used to encrypt the data on the partition. &d-i; currently supports the following block ciphers: <firstterm +>aes</firstterm +>, <firstterm +>blowfish</firstterm +>, <firstterm +>serpent</firstterm +>, and <firstterm +>twofish</firstterm +>. It is beyond the scope of this document to discuss the qualities of these different algorithms, however, it might help your decision to know that in 2000, <emphasis +>AES</emphasis +> was chosen by the American National Institute of Standards and Technology as the standard encryption algorithm for protecting sensitive information in the 21st century. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Key size: <userinput +>256</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>Here you can specify the length of the encryption key. With a larger key size, the strength of the encryption is generally improved. On the other hand, increasing the length of the key usually has a negative impact on performance. Available key sizes vary depending on the cipher. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>IV algorithm: <userinput +>cbc-essiv:sha256</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>The <firstterm +>Initialization Vector</firstterm +> or <firstterm +>IV</firstterm +> algorithm is used in cryptography to ensure that applying the cipher on the same <firstterm +>clear text</firstterm +> data with the same key always produces a unique <firstterm +>cipher text</firstterm +>. The idea is to prevent the attacker from deducing information from repeated patterns in the encrypted data. </para +><para +>From the provided alternatives, the default <userinput +>cbc-essiv:sha256</userinput +> is currently the least vulnerable to known attacks. Use the other alternatives only when you need to ensure compatibility with some previously installed system that is not able to use newer algorithms. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Encryption key: <userinput +>Passphrase</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>Here you can choose the type of the encryption key for this partition. <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term +>Passphrase</term> + <listitem +><para +>The encryption key will be computed<footnote +> <para +> Using a passphrase as the key currently means that the partition will be set up using <ulink url="&url-luks;" +>LUKS</ulink +>. </para +></footnote +> on the basis of a passphrase which you will be able to enter later in the process. </para +></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term +>Random key</term> + <listitem +><para +>A new encryption key will be generated from random data each time you try to bring up the encrypted partition. In other words: on every shutdown the content of the partition will be lost as the key is deleted from memory. (Of course, you could try to guess the key with a brute force attack, but unless there is an unknown weakness in the cipher algorithm, it is not achievable in our lifetime.) </para +><para +>Random keys are useful for swap partitions because you do not need to bother yourself with remembering the passphrase or wiping sensitive information from the swap partition before shutting down your computer. However, it also means that you will <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> be able to use the <quote +>suspend-to-disk</quote +> functionality offered by newer Linux kernels as it will be impossible (during a subsequent boot) to recover the suspended data written to the swap partition. </para +></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + +</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Erase data: <userinput +>yes</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>Determines whether the content of this partition should be overwritten with random data before setting up the encryption. This is recommended because it might otherwise be possible for an attacker to discern which parts of the partition are in use and which are not. In addition, this will make it harder to recover any leftover data from previous installations<footnote +><para +> It is believed that the guys from three-letter agencies can restore the data even after several rewrites of the magnetooptical media, though. </para +></footnote +>. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + +</para +><para +>If you select <menuchoice +> <guimenu +>Encryption method:</guimenu +> <guimenuitem +>Loopback (loop-AES)</guimenuitem +> </menuchoice +>, the menu changes to provide the following options: <variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>Encryption: <userinput +>AES256</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>For loop-AES, unlike dm-crypt, the options for cipher and key size are combined, so you can select both at the same time. Please see the above sections on ciphers and key sizes for further information. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Encryption key: <userinput +>Keyfile (GnuPG)</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>Here you can select the type of the encryption key for this partition. <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term +>Keyfile (GnuPG)</term> + <listitem +><para +>The encryption key will be generated from random data during the installation. Moreover this key will be encrypted with <application +>GnuPG</application +>, so to use it, you will need to enter the proper passphrase (you will be asked to provide one later in the process). </para +></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term +>Random key</term> + <listitem +><para +>Please see the section on random keys above. </para +></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + +</para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +>Erase data: <userinput +>yes</userinput +></term> + +<listitem +><para +>Please see the the section on erasing data above. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + +</para +><para +>After you have selected the desired parameters for your encrypted partitions, return back to the main partitioning menu. There should now be a new menu item called <guimenu +>Configure encrypted volumes</guimenu +>. After you select it, you will be asked to confirm the deletion of data on partitions marked to be erased and possibly other actions such as writing a new partition table. For large partitions this might take some time. </para +><para +>Next you will be asked to enter a passphrase for partitions configured to use one. Good passphrases should be longer than 8 characters, should be a mixture of letters, numbers and other characters and should not contain common dictionary words or information easily associable with you (such as birthdates, hobbies, pet names, names of family members or relatives, etc.). </para +><warning +><para +>Before you input any passphrases, you should have made sure that your keyboard is configured correctly and generates the expected characters. If you are unsure, you can switch to the second virtual console and type some text at the prompt. This ensures that you won't be surprised later, e.g. by trying to input a passphrase using a qwerty keyboard layout when you used an azerty layout during the installation. This situation can have several causes. Maybe you switched to another keyboard layout during the installation, or the selected keyboard layout might not have been set up yet when entering the passphrase for the root file system. </para +></warning +><para +>If you selected to use methods other than a passphrase to create encryption keys, they will be generated now. Because the kernel may not have gathered a sufficient amount of entropy at this early stage of the installation, the process may take a long time. You can help speed up the process by generating entropy: e.g. by pressing random keys, or by switching to the shell on the second virtual console and generating some network and disk traffic (downloading some files, feeding big files into <filename +>/dev/null</filename +>, etc.). This will be repeated for each partition to be encrypted. </para +><para +>After returning to the main partitioning menu, you will see all encrypted volumes as additional partitions which can be configured in the same way as ordinary partitions. The following example shows two different volumes. The first one is encrypted via dm-crypt, the second one via loop-AES. <informalexample +><screen +> +Encrypted volume (<replaceable>sda2_crypt</replaceable>) - 115.1 GB Linux device-mapper + #1 115.1 GB F ext3 + +Loopback (<replaceable>loop0</replaceable>) - 515.2 MB AES256 keyfile + #1 515.2 MB F ext3 +</screen +></informalexample +> Now is the time to assign mount points to the volumes and optionally change the file system types if the defaults do not suit you. </para +><para +>Pay attention to the identifiers in parentheses (<replaceable +>sda2_crypt</replaceable +> and <replaceable +>loop0</replaceable +> in this case) and the mount points you assigned to each encrypted volume. You will need this information later when booting the new system. The differences between the ordinary boot process and the boot process with encryption involved will be covered later in <xref linkend="mount-encrypted-volumes"/>. </para +><para +>Once you are satisfied with the partitioning scheme, continue with the installation. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/partman-crypto.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-install-base"> + <title +>Installing the Base System</title> +<para +>Although this stage is the least problematic, it consumes a significant fraction of the install because it downloads, verifies and unpacks the whole base system. If you have a slow computer or network connection, this could take some time. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: base-installer.xml 43573 2006-12-27 02:20:58Z fjp $ --> + +<para +>During installation of the base system, package unpacking and setup messages are redirected to <userinput +>tty4</userinput +>. You can access this terminal by pressing <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +><keycap +>F4</keycap +></keycombo +>; get back to the main installer process with <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +><keycap +>F1</keycap +></keycombo +>. </para +><para +>The unpack/setup messages generated during this phase are also saved in <filename +>/var/log/syslog</filename +>. You can check them there if the installation is performed over a serial console. </para +><para +>As part of the installation, a Linux kernel will be installed. At the default priority, the installer will choose one for you that best matches your hardware. In lower priority modes, you will be able to choose from a list of available kernels. </para> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-user-setup"> + <title +>Setting Up Users And Passwords</title> +<para +>After the base system has been installed, the installer will allow you to set up the <quote +>root</quote +> account and/or an account for the first user. Other user accounts can be created after the installation has been completed. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/user-setup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: user-setup.xml 50618 2007-12-25 09:18:06Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="user-setup-root"> + <title +>Set the Root Password</title> + +<!-- TODO: Document sudo setup (no root password); medium/low prio only --> + +<para +>The <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> account is also called the <emphasis +>super-user</emphasis +>; it is a login that bypasses all security protection on your system. The root account should only be used to perform system administration, and only used for as short a time as possible. </para +><para +>Any password you create should contain at least 6 characters, and should contain both upper- and lower-case characters, as well as punctuation characters. Take extra care when setting your root password, since it is such a powerful account. Avoid dictionary words or use of any personal information which could be guessed. </para +><para +>If anyone ever tells you they need your root password, be extremely wary. You should normally never give your root password out, unless you are administering a machine with more than one system administrator. </para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="make-normal-user"> + <title +>Create an Ordinary User</title> + +<para +>The system will ask you whether you wish to create an ordinary user account at this point. This account should be your main personal log-in. You should <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> use the root account for daily use or as your personal login. </para +><para +>Why not? Well, one reason to avoid using root's privileges is that it is very easy to do irreparable damage as root. Another reason is that you might be tricked into running a <emphasis +>Trojan-horse</emphasis +> program — that is a program that takes advantage of your super-user powers to compromise the security of your system behind your back. Any good book on Unix system administration will cover this topic in more detail — consider reading one if it is new to you. </para +><para +>You will first be prompted for the user's full name. Then you'll be asked for a name for the user account; generally your first name or something similar will suffice and indeed will be the default. Finally, you will be prompted for a password for this account. </para +><para +>If at any point after installation you would like to create another account, use the <command +>adduser</command +> command. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/user-setup.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-install-software"> + <title +>Installing Additional Software</title> +<para +>At this point you have a usable but limited system. Most users will want to install additional software on the system to tune it to their needs, and the installer allows you do so. This step can take even longer than installing the base system if you have a slow computer or network connection. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/apt-setup.xml --> +<!-- $Id: apt-setup.xml 51744 2008-03-06 04:21:56Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="apt-setup"> + <title +>Configuring apt</title> + +<para +>One of the tools used to install packages on a &debian; system is a program called <command +>apt-get</command +>, from the <classname +>apt</classname +> package<footnote +> <para +> Note that the program which actually installs the packages is called <command +>dpkg</command +>. However, this program is more of a low-level tool. <command +>apt-get</command +> is a higher-level tool, which will invoke <command +>dpkg</command +> as appropriate. It knows how to retrieve packages from your CD, the network, or wherever. It is also able to automatically install other packages which are required to make the package you're trying to install work correctly. </para +> </footnote +>. Other front-ends for package management, like <command +>aptitude</command +> and <command +>synaptic</command +>, are also in use. These front-ends are recommended for new users, since they integrate some additional features (package searching and status checks) in a nice user interface. In fact, <command +>aptitude</command +> is now the recommended utility for package management. </para +><para +><command +>apt</command +> must be configured so that it knows from where to retrieve packages. The results of this configuration are written to the file <filename +>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename +>. You can examine and edit this file to your liking after the installation is complete. </para +><para +>If you are installing at default priority, the installer will largely take care of the configuration automatically, based on the installation method you are using and possibly using choices made earlier in the installation. In most cases the installer will automatically add a security mirror and, if you are installing the stable distribution, a mirror for the <quote +>volatile</quote +> update service. </para +><para +>If you are installing at a lower priority (e.g. in expert mode), you will be able to make more decisions yourself. You can choose whether or not to use the security and/or volatile update services, and you can choose to add packages from the <quote +>contrib</quote +> and <quote +>non-free</quote +> sections of the archive. </para> + + <sect4 id="apt-setup-cdset"> + <title +>Installing from more than one CD or DVD</title> + +<para +>If you are installing from a CD or a DVD that is part of a larger set, the installer will ask if you want to scan additional CDs or DVDs. If you have additional CDs or DVDs available, you probably want to do this so the installer can use the packages included on them. </para +><para +>If you do not have any additional CDs or DVDs, that is no problem: using them is not required. If you also do not use a network mirror (as explained in the next section), it can mean that not all packages belonging to the tasks you select in the next step of the installation can be installed. </para> +<note +><para +>Packages are included on CDs (and DVDs) in the order of their popularity. This means that for most uses only the first CDs in a set are needed and that only very few people actually use any of the packages included on the last CDs in a set. </para +><para +>It also means that buying or downloading and burning a full CD set is just a waste of money as you'll never use most of them. In most cases you are better off getting only the first 3 to 8 CDs and installing any additional packages you may need from the Internet by using a mirror. The same goes for DVD sets: the first DVD, or maybe the first two DVDs will cover most needs. </para +><para +>A good rule of thumb is that for a regular desktop installation (using the GNOME desktop environment) only the first three CDs are needed. For the alternative desktop environments (KDE or Xfce), additional CDs are needed. The first DVD easily covers all three desktop environments. </para +></note> +<para +>If you do scan multiple CDs or DVDs, the installer will prompt you to exchange them when it needs packages from another CD/DVD than the one currently in the drive. Note that only CDs or DVDs that belong to the same set should be scanned. The order in which they are scanned does not really matter, but scanning them in ascending order will reduce the chance of mistakes. </para> + </sect4> + + <sect4 id="apt-setup-mirror"> + <title +>Using a network mirror</title> + +<para +>One question that will be asked during most installs is whether or not to use a network mirror as a source for packages. In most cases the default answer should be fine, but there are some exceptions. </para +><para +>If you are <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> installing from a full CD or DVD or using a full CD/DVD image, you really should use a network mirror as otherwise you will end up with only a very minimal system. However, if you have a limited Internet connection it is best <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> to select the <literal +>desktop</literal +> task in the next step of the installation. </para +><para +>If you are installing from a single full CD or using a full CD image, using a network mirror is not required, but is still strongly recommended because a single CD contains only a fairly limited number of packages. If you have a limited Internet connection it may still be best to <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> select a network mirror here, but to finish the installation using only what's available on the CD and selectively install additional packages after the installation (i.e. after you have rebooted into the new system). </para +><para +>If you are installing from a DVD or using a DVD image, any packages needed during the installation should be present on the first DVD. The same is true if you have scanned multiple CDs as explained in the previous section. Use of a network mirror is optional. </para +><para +>One advantage of adding a network mirror is that updates that have occurred since the CD/DVD set was created and have been included in a point release, will become available for installation, thus extending the life of your CD/DVD set without compromising the security or stability of the installed system. </para +><para +>In summary: selecting a network mirror is generally a good idea, except if you do not have a good Internet connection. If the current version of a package is available from CD/DVD, the installer will always use that. The amount of data that will be downloaded if you do select a mirror thus depends on <orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>the tasks you select in the next step of the installation, </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>which packages are needed for those tasks, </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>which of those packages are present on the CDs or DVDs you have scanned, and </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>whether any updated versions of packages included on the CDs or DVDs are available from a mirror (either a regular package mirror, or a mirror for security or volatile updates). </para +></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para +><para +>Note that the last point means that, even if you choose not to use a network mirror, some packages may still be downloaded from the Internet if there is a security or volatile update available for them and those services have been configured. </para> +</sect4> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/apt-setup.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/pkgsel.xml --> +<!-- $Id: pkgsel.xml 56511 2008-10-24 21:00:37Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="pkgsel"> + <title +>Selecting and Installing Software</title> + +<para +>During the installation process, you are given the opportunity to select additional software to install. Rather than picking individual software packages from the &num-of-distrib-pkgs; available packages, this stage of the installation process focuses on selecting and installing predefined collections of software to quickly set up your computer to perform various tasks. </para +><para +>So, you have the ability to choose <emphasis +>tasks</emphasis +> first, and then add on more individual packages later. These tasks loosely represent a number of different jobs or things you want to do with your computer, such as <quote +>Desktop environment</quote +>, <quote +>Web server</quote +>, or <quote +>Print server</quote +><footnote +> <para +> You should know that to present this list, the installer is merely invoking the <command +>tasksel</command +> program. It can be run at any time after installation to install more packages (or remove them), or you can use a more fine-grained tool such as <command +>aptitude</command +>. If you are looking for a specific single package, after installation is complete, simply run <userinput +>aptitude install <replaceable +>package</replaceable +></userinput +>, where <replaceable +>package</replaceable +> is the name of the package you are looking for. </para +> </footnote +>. <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/> lists the space requirements for the available tasks. </para +><para +>Some tasks may be pre-selected based on the characteristics of the computer you are installing. If you disagree with these selections you can deselect them. You can even opt to install no tasks at all at this point. </para> +<note +><para +>Unless you are using the special KDE or Xfce CDs, the <quote +>Desktop environment</quote +> task will install the GNOME desktop environment. </para +><para +>It is not possible to interactively select a different desktop during the installation. However, it <emphasis +>is</emphasis +> possible to get &d-i; to install a KDE desktop environment instead of GNOME by using preseeding (see <xref linkend="preseed-pkgsel"/>) or by adding the parameter <literal +>desktop=kde</literal +> at the boot prompt when starting the installer. Alternatively the more lightweight Xfce desktop environment can be selected by using <literal +>desktop=xfce</literal +>. </para +><para +>Note that this will only work if the packages needed for KDE or Xfce are actually available. If you are installing using a single full CD image, they will need to be downloaded from a mirror as most needed packages are only included on later CDs; installing KDE or Xfce this way should work fine if you are using a DVD image or any other installation method. </para +><para +>The various server tasks will install software roughly as follows. DNS server: <classname +>bind9</classname +>; File server: <classname +>samba</classname +>, <classname +>nfs</classname +>; Mail server: <classname +>exim4</classname +>, <classname +>spamassassin</classname +>, <classname +>uw-imap</classname +>; Print server: <classname +>cups</classname +>; SQL database: <classname +>postgresql</classname +>; Web server: <classname +>apache2</classname +>. </para +></note> +<para +>Once you've selected your tasks, select &BTN-CONT;. At this point, <command +>aptitude</command +> will install the packages that are part of the selected tasks. If a particular program needs more information from the user, it will prompt you during this process. </para> +<note +><para +>In the standard user interface of the installer, you can use the space bar to toggle selection of a task. </para +></note> +<para +>You should be aware that especially the Desktop task is very large. Especially when installing from a normal CD-ROM in combination with a mirror for packages not on the CD-ROM, the installer may want to retrieve a lot of packages over the network. If you have a relatively slow Internet connection, this can take a long time. There is no option to cancel the installation of packages once it has started. </para +><para +>Even when packages are included on the CD-ROM, the installer may still retrieve them from the mirror if the version available on the mirror is more recent than the one included on the CD-ROM. If you are installing the stable distribution, this can happen after a point release (an update of the original stable release); if you are installing the testing distribution this will happen if you are using an older image. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/pkgsel.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-make-bootable"> + <title +>Making Your System Bootable</title> + +<para condition="supports-nfsroot" +>If you are installing a diskless workstation, obviously, booting off the local disk isn't a meaningful option, and this step will be skipped. <phrase arch="sparc" +>You may wish to set OpenBoot to boot from the network by default; see <xref linkend="boot-dev-select-sun"/>.</phrase +> </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml --> +<!-- $Id: os-prober.xml 33725 2006-01-03 19:39:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="os-prober"> + <title +>Detecting other operating systems</title> + +<para +>Before a boot loader is installed, the installer will attempt to probe for other operating systems which are installed on the machine. If it finds a supported operating system, you will be informed of this during the boot loader installation step, and the computer will be configured to boot this other operating system in addition to Debian. </para +><para +>Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is still something of a black art. The automatic support for detecting and setting up boot loaders to boot other operating systems varies by architecture and even by subarchitecture. If it does not work you should consult your boot manager's documentation for more information. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: aboot-installer.xml 43573 2006-12-27 02:20:58Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="alpha"> + <title +>Install <command +>aboot</command +> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>If you have booted from SRM and you select this option, the installer will write <command +>aboot</command +> to the first sector of the disk on which you installed Debian. Be <emphasis +>very</emphasis +> careful — it is <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> possible to boot multiple operating systems (e.g. GNU/Linux, Free/Open/NetBSD, OSF/1 a.k.a. Digital Unix a.k.a. Tru64 Unix, or OpenVMS) from the same disk. If you also have a different operating system installed on the disk where you have installed Debian, you will have to boot GNU/Linux from a floppy instead. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: palo-installer.xml 14602 2004-05-02 16:31:59Z mck-guest $ --> + + <sect3 arch="hppa"> + <title +><command +>palo</command +>-installer</title> +<para +>The bootloader on PA-RISC is <quote +>palo</quote +>. <command +>PALO</command +> is similar in configuration and usage to <command +>LILO</command +>, with a few exceptions. First of all, <command +>PALO</command +> allows you to boot any kernel image on your boot partition. This is because <command +>PALO</command +> can actually read Linux partitions. </para +><para condition="FIXME" +>hppa FIXME ( need more info ) </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/x86/grub-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: grub-installer.xml 46722 2007-05-07 15:34:13Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="x86"> + <title +>Install the <command +>Grub</command +> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>The main &architecture; boot loader is called <quote +>grub</quote +>. Grub is a flexible and robust boot loader and a good default choice for new users and old hands alike. </para +><para +>By default, grub will be installed into the Master Boot Record (MBR), where it will take over complete control of the boot process. If you prefer, you can install it elsewhere. See the grub manual for complete information. </para +><para +>If you do not want to install grub, use the &BTN-GOBACK; button to get to the main menu, and from there select whatever bootloader you would like to use. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/x86/grub-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/x86/lilo-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: lilo-installer.xml 49849 2007-10-21 12:12:33Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="x86"> + <title +>Install the <command +>LILO</command +> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>The second &architecture; boot loader is called <quote +>LILO</quote +>. It is an old complex program which offers lots of functionality, including DOS, Windows, and OS/2 boot management. Please carefully read the instructions in the directory <filename +>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename +> if you have special needs; also see the <ulink url="&url-lilo-howto;" +>LILO mini-HOWTO</ulink +>. </para> +<note +><para +>Currently the LILO installation will only create menu entries for other operating systems if these can be <firstterm +>chainloaded</firstterm +>. This means you may have to manually add a menu entry for operating systems like GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd after the installation. </para +></note> +<para +>&d-i; offers you three choices on where to install the <command +>LILO</command +> boot loader: <variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +>Master Boot Record (MBR)</term +><listitem +><para +>This way the <command +>LILO</command +> will take complete control of the boot process. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>new Debian partition</term +><listitem +><para +>Choose this if you want to use another boot manager. <command +>LILO</command +> will install itself at the beginning of the new Debian partition and it will serve as a secondary boot loader. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +>Other choice</term +><listitem +><para +>Useful for advanced users who want to install <command +>LILO</command +> somewhere else. In this case you will be asked for desired location. You can use traditional device names such as <filename +>/dev/hda</filename +> or <filename +>/dev/sda</filename +>. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para +><para +>If you can no longer boot into Windows 9x (or DOS) after this step, you'll need to use a Windows 9x (MS-DOS) boot disk and use the <userinput +>fdisk /mbr</userinput +> command to reinstall the MS-DOS master boot record — however, this means that you'll need to use some other way to get back into Debian! </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/x86/lilo-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: elilo-installer.xml 43573 2006-12-27 02:20:58Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 arch="ia64"> + <title +>Install the <command +>ELILO</command +> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>The &architecture; boot loader is called <quote +>elilo</quote +>. It is modeled on the <quote +>lilo</quote +> boot loader for the x86 architecture and uses a similar configuration file. However, instead of writing an MBR or partition boot record to the disk, it copies the necessary files to a separate FAT formatted disk partition and modifies the <guimenuitem +>EFI Boot Manager</guimenuitem +> menu in the firmware to point to the files in the EFI partition. The <command +>elilo</command +> boot loader is really in two parts. The <filename +>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename +> command manages the partition and copies files into it. The <filename +>elilo.efi</filename +> program is copied into the EFI partition and then run by the <quote +>EFI Boot Manager</quote +> to do the actual work of loading and starting the Linux kernel. </para +><para +>The <quote +>elilo</quote +> configuration and installation is done as the last step of installing the packages of the base installation. &d-i; will present you with a list of potential disk partitions that it has found suitable for an EFI partition. Select the partition you set up earlier in the installation, typically a partition on the same disk that contains your <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> filesystem. </para> + + <warning +><title +>Choose the correct partition!</title> + +<para +>The criteria for selecting a partition is that it is FAT format filesystem with its <emphasis +>boot</emphasis +> flag set. &d-i; may show multiple choices depending on what it finds from scanning all of the disks of the system including EFI partitions of other system disks and EFI diagnostic partitions. Remember, <command +>elilo</command +> may format the partition during the installation, erasing any previous contents! </para +></warning> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64"> + <title +>EFI Partition Contents</title> + +<para +>The EFI partition is a FAT filesystem format partition on one of the hard disks of the system, usually the same disk that contains the <emphasis +>root</emphasis +> filesystem. It is normally not mounted on a running system as it is only needed by the <quote +>EFI Boot Manager</quote +> to load the system and the installer part of the <command +>elilo</command +> writes to the filesystem directly. The <command +>/usr/sbin/elilo</command +> utility writes the following files into the <filename +>efi/debian</filename +> directory of the EFI partition during the installation. Note that the <quote +>EFI Boot Manager</quote +> would find these files using the path <filename +>fs<replaceable +>n</replaceable +>:\efi\debian</filename +>. There may be other files in this filesystem as well over time as the system is updated or re-configured. </para> + +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><filename +>elilo.conf</filename +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the configuration file read by the boot loader when it starts. It is a copy of the <filename +>/etc/elilo.conf</filename +> with the filenames re-written to refer to files in the EFI partition. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><filename +>elilo.efi</filename +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the boot loader program that the <quote +>EFI Boot Manager</quote +> runs to boot the system. It is the program behind the <guimenuitem +>Debian GNU/Linux</guimenuitem +> menu item of the <quote +>EFI Boot Manager</quote +> command menu. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><filename +>initrd.img</filename +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the initial root filesystem used to boot the kernel. It is a copy of the file referenced in the <filename +>/etc/elilo.conf</filename +>. In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in <filename +>/boot</filename +> pointed to by the symbolic link <filename +>/initrd.img</filename +>. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><filename +>readme.txt</filename +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is a small text file warning you that the contents of the directory are managed by the <command +>elilo</command +> and that any local changes would be lost at the next time <filename +>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename +> is run. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term +><filename +>vmlinuz</filename +></term> +<listitem +><para +>This is the compressed kernel itself. It is a copy of the file referenced in the <filename +>/etc/elilo.conf</filename +>. In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in <filename +>/boot</filename +> pointed to by the symbolic link <filename +>/vmlinuz</filename +>. </para +></listitem +></varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: arcboot-installer.xml 35613 2006-03-19 04:18:28Z tbm $ --> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title +><command +>arcboot</command +>-installer</title> +<para +>The boot loader on SGI machines is <command +>arcboot</command +>. It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done automatically by the installer). Arcboot supports different configurations which are set up in <filename +>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename +>. Each configuration has a unique name, the default setup as created by the installer is <quote +>linux</quote +>. After arcboot has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk by setting some firmware environment variables entering <informalexample +><screen +> +<userinput> setenv SystemPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(0)</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoadPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(<replaceable>partnr</replaceable>)</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoader arcboot</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoadFilename <replaceable>config</replaceable></userinput> +<userinput> setenv AutoLoad yes</userinput> +</screen +></informalexample +> on the firmware prompt, and then typing <command +>boot</command +>. </para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term +> <replaceable +>scsi</replaceable +> </term> +<listitem +><para +>is the SCSI bus to be booted from, this is <userinput +>0</userinput +> for the onboard controllers </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +> <replaceable +>disk</replaceable +> </term> +<listitem +><para +>is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command +>arcboot</command +> is installed </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +> <replaceable +>partnr</replaceable +> </term> +<listitem +><para +>is the number of the partition on which <filename +>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename +> resides </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term +> <replaceable +>config</replaceable +> </term> +<listitem +><para +>is the name of the configuration entry in <filename +>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename +>, which is <quote +>linux</quote +> by default. </para +></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: colo-installer.xml 14337 2004-04-24 15:05:40Z mck-guest $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: yaboot-installer.xml 14975 2004-05-08 13:28:15Z mck-guest $ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title +>Install <command +>Yaboot</command +> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>Newer (mid 1998 and on) PowerMacs use <command +>yaboot</command +> as their boot loader. The installer will set up <command +>yaboot</command +> automatically, so all you need is a small 820k partition named <quote +>bootstrap</quote +> with type <emphasis +>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis +> created back in the partitioning component. If this step completes successfully then your disk should now be bootable and OpenFirmware will be set to boot &debian;. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: quik-installer.xml 14975 2004-05-08 13:28:15Z mck-guest $ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title +>Install <command +>Quik</command +> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>The boot loader for OldWorld Power Macintosh machines is <command +>quik</command +>. You can also use it on CHRP. The installer will attempt to set up <command +>quik</command +> automatically. The setup has been known to work on 7200, 7300, and 7600 Powermacs, and on some Power Computing clones. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: zipl-installer.xml 14602 2004-05-02 16:31:59Z mck-guest $ --> + + <sect3 arch="s390"> + <title +><command +>zipl</command +>-installer</title> +<para +>The boot loader on &arch-title; is <quote +>zipl</quote +>. <command +>ZIPL</command +> is similar in configuration and usage to <command +>LILO</command +>, with a few exceptions. Please take a look at <quote +>LINUX for &arch-title; Device Drivers and Installation Commands</quote +> from IBM's developerWorks web site if you want to know more about <command +>ZIPL</command +>. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml --> +<!-- $Id: silo-installer.xml 24582 2004-12-27 02:16:29Z cjwatson $ --> + + <sect3 arch="sparc"> + <title +>Install the <command +>SILO</command +> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk</title> +<para +>The standard &architecture; boot loader is called <quote +>silo</quote +>. It is documented in <filename +>/usr/share/doc/silo/</filename +>. <command +>SILO</command +> is similar in configuration and usage to <command +>LILO</command +>, with a few exceptions. First of all, <command +>SILO</command +> allows you to boot any kernel image on your drive, even if it is not listed in <filename +>/etc/silo.conf</filename +>. This is because <command +>SILO</command +> can actually read Linux partitions. Also, <filename +>/etc/silo.conf</filename +> is read at boot time, so there is no need to rerun <command +>silo</command +> after installing a new kernel like you would with <command +>LILO</command +>. <command +>SILO</command +> can also read UFS partitions, which means it can boot SunOS/Solaris partitions as well. This is useful if you want to install GNU/Linux alongside an existing SunOS/Solaris install. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml --> +<!-- $Id: nobootloader.xml 25513 2005-02-07 23:43:27Z fjpop-guest $ --> + + <sect3 id="nobootloader"> + <title +>Continue Without Boot Loader</title> + +<para +>This option can be used to complete the installation even when no boot loader is to be installed, either because the arch/subarch doesn't provide one, or because none is desired (e.g. you will use existing boot loader). <phrase arch="m68k" +>This option is especially useful for Macintosh, Atari, and Amiga systems, where the original operating system must be maintained on the box and used to boot GNU/Linux.</phrase +> </para +><para +>If you plan to manually configure your bootloader, you should check the name of the installed kernel in <filename +>/target/boot</filename +>. You should also check that directory for the presence of an <firstterm +>initrd</firstterm +>; if one is present, you will probably have to instruct your bootloader to use it. Other information you will need are the disk and partition you selected for your <filename +>/</filename +> filesystem and, if you chose to install <filename +>/boot</filename +> on a separate partition, also your <filename +>/boot</filename +> filesystem. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-finish"> + <title +>Finishing the Installation</title> +<para +>This is the last step in the Debian installation process during which the installer will do any last minute tasks. It mostly consists of tidying up after the &d-i;. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/clock-setup-finish.xml --> +<!-- $Id: clock-setup-finish.xml 50618 2007-12-25 09:18:06Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="system-clock"> + <title +>Setting the System Clock</title> + +<para +>The installer may ask you if the computer's clock is set to UTC. Normally this question is avoided if possible and the installer tries to work out whether the clock is set to UTC based on things like what other operating systems are installed. </para +><para +>In expert mode you will always be able to choose whether or not the clock is set to UTC. <phrase arch="m68k;powerpc" +>Macintosh hardware clocks are normally set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of UTC.</phrase +> <phrase arch="x86" +>Systems that (also) run Dos or Windows are normally set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of UTC.</phrase +> </para +><para +>At this point &d-i; will also attempt to save the current time to the system's hardware clock. This will be done either in UTC or local time, depending on the selection that was just made. </para> + + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/clock-setup-finish.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/finish-install.xml --> +<!-- $Id: finish-install.xml 50618 2007-12-25 09:18:06Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="finish-install"> + <title +>Reboot the System</title> + +<para arch="not-s390" +>You will be prompted to remove the boot media (CD, floppy, etc) that you used to boot the installer. After that the system will be rebooted into your new Debian system. </para +><para arch="s390" +>After a final prompt the system will be halted because rebooting is not supported on &arch-title;. You then need to IPL &debian; from the DASD which you selected for the root filesystem during the first steps of the installation. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/finish-install.xml --> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-miscellaneous"> + <title +>Miscellaneous</title> +<para +>The components listed in this section are usually not involved in the installation process, but are waiting in the background to help the user in case something goes wrong. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml --> +<!-- $Id: save-logs.xml 33725 2006-01-03 19:39:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="save-logs"> + <title +>Saving the installation logs</title> + +<para +>If the installation is successful, the logfiles created during the installation process will be automatically saved to <filename +>/var/log/installer/</filename +> on your new Debian system. </para +><para +>Choosing <guimenuitem +>Save debug logs</guimenuitem +> from the main menu allows you to save the log files to a floppy disk, network, hard disk, or other media. This can be useful if you encounter fatal problems during the installation and wish to study the logs on another system or attach them to an installation report. </para> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml --> +<!-- $Id: cdrom-checker.xml 14337 2004-04-24 15:05:40Z mck-guest $ --> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/shell.xml --> +<!-- $Id: shell.xml 56326 2008-10-06 23:03:54Z fjp $ --> + + <sect3 id="shell"> + <title +>Using the Shell and Viewing the Logs</title> + +<para +>There are several methods you can use to get a shell while running an installation. On most systems, and if you are not installing over serial console, the easiest method is to switch to the second <emphasis +>virtual console</emphasis +> by pressing <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>F2</keycap +></keycombo +><footnote +> <para +> That is: press the <keycap +>Alt</keycap +> key on the left-hand side of the <keycap +>space bar</keycap +> and the <keycap +>F2</keycap +> function key at the same time. </para +> </footnote +> (on a Mac keyboard, <keycombo +><keycap +>Option</keycap +> <keycap +>F2</keycap +></keycombo +>). Use <keycombo +><keycap +>Left Alt</keycap +> <keycap +>F1</keycap +></keycombo +> to switch back to the installer itself. </para +><para condition="gtk" +>For the graphical installer see also <xref linkend="gtk-using"/>. </para +><para +>If you cannot switch consoles, there is also an <guimenuitem +>Execute a Shell</guimenuitem +> item on the main menu that can be used to start a shell. You can get to the main menu from most dialogs by using the &BTN-GOBACK; button one or more times. Type <userinput +>exit</userinput +> to close the shell and return to the installer. </para +><para +>At this point you are booted from the RAM disk, and there is a limited set of Unix utilities available for your use. You can see what programs are available with the command <command +>ls /bin /sbin /usr/bin /usr/sbin</command +> and by typing <command +>help</command +>. The shell is a Bourne shell clone called <command +>ash</command +> and has some nice features like autocompletion and history. </para +><para +>To edit and view files, use the text editor <command +>nano</command +>. Log files for the installation system can be found in the <filename +>/var/log</filename +> directory. </para> +<note +><para +>Although you can do basically anything in a shell that the available commands allow you to do, the option to use a shell is really only there in case something goes wrong and for debugging. </para +><para +>Doing things manually from the shell may interfere with the installation process and result in errors or an incomplete installation. In particular, you should always use let the installer activate your swap partition and not do this yourself from a shell. </para +></note> + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/shell.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml --> +<!-- $Id: network-console.xml 56141 2008-09-26 10:45:05Z lunar $ --> + + <sect3 id="network-console"> + <title +>Installation Over the Network</title> + +<para arch="not-s390" +>One of the more interesting components is <firstterm +>network-console</firstterm +>. It allows you to do a large part of the installation over the network via SSH. The use of the network implies you will have to perform the first steps of the installation from the console, at least to the point of setting up the networking. (Although you can automate that part with <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>.) </para +><para arch="not-s390" +>This component is not loaded into the main installation menu by default, so you have to explicitly ask for it. If you are installing from CD, you need to boot with medium priority or otherwise invoke the main installation menu and choose <guimenuitem +>Load installer components from CD</guimenuitem +> and from the list of additional components select <guimenuitem +>network-console: Continue installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem +>. Successful load is indicated by a new menu entry called <guimenuitem +>Continue installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem +>. </para +><para arch="s390" +>For installations on &arch-title;, this is the default method after setting up the network. </para +><para +><phrase arch="not-s390" +>After selecting this new entry, you</phrase +> <phrase arch="s390" +>You</phrase +> will be asked for a new password to be used for connecting to the installation system and for its confirmation. That's all. Now you should see a screen which instructs you to login remotely as the user <emphasis +>installer</emphasis +> with the password you just provided. Another important detail to notice on this screen is the fingerprint of this system. You need to transfer the fingerprint securely to the <quote +>person who will continue the installation remotely</quote +>. </para +><para +>Should you decide to continue with the installation locally, you can always press &enterkey;, which will bring you back to the main menu, where you can select another component. </para +><para +>Now let's switch to the other side of the wire. As a prerequisite, you need to configure your terminal for UTF-8 encoding, because that is what the installation system uses. If you do not, remote installation will be still possible, but you may encounter strange display artefacts like destroyed dialog borders or unreadable non-ascii characters. Establishing a connection with the installation system is as simple as typing: <informalexample +><screen +> +<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput>ssh -l installer <replaceable>install_host</replaceable></userinput> +</screen +></informalexample +> Where <replaceable +>install_host</replaceable +> is either the name or IP address of the computer being installed. Before the actual login the fingerprint of the remote system will be displayed and you will have to confirm that it is correct. </para +><note +><para +>The <command +>ssh</command +> server in the installer uses a default configuration that does not send keep-alive packets. In principle, a connection to the system being installed should be kept open indefinitely. However, in some situations — depending on your local network setup — the connection may be lost after some period of inactivity. One common case where this can happen is when there is some form of Network Address Translation (NAT) somewhere between the client and the system being installed. Depending on at which point of the installation the connection was lost, you may or may not be able to resume the installation after reconnecting. </para +><para +>You may be able to avoid the connection being dropped by adding the option <userinput +>-o ServerAliveInterval=<replaceable +>value</replaceable +></userinput +> when starting the <command +>ssh</command +> connection, or by adding that option in your <command +>ssh</command +> configuration file. Note however that in some cases adding this option may also <emphasis +>cause</emphasis +> a connection to be dropped (for example if keep-alive packets are sent during a brief network outage, from which <command +>ssh</command +> would otherwise have recovered), so it should only be used when needed. </para +></note> + +<note +><para +>If you install several computers in turn and they happen to have the same IP address or hostname, <command +>ssh</command +> will refuse to connect to such host. The reason is that it will have different fingerprint, which is usually a sign of a spoofing attack. If you are sure this is not the case, you will need to delete the relevant line from <filename +>~/.ssh/known_hosts</filename +><footnote +> <para +> The following command will remove an existing entry for a host: <command +>ssh-keygen -R <<replaceable +>hostname</replaceable +>|<replaceable +>IP address</replaceable +>></command +>. </para +> </footnote +> and try again. </para +></note +><para +>After the login you will be presented with an initial screen where you have two possibilities called <guimenuitem +>Start menu</guimenuitem +> and <guimenuitem +>Start shell</guimenuitem +>. The former brings you to the main installer menu, where you can continue with the installation as usual. The latter starts a shell from which you can examine and possibly fix the remote system. You should only start one SSH session for the installation menu, but may start multiple sessions for shells. </para +><warning +><para +>After you have started the installation remotely over SSH, you should not go back to the installation session running on the local console. Doing so may corrupt the database that holds the configuration of the new system. This in turn may result in a failed installation or problems with the installed system. </para +></warning> + + </sect3> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml --> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/components.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file using-d-i/loading-firmware.xml --> +<!-- $Id: loading-firmware.xml 56290 2008-10-05 15:18:02Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="loading-firmware" arch="not-s390"> + <title +>Loading Missing Firmware</title> +<para +>As described in <xref linkend="hardware-firmware"/>, some devices require firmware to be loaded. In most cases the device will not work at all if the firmware is not available; sometimes basic functionality is not impaired if it is missing and the firmware is only needed to enable additional features. </para +><para +>If a device driver requests firmware that is not available, &d-i; will display a dialog offering to load the missing firmware. If this option is selected, &d-i; will scan available devices for either loose firmware files or packages containing firmware. If found, the firmware will be copied to the correct location (<filename +>/lib/firmware</filename +>) and the driver module will be reloaded. </para> +<note +><para +>Which devices are scanned and which file systems are supported depends on the architecture, the installation method and the stage of the installation. Especially during the early stages of the installation, loading the firmware is most likely to succeed from a FAT-formatted floppy disk or USB stick. <phrase arch="x86" +>On i386 and amd64 firmware can also be loaded from an MMC or SD card.</phrase +> </para +></note> +<para +>Note that it is possible to skip loading the firmware if you know the device will also function without it, or if the device is not needed during the installation. </para> +<warning +><para +>Support for loading firmware is still relatively basic and is likely to be improved in future releases of the installer. Currently &d-i; will for example not display any warning if you choose to load missing firmware, but the requested firmware is not found. Please report any issues you encounter by filing an installation report (see <xref linkend="submit-bug"/>). </para +></warning> + + <sect2 +><title +>Preparing a medium</title> +<para +>Although in some cases the firmware can also be loaded from a partition on a hard disk, the most common method to load firmware will be from some removable medium such as a floppy disk or a USB stick. The firmware files or packages must be placed in either the root directory or a directory named <filename +>/firmware</filename +> of the file system on the medium. The recommended file system to use is FAT as that is most certain to be supported during the early stages of the installation. </para +><para +>Tarballs containing current packages for the most common firmware are available from: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> <ulink url="&url-firmware-tarballs;" +></ulink +> </para +></listitem +> </itemizedlist +> Just download the tarball for the correct release and unpack it to the file system on the medium. </para +><para +>If the firmware you need is not included in the tarball, you can also download specific firmware packages from the (non-free section of the) archive. The following overview should list most available firmware packages but is not guaranteed to be complete and may also contain non-firmware packages: <itemizedlist +> <listitem +><para +> <ulink url="&url-firmware-packages;" +></ulink> +</para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>It is also possible to copy individual firmware files to the medium. Loose firmware could be obtained for example from an already installed system or from a hardware vendor. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 +><title +>Firmware and the Installed System</title> +<para +>Any firmware loaded during the installation will be copied automatically to the installed system. In most cases this will ensure that the device that requires the firmware will also work correctly after the system is rebooted into the installed system. However, if the installed system runs a different kernel version from the installer there is a slight chance that the firmware cannot be loaded due to version skew. </para +><para +>If the firmware was loaded from a firmware package, &d-i; will also install this package for the installed system and will automatically add the non-free section of the package archive in APT's <filename +>sources.list</filename +>. This has the advantage that the firmware should be updated automatically if a new version becomes available. </para +><para +>If loading the firmware was skipped during the installation, the relevant device will probably not work with the installed system until the firmware (package) is installed manually. </para> +<note +><para +>If the firmware was loaded from loose firmware files, the firmware copied to the installed system will <emphasis +>not</emphasis +> be automatically updated unless the corresponding firmware package (if available) is installed after the installation is completed. </para +></note> + </sect2> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file using-d-i/loading-firmware.xml --> + +</chapter> + +<!-- End of file using-d-i/using-d-i.xml --> diff --git a/nb/welcome/welcome.xml b/nb/welcome/welcome.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e92bd48b --- /dev/null +++ b/nb/welcome/welcome.xml @@ -0,0 +1,361 @@ +<!-- Start of file welcome/welcome.xml --> +<!-- $Id: welcome.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + +<chapter id="welcome" +><title +>Velkommen til Debian</title> +<para +>Dette kapitelet gir et overblikk over Debian Prosjektet og &debian; Hvis du allerede kjenner til historien til Debian Prosjektet og &debian;, så kan du hoppe over dette kapitelet. </para> + + +<!-- Start of file welcome/what-is-debian.xml --> +<!-- $Id: what-is-debian.xml 45347 2007-02-22 15:26:47Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-debian"> + <title +>Hva er Debian?</title> +<para +>Debian er en frivilligorganisasjon som er engasjer med å utvikle fri programvare og spre idealene til Free Software Foundation. Debian Prosjektet ble startet i 1993, da Ian Murdock sendte ut en åpen invitasjon til alle programvareutviklere og inviterte dem til å bli med på å utvikle en komplett og enhetlig distribusjon basert på den da relativt ukjente Linux kjernen. Den relativt lille gruppen med dedikerte entusiaster, i begynnelsen finansiert av <ulink url="&url-fsf;" +>Free Software Foundation</ulink +> og påvirket av filosofien til <ulink url="&url-gnu-intro;" +>GNU</ulink +> , har med årene vokst til å bli en organisasjon med omkring &num-of-debian-developers; <firstterm +>Debian Utviklere</firstterm +>. </para +><para +>Debian Developers are involved in a variety of activities, including <ulink url="&url-debian-home;" +>Web</ulink +> and <ulink url="&url-debian-ftp;" +>FTP</ulink +> site administration, graphic design, legal analysis of software licenses, writing documentation, and, of course, maintaining software packages. </para +><para +>In the interest of communicating our philosophy and attracting developers who believe in the principles that Debian stands for, the Debian Project has published a number of documents that outline our values and serve as guides to what it means to be a Debian Developer: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-social-contract;" +>Debian Social Contract</ulink +> is a statement of Debian's commitments to the Free Software Community. Anyone who agrees to abide to the Social Contract may become a <ulink url="&url-new-maintainer;" +>maintainer</ulink +>. Any maintainer can introduce new software into Debian — provided that the software meets our criteria for being free, and the package follows our quality standards. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-dfsg;" +>Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink +> are a clear and concise statement of Debian's criteria for free software. The DFSG is a very influential document in the Free Software Movement, and was the foundation of the <ulink url="&url-osd;" +>The Open Source Definition</ulink +>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-debian-policy;" +>Debian Policy Manual</ulink +> is an extensive specification of the Debian Project's standards of quality. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> +</para +><para +>Debian developers are also involved in a number of other projects; some specific to Debian, others involving some or all of the Linux community. Some examples include: <itemizedlist> +<listitem +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-lsb-org;" +>Linux Standard Base</ulink +> (LSB) is a project aimed at standardizing the basic GNU/Linux system, which will enable third-party software and hardware developers to easily design programs and device drivers for Linux-in-general, rather than for a specific GNU/Linux distribution. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-fhs-home;" +>Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink +> (FHS) is an effort to standardize the layout of the Linux file system. The FHS will allow software developers to concentrate their efforts on designing programs, without having to worry about how the package will be installed in different GNU/Linux distributions. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><ulink url="&url-debian-jr;" +>Debian Jr.</ulink +> is an internal project, aimed at making sure Debian has something to offer to our youngest users. </para +></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para +><para +>For more general information about Debian, see the <ulink url="&url-debian-faq;" +>Debian FAQ</ulink +>. </para> + + </sect1> + +<!-- End of file welcome/what-is-debian.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/what-is-linux.xml --> +<!-- $Id: what-is-linux.xml 45186 2007-02-16 15:19:34Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-linux"> + <title +>What is GNU/Linux?</title> +<para +>Linux is an operating system: a series of programs that let you interact with your computer and run other programs. </para +><para +>An operating system consists of various fundamental programs which are needed by your computer so that it can communicate and receive instructions from users; read and write data to hard disks, tapes, and printers; control the use of memory; and run other software. The most important part of an operating system is the kernel. In a GNU/Linux system, Linux is the kernel component. The rest of the system consists of other programs, many of which were written by or for the GNU Project. Because the Linux kernel alone does not form a working operating system, we prefer to use the term <quote +>GNU/Linux</quote +> to refer to systems that many people casually refer to as <quote +>Linux</quote +>. </para +><para +>Linux is modelled on the Unix operating system. From the start, Linux was designed to be a multi-tasking, multi-user system. These facts are enough to make Linux different from other well-known operating systems. However, Linux is even more different than you might imagine. In contrast to other operating systems, nobody owns Linux. Much of its development is done by unpaid volunteers. </para +><para +>Development of what later became GNU/Linux began in 1984, when the <ulink url="&url-fsf;" +>Free Software Foundation</ulink +> began development of a free Unix-like operating system called GNU. </para +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-gnu;" +>GNU Project</ulink +> has developed a comprehensive set of free software tools for use with Unix™ and Unix-like operating systems such as Linux. These tools enable users to perform tasks ranging from the mundane (such as copying or removing files from the system) to the arcane (such as writing and compiling programs or doing sophisticated editing in a variety of document formats). </para +><para +>While many groups and individuals have contributed to Linux, the largest single contributor is still the Free Software Foundation, which created not only most of the tools used in Linux, but also the philosophy and the community that made Linux possible. </para +><para +>The <ulink url="&url-kernel-org;" +>Linux kernel</ulink +> first appeared in 1991, when a Finnish computing science student named Linus Torvalds announced an early version of a replacement kernel for Minix to the Usenet newsgroup <userinput +>comp.os.minix</userinput +>. See Linux International's <ulink url="&url-linux-history;" +>Linux History Page</ulink +>. </para +><para +>Linus Torvalds continues to coordinate the work of several hundred developers with the help of a few trusty deputies. An excellent weekly summary of discussions on the <userinput +>linux-kernel</userinput +> mailing list is <ulink url="&url-kernel-traffic;" +>Kernel Traffic</ulink +>. More information about the <userinput +>linux-kernel</userinput +> mailing list can be found on the <ulink url="&url-linux-kernel-list-faq;" +>linux-kernel mailing list FAQ</ulink +>. </para +><para +>Linux users have immense freedom of choice in their software. For example, Linux users can choose from a dozen different command line shells and several graphical desktops. This selection is often bewildering to users of other operating systems, who are not used to thinking of the command line or desktop as something that they can change. </para +><para +>Linux is also less likely to crash, better able to run more than one program at the same time, and more secure than many operating systems. With these advantages, Linux is the fastest growing operating system in the server market. More recently, Linux has begun to be popular among home and business users as well. </para> + + </sect1> + +<!-- End of file welcome/what-is-linux.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml --> +<!-- $Id: what-is-debian-linux.xml 25496 2005-02-07 14:56:06Z fjpop-guest $ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-debian-linux"> + <title +>What is &debian;?</title> +<para +>The combination of Debian's philosophy and methodology and the GNU tools, the Linux kernel, and other important free software, form a unique software distribution called &debian;. This distribution is made up of a large number of software <emphasis +>packages</emphasis +>. Each package in the distribution contains executables, scripts, documentation, and configuration information, and has a <emphasis +>maintainer</emphasis +> who is primarily responsible for keeping the package up-to-date, tracking bug reports, and communicating with the upstream author(s) of the packaged software. Our extremely large user base, combined with our bug tracking system ensures that problems are found and fixed quickly. </para +><para +>Debian's attention to detail allows us to produce a high-quality, stable, and scalable distribution. Installations can be easily configured to serve many roles, from stripped-down firewalls to desktop scientific workstations to high-end network servers. </para +><para +>Debian is especially popular among advanced users because of its technical excellence and its deep commitment to the needs and expectations of the Linux community. Debian also introduced many features to Linux that are now commonplace. </para +><para +>For example, Debian was the first Linux distribution to include a package management system for easy installation and removal of software. It was also the first Linux distribution that could be upgraded without requiring reinstallation. </para +><para +>Debian continues to be a leader in Linux development. Its development process is an example of just how well the Open Source development model can work — even for very complex tasks such as building and maintaining a complete operating system. </para +><para +>The feature that most distinguishes Debian from other Linux distributions is its package management system. These tools give the administrator of a Debian system complete control over the packages installed on that system, including the ability to install a single package or automatically update the entire operating system. Individual packages can also be protected from being updated. You can even tell the package management system about software you have compiled yourself and what dependencies it fulfills. </para +><para +>To protect your system against <quote +>Trojan horses</quote +> and other malevolent software, Debian's servers verify that uploaded packages come from their registered Debian maintainers. Debian packagers also take great care to configure their packages in a secure manner. When security problems in shipped packages do appear, fixes are usually available very quickly. With Debian's simple update options, security fixes can be downloaded and installed automatically across the Internet. </para +><para +>The primary, and best, method of getting support for your &debian; system and communicating with Debian Developers is through the many mailing lists maintained by the Debian Project (there are more than &num-of-debian-maillists; at this writing). The easiest way to subscribe to one or more of these lists is visit <ulink url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;" +> Debian's mailing list subscription page</ulink +> and fill out the form you'll find there. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml --> +<!-- $Id: what-is-debian-hurd.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + +<!-- conditionalised because the hurd port is not yet an official debian +release --> + <sect1 id="what-is-debian-hurd" condition="unofficial-build"> + <title +>What is Debian GNU/Hurd?</title> + +<para +>Debian GNU/Hurd is a Debian GNU system that replaces the Linux monolithic kernel with the GNU Hurd — a set of servers running on top of the GNU Mach microkernel. The Hurd is still unfinished, and is unsuitable for day-to-day use, but work is continuing. The Hurd is currently only being developed for the i386 architecture, although ports to other architectures will be made once the system becomes more stable. </para +><para +>For more information, see the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/hurd/" +> Debian GNU/Hurd ports page</ulink +> and the <email +>debian-hurd@lists.debian.org</email +> mailing list. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml --> +<!-- $Id: getting-newest-inst.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="getting-newest-inst"> + <title +>Getting Debian</title> + +<para +>For information on how to download &debian; from the Internet or from whom official Debian CDs can be purchased, see the <ulink url="&url-debian-distrib;" +>distribution web page</ulink +>. The <ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;" +>list of Debian mirrors</ulink +> contains a full set of official Debian mirrors, so you can easily find the nearest one. </para +><para +>Debian can be upgraded after installation very easily. The installation procedure will help set up the system so that you can make those upgrades once installation is complete, if need be. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml --> +<!-- $Id: getting-newest-doc.xml 28672 2005-06-26 10:06:30Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="getting-newest-doc"> + <title +>Getting the Newest Version of This Document</title> + +<para +>This document is constantly being revised. Be sure to check the <ulink url="&url-release-area;" +> Debian &release; pages</ulink +> for any last-minute information about the &release; release of the &debian; system. Updated versions of this installation manual are also available from the <ulink url="&url-install-manual;" +>official Install Manual pages</ulink +>. </para> + + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/doc-organization.xml --> +<!-- $Id: doc-organization.xml 56322 2008-10-06 13:20:07Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1 id="doc-organization"> + <title +>Organization of This Document</title> + +<para +>This document is meant to serve as a manual for first-time Debian users. It tries to make as few assumptions as possible about your level of expertise. However, we do assume that you have a general understanding of how the hardware in your computer works. </para +><para +>Expert users may also find interesting reference information in this document, including minimum installation sizes, details about the hardware supported by the Debian installation system, and so on. We encourage expert users to jump around in the document. </para +><para +>In general, this manual is arranged in a linear fashion, walking you through the installation process from start to finish. Here are the steps in installing &debian;, and the sections of this document which correlate with each step: <orderedlist> +<listitem +><para +>Determine whether your hardware meets the requirements for using the installation system, in <xref linkend="hardware-req"/>. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Backup your system, perform any necessary planning and hardware configuration prior to installing Debian, in <xref linkend="preparing"/>. If you are preparing a multi-boot system, you may need to create partitionable space on your hard disk for Debian to use. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>In <xref linkend="install-methods"/>, you will obtain the necessary installation files for your method of installation. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +><xref linkend="boot-installer"/> describes booting into the installation system. This chapter also discusses troubleshooting procedures in case you have problems with this step. </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Perform the actual installation according to <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. This involves choosing your language, configuring peripheral driver modules, configuring your network connection, so that remaining installation files can be obtained directly from a Debian server (if you are not installing from a CD), partitioning your hard drives and installation of a base system, then selection and installation of tasks. (Some background about setting up the partitions for your Debian system is explained in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>.) </para +></listitem> +<listitem +><para +>Boot into your newly installed base system, from <xref linkend="boot-new"/>. </para> +</listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para +><para +>Once you've got your system installed, you can read <xref linkend="post-install"/>. That chapter explains where to look to find more information about Unix and Debian, and how to replace your kernel. </para +><para +>Finally, information about this document and how to contribute to it may be found in <xref linkend="administrivia"/>. </para> + + </sect1> + + <sect1 condition="FIXME"> + <title +>Your Documentation Help is Welcome</title> + +<para +>Any help, suggestions, and especially, patches, are greatly appreciated. Working versions of this document can be found at <ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;" +></ulink +>. There you will find a list of all the different architectures and languages for which this document is available. </para +><para +>Source is also available publicly; look in <xref linkend="administrivia"/> for more information concerning how to contribute. We welcome suggestions, comments, patches, and bug reports (use the package <classname +>installation-guide</classname +> for bugs, but check first to see if the problem is already reported). </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/doc-organization.xml --> + +<!-- Start of file welcome/about-copyright.xml --> +<!-- $Id: about-copyright.xml 56422 2008-10-15 08:21:18Z fjp $ --> + + <sect1> +<title +>About Copyrights and Software Licenses </title> + +<para +>We're sure that you've read some of the licenses that come with most commercial software — they usually say that you can only use one copy of the software on a single computer. This system's license isn't like that at all. We encourage you to put a copy of &debian; on every computer in your school or place of business. Lend your installation media to your friends and help them install it on their computers! You can even make thousands of copies and <emphasis +>sell</emphasis +> them — albeit with a few restrictions. Your freedom to install and use the system comes directly from Debian being based on <emphasis +>free software</emphasis +>. </para +><para +>Calling software <emphasis +>free</emphasis +> doesn't mean that the software isn't copyrighted, and it doesn't mean that CDs containing that software must be distributed at no charge. Free software, in part, means that the licenses of individual programs do not require you to pay for the privilege of distributing or using those programs. Free software also means that not only may anyone extend, adapt, and modify the software, but that they may distribute the results of their work as well. <note +><para +>The Debian project, as a pragmatic concession to its users, does make some packages available that do not meet our criteria for being free. These packages are not part of the official distribution, however, and are only available from the <userinput +>contrib</userinput +> or <userinput +>non-free</userinput +> areas of Debian mirrors or on third-party CD-ROMs; see the <ulink url="&url-debian-faq;" +>Debian FAQ</ulink +>, under <quote +>The Debian FTP archives</quote +>, for more information about the layout and contents of the archives. </para +></note> + +</para +><para +>Many of the programs in the system are licensed under the <emphasis +>GNU</emphasis +> <emphasis +>General Public License</emphasis +>, often simply referred to as <quote +>the GPL</quote +>. The GPL requires you to make the <emphasis +>source code</emphasis +> of the programs available whenever you distribute a binary copy of the program; that provision of the license ensures that any user will be able to modify the software. Because of this provision, the source code<footnote +> <para +> For information on how to locate, unpack, and build binaries from Debian source packages, see the <ulink url="&url-debian-faq;" +>Debian FAQ</ulink +>, under <quote +>Basics of the Debian Package Management System</quote +>. </para +> </footnote +> for all such programs is available in the Debian system. </para +><para +>There are several other forms of copyright statements and software licenses used on the programs in Debian. You can find the copyrights and licenses for every package installed on your system by looking in the file <filename +>/usr/share/doc/<replaceable +>package-name</replaceable +>/copyright </filename +> once you've installed a package on your system. </para +><para +>For more information about licenses and how Debian determines whether software is free enough to be included in the main distribution, see the <ulink url="&url-dfsg;" +>Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink +>. </para +><para +>The most important legal notice is that this software comes with <emphasis +>no warranties</emphasis +>. The programmers who have created this software have done so for the benefit of the community. No guarantee is made as to the suitability of the software for any given purpose. However, since the software is free, you are empowered to modify that software to suit your needs — and to enjoy the benefits of the changes made by others who have extended the software in this way. </para> + </sect1> +<!-- End of file welcome/about-copyright.xml --> + +</chapter> +<!-- End of file welcome/welcome.xml --> |